FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 2-Way Mobile Radio (with Bluetooth, Bluetooth LE and WIFI)

 

Draft Page APX TWO-WAY RADIOS APX 8500 MOBILE RADIO INSTALLATION MANUAL

-i Draft 0 Draft Foreword This manual covers the O2, O3, O5, O7 and O9 models of the ASTRO APX mobile radios. It includes all the information necessary to install high and mid power radios and configure radio installation inside vehicles. For details on radio operation or component-level troubleshooting, refer to the applicable manuals available separately. A list of related publications is provided in the section Related Publications RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-way Radios See Installation Requirements for Compliance with Radio Frequency (RF) Energy Exposure Safety Standards,. Manual Revisions Changes which occur after this manual is printed are described in PMRs (Publication Manual Revisions). These PMRs provide complete replacement pages for all added, changed, and deleted items. To obtain PMRs, go to https://businessonline.motorolasolutions.com. Parts Ordering See Appendix A: Replacement Parts Ordering for information on how to obtain replacement parts. For part numbers, refer to the ASTRO APX Mobile Radio Basic Service Manual (Motorola Solutions publication). Computer Software Copyrights The Motorola Solutions products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola Solutions certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs, including, but not limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs contained in the Motorola Solutions products described in this manual may not be copied, reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or distributed in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola Solutions products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola Solutions, except for the normal non-exclusive license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. Document Copyrights No duplication or distribution of this document or any portion thereof shall take place without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. No part of this manual may be reproduced, distributed, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. Disclaimer The information in this document is carefully examined, and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies. Furthermore, Motorola Solutions reserves the right to make changes to any products herein to improve readability, function, or design. Motorola Solutions does not assume any liability arising out of the applications or use of any product or circuit described herein; nor does it cover any license under its patent rights nor the rights of others. Trademarks MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2018 by Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. i Draft Installation Requirements for Compliance with Radio Frequency (RF) Energy Exposure Safety Standards ATTENTION!

This radio is intended for use in occupational/controlled conditions, where users have full knowledge of their exposure and can exercise control over their exposure to meet FCC limits. This radio device is NOT authorized for general population, consumer, or any other use. To ensure compliance to RF Energy Exposure Regulations:

Install only Motorola Solutions approved antennas and accessories Be sure that antenna installation is per Antenna Installation of this manual Be sure that Product Safety and RF Safety Booklet enclosed with this radio is available to the end user upon completion of the installation of this radio Before using this product, read the guide enclosed with your radio which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for compliance with applicable standards and regulations. For a list of Motorola Solutions-approved antennas and other accessories, visit the following web site which lists approved accessories for your radio model: http://www.motorolasolutions.com. ii Draft Table of Contents Table of Contents iii Foreword..........................................................................................................i RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-way Radios..............................................i Manual Revisions .........................................................................................................................................i Parts Ordering ..............................................................................................................................................i Computer Software Copyrights ....................................................................................................................i Document Copyrights...................................................................................................................................i Disclaimer.....................................................................................................................................................i Trademarks ..................................................................................................................................................i Installation Requirements for Compliance with Radio Frequency (RF) Energy Exposure Safety Standards.......................ii Mobile Radio Model Numbering Scheme..................................................xiii Commercial Warranty ..................................................................................xv Limited Warranty .......................................................................................................................................xv MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS .........................................................xv I. What This Warranty Covers And For How Long ....................................................................xv II. General Provisions...............................................................................................................xvi III. State Law Rights .................................................................................................................xvi IV. How To Get Warranty Service ............................................................................................xvi V. What This Warranty Does Not Cover...................................................................................xvi VI. Patent And Software Provisions ........................................................................................ xvii VII. Governing Law.................................................................................................................. xvii Chapter 1 Introduction ......................................................................... 1-1 1.1 Mobile Radio Description............................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 Dimensions ....................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Standard Configurations ................................................................................................................ 1-6 1.2.1 Dash Mount Configuration ................................................................................................ 1-6 1.2.2 Remote Mount Configuration............................................................................................ 1-8 1.2.3 Multi Control Head .......................................................................................................... 1-11 1.3 Motorcycle Configurations ........................................................................................................... 1-11 1.4 Base/Control Stations .................................................................................................................. 1-11 1.5 Tools Required for APX Mobile Installations ............................................................................... 1-11 Chapter 2 Standard Configurations.................................................... 2-1 2.1 Planning the Installation................................................................................................................. 2-1 2.1.3 Radio Operation Wiring for Dash and Remote Configurations ....................................... 2-12 2.1.3.1 Dash Mount: Power, Ignition, and Emergency Cable Installation.......................... 2-12 2.1.3.2 Remote Mount: Power, Ignition, and Emergency Cable Installation...................... 2-13 2.1.4 Ignition Sense Switch (Radio Wide Advance) ................................................................ 2-15 2.1.5 Motorola Branded SB9600 Siren/PA Configuration/Programming ................................. 2-17 MN003109A01 Draft iv Table of Contents 2.2.3 2.2 Radio Mounting ........................................................................................................................... 2-18 2.2.2 Remote Mount with Trunnion.......................................................................................... 2-21 2.2.2.1 Remote Mount Control Head Installation............................................................... 2-21 2.2.2.2 Multiple Control Head Installation.......................................................................... 2-24 2.2.2.3 Cable Installation ................................................................................................... 2-26 2.2.2.4 Setting the Initial Control Head ID ......................................................................... 2-26 2.2.2.5 O3 Control Head and Remote Mount Cabling....................................................... 2-27 Locking Kit (Optional) ..................................................................................................... 2-29 2.2.3.1 All Radios .............................................................................................................. 2-29 2.3 Power Cables (Transceiver and Control Head)........................................................................... 2-30 2.3.1 O2, O5, O7 or O9 Control Head Power Cables.............................................................. 2-30 2.3.2 Battery Selector Switch................................................................................................... 2-31 2.4 Antenna Installation ..................................................................................................................... 2-32 2.4.1 Selecting an Antenna Site/Location on a Metal Body Vehicle........................................ 2-32 2.4.2 Multiplexers and Vehicle Installation............................................................................... 2-34 2.4.3 QMA Connection (APX8500 Only) ................................................................................. 2-34 2.4.4 GPS/GLONASS/Wi-Fi/Antenna Placement (APX8500 Only)......................................... 2-34 2.5 Speaker ....................................................................................................................................... 2-35 Internal Speaker Disassembly........................................................................................ 2-36 2.6 Microphone Hang-Up Clip ........................................................................................................... 2-38 Standard or O3 Control Head Hang-Up Clip .................................................................. 2-38 2.7 RFID (Option) .............................................................................................................................. 2-38 2.7.1 RFID Reading................................................................................................................. 2-39 2.7.2 Programming RFID (If Equipped) ................................................................................... 2-41 2.8 Completing the Installation .......................................................................................................... 2-42 2.6.1 2.5.1 Chapter 3 Universal Relay Controller Installation ............................. 3-1 3.1 Universal Relay Controller Mounting ............................................................................................. 3-1 3.2 O7/O9 Universal Relay Controller Cable Assembly ...................................................................... 3-3 3.2.1 Power Cable ..................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.2.2 Ground Cable ................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.2.3 Wires ................................................................................................................................ 3-4 3.2.4 O7/O9 to URC Cable........................................................................................................ 3-5 Chapter 4 Options and Accessories Installation ............................... 4-1 4.1 Dash-Mount Accessory Installation ............................................................................................... 4-1 4.1.1 Dash-Mount Emergency Pushbutton or Footswitch Installation ....................................... 4-1 4.1.2 Dash-Mount Horn and Lights (External Alarms) Relays................................................... 4-2 4.2 Remote-Mount Accessory Installation ........................................................................................... 4-2 4.2.1 Emergency Pushbutton or Footswitch Installation............................................................ 4-3 4.2.2 Horn (External Alarm) Relay Installation........................................................................... 4-3 4.2.3 Lights (External Alarm) Relay Installation......................................................................... 4-3 4.2.4 Gunlock Installation .......................................................................................................... 4-3 4.2.5 Horn-Ring Transfer........................................................................................................... 4-5 4.2.6 Record Audio Out Jack of Transmit and Receive Audio................................................... 4-5 4.2.7 Earphone Jack.................................................................................................................. 4-5 4.2.8 USB Data Cables.............................................................................................................. 4-6 4.2.9 RS232 Cables .................................................................................................................. 4-6 4.3 Vehicle Interface Port Overview .................................................................................................... 4-6 VIP Output Connections ................................................................................................... 4-7 VIP Input Connections...................................................................................................... 4-8 4.3.1 4.3.2 MN003109A01 Draft Table of Contents v 4.4 Accessory Connector Assembly Details (P2) ................................................................................ 4-9 4.4.1 Disassembly and Assembly.............................................................................................. 4-9 4.4.1.1 Disassembly ............................................................................................................ 4-9 4.4.1.2 Assembly ............................................................................................................... 4-10 4.5 Motorola Branded SB9600 Siren Connection to APX 8500......................................................... 4-11 4.6 Compatibility of Emergency when Attaching a Motorola Branded SB9600 Siren........................ 4-13 Chapter 5 Motorcycle Radio Installation ............................................ 5-1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.1 Motorcycle Radio Description ........................................................................................................ 5-1 5.1.1 Transceiver Enclosure ...................................................................................................... 5-1 5.1.2 Control/Display Unit .......................................................................................................... 5-1 5.1.3 Control Head Cable .......................................................................................................... 5-1 5.1.4 Microphone ....................................................................................................................... 5-2 5.1.5 External Speaker .............................................................................................................. 5-2 5.1.6 Headset Capability............................................................................................................ 5-2 5.1.7 Antenna ............................................................................................................................ 5-2 5.1.8 Ignition Sense (ACC) Wire................................................................................................ 5-2 Installation Overview...................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2.1 General ............................................................................................................................. 5-3 5.2.2 Important Motorcycle Installation Hints............................................................................. 5-4 5.2.3 Parts Identification ............................................................................................................ 5-5 5.2.4 Order of Installation .......................................................................................................... 5-5 Installing the Universal Mounting Plate.......................................................................................... 5-6 Installing the Speaker and Control Head ....................................................................................... 5-7 5.4.1 Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together...................... 5-8 5.4.2 Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together ........ 5-9 5.4.3 Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately................. 5-11 5.4.4 Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately ... 5-12 Installing the Speaker .................................................................................................................. 5-14 Installing the Microphone Hang-Up Clip ...................................................................................... 5-14 Extension Bracket Mounting ........................................................................................... 5-14 5.6.1 5.6.2 Speaker/Control Head Bracket Side Mounting ............................................................... 5-14 5.6.3 Other Hang-Up Clip Mounting ........................................................................................ 5-15 Installing Antenna Base, Cables and Multiplexer ........................................................................ 5-15 5.7 5.8 Installing the Antenna .................................................................................................................. 5-21 5.9 Cable Routing .............................................................................................................................. 5-21 5.10 Installing the Weather-Resistant Enclosure................................................................................. 5-23 5.11 Transceiver, Cabling and Multiplexer Installation ....................................................................... 5-24 5.11.1 Installing Cabling in the Enclosure.................................................................................. 5-24 5.11.2 Installing the Transceiver................................................................................................ 5-25 5.12 Installing the Emergency Switch Option ...................................................................................... 5-27 5.13 Installing the External Alarm Relay Option .................................................................................. 5-27 5.14 Installing the Headset Accessory................................................................................................. 5-27 5.15 Installing the O5 Control Head Sunshield.................................................................................... 5-29 5.16 Horn/Lights Wiring ....................................................................................................................... 5-31 5.17 Emergency Switch Wiring............................................................................................................ 5-31 5.5 5.6 Chapter 6 Finishing the Installation.................................................... 6-1 6.1 Cable Connection .......................................................................................................................... 6-1 6.1.1 O2 Control Head............................................................................................................... 6-1 6.1.2 O3 Control Head............................................................................................................... 6-1 MN003109A01 Draft vi Table of Contents 6.1.3 O5 Control Head............................................................................................................... 6-1 6.1.4 O7 Control Head............................................................................................................... 6-2 6.1.5 O9 Control Head............................................................................................................... 6-2 6.2 Dust Cover Installation .................................................................................................................. 6-3 Chapter 7 Best Practices: Installation & Troubleshooting ............... 7-1 7.1 Check Wiring of Ignition and Radio Ignition Sensing..................................................................... 7-1 7.2 Check Physical Installation of Radio Ground and Radio Accessory Wiring .................................. 7-2 7.3 Improve the Electrical Quality of the Power and Ignition Lines ..................................................... 7-2 7.4 Minimize the Effect of Poorly Grounded Antennas........................................................................ 7-3 7.5 Jump-Start the Vehicle .................................................................................................................. 7-3 7.6 Eliminate Noise/Howling from PA Speaker ................................................................................... 7-3 Appendix A Replacement Parts Ordering..............................................A-1 A.1 Basic Ordering Information............................................................................................................A-1 A.2 Motorola Online Service and Support............................................................................................A-1 A.3 Accessories Aftermarket Division (AAD) .......................................................................................A-2 Index .....................................................................................................Index-1 Glossary .........................................................................................Glossary-1 Related Publications ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O2 Control Head User Guide.......................................................... 68012006035 ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O3 Control Head User Guide .......................................................... 6875946M01 ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O5 Control Head User Guide .......................................................... 6875947M01 ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O7 Control Head User Guide.......................................................... 68012006034 ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O9 Control Head User Guide ......................................................... 68007024014 ASTRO APX Mobile Radio Basic Service Manual .................................................................. MN003076A01 ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O2 Quick Reference Card ................................................................. PMLN6193 ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O3 Quick Reference Card ................................................................. PMLN5591 ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O5 Quick Reference Card ................................................................. PMLN5592 ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O7 Quick Reference Card ................................................................. PMLN6194 ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O9 Quick Reference Card ................................................................. PMLN5711 ASTRO APX Mobile Safety Manual ......................................................................... 6881095C99/NNTN7851 ASTRO APX Wi-Fi Provisioning Leaflet ................................................................ MN001435A01/PMLN7688 MN003109A01 Draft vii List of Figures List of Figures Figure 1-1. Front View of O2 Control Head Attached to APX 8500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion .............................................................. 1-1 Figure 1-2. Side View of O2 Control Head Attached to APX 8500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion............................................................... 1-1 Figure 1-3. Front View of O3 Control Head with Coiled Cable................................................................ 1-1 Figure 1-4. Side View of O3 Control Head with Coiled Cable ................................................................. 1-1 Figure 1-5. Front View of O5 Control Head Attached to APX 8500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion............................................................... 1-2 Figure 1-6. Side View of O5 Control Head Attached to APX 8500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion................................................................................. 1-2 Figure 1-7. Front View of O7 Control Head Attached to APX 8500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion......................................................................................................................... 1-2 Figure 1-8. Side View of O7 Control Head Attached to APX 8500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion................................................................................................................................ 1-2 Figure 1-9. Front View of Remote Mount and Trunnion .......................................................................... 1-2 Figure 1-10. Side View of Remote Mount and Trunnion ........................................................................... 1-2 Figure 1-11. Front View of O2 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion....................................... 1-3 Figure 1-12. Side View of O2 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion ........................................ 1-3 Figure 1-13. Front View of O5 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion....................................... 1-3 Figure 1-14. Side View of O5 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion ........................................ 1-3 Figure 1-15. Front View of O7 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion....................................... 1-3 Figure 1-16. Side View of O7 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion ........................................ 1-3 Figure 1-17. Front View of O9 Control Head with Trunnion ...................................................................... 1-4 Figure 1-18. Side View of O9 Control Head with Trunnion........................................................................ 1-4 Figure 1-19. Top View of O9 Universal Relay Controller with Trunnion (URC is an orderable accessory)1-4 Figure 1-20. Side View of O9 UniversalRelay Controller with Trunnion(URC is an orderable accessory) 1-4 Figure 1-21. Siren and Lights Interface Module (SLIM) ............................................................................ 1-4 Figure 1-22. Front View of SB9600 Whelen Siren .................................................................................... 1-5 Figure 1-23. Siren/PA Cable Connections................................................................................................. 1-5 Figure 1-24. Dash Mount Configuration for O2 Control Head................................................................... 1-6 Figure 1-25. Dash Mount Configuration for O3 Control Head................................................................... 1-6 Figure 1-26. Dash Mount Configuration for O5 Control Head................................................................... 1-7 Figure 1-27. Dash Mount Configuration for O7 Control Head................................................................... 1-7 Figure 1-28. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, CHIB Rear Assembly and O2 Control Head ........................................................................ 1-8 Figure 1-29. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board and O3 Control Head................................................................................................................... 1-8 Figure 1-30. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, CHIB Rear Assembly and O5 Control Head ......................................................................... 1-9 Figure 1-31. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, CHIB Rear Assembly and O7 Control Head................................................................................... 1-9 Figure 1-32. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board and O9 Control Head................................................................................................................... 1-9 Figure 1-33. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Radio Transceiver, Universal Relay Controller and O7 Control Head (URC is optional).............................................................................. 1-10 Figure 1-34. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Radio Transceiver, Universal Relay Controller and O9 Control Head (URC is optional).............................................................................. 1-10 Figure 2-1. Dash Mount Radios Can Be Located in the Middle Console, on the Transmission Hump, or Under the Dash..................................................................................................................... 2-2 MN003109A01 Draft viii List of Figures Figure 2-2. Remote Mount Radio Control Heads Can Be Located in the Middle Console, on the Transmis-

sion Hump, or Under the Dash ............................................................................................. 2-2 Figure 2-3. Remote Mount of the Radio, O9 Control Head and Universal Relay Controller (URC is optional)................................................................................................................................ 2-2 Figure 2-4. Radio Installation (O2 Mid Power Dash Mount).................................................................... 2-3 Figure 2-5. Radio Installation (O3 Mid Power Dash Mount).................................................................... 2-3 Figure 2-6. Radio Installation (O5 Mid Power Dash Mount).................................................................... 2-4 Figure 2-7. Radio Installation (O7 Mid Power Dash Mount).................................................................... 2-4 Figure 2-8. Radio Installation (O2 Mid Power Remote Mount) ............................................................... 2-5 Figure 2-9. Radio Installation (O3 Mid Power Remote Mount) ............................................................... 2-6 Figure 2-10. Radio Installation (O5 Mid Power Remote Mount) ............................................................... 2-6 Figure 2-11. Radio Installation (O7 Mid Power Remote Mount) ............................................................... 2-7 Figure 2-12. Radio Installation of O9 Remote Mount with Transceiver (URC is optional) ........................ 2-7 Figure 2-13. Radio Installation (O9 Remote Mount with Pinouts) ............................................................. 2-8 Figure 2-14. Remote Control Head Pinouts.............................................................................................. 2-8 Figure 2-15. Cabling Interconnect Diagram for Dash Mount..................................................................... 2-9 Figure 2-16. Cabling Interconnect Diagram for Remote Mount .............................................................. 2-10 Figure 2-17. Cabling Interconnect Diagram for 09 Remote Mount (URC is optional) ..............................2-11 Figure 2-18. APX8500 Mid Power Trunnion Orientation......................................................................... 2-18 Figure 2-19. Transmission Hump Trunnion Mounting ............................................................................. 2-20 Figure 2-20. Below Dash Trunnion Mounting.......................................................................................... 2-20 Figure 2-21. O5 Control Head Installation Exploded View (Also applicable for O2 and O7 Control Heads)........................................................................................................................................ 2-22 Figure 2-22. O9 Control Head Installation Exploded View...................................................................... 2-23 Figure 2-23. O5 and O9 Control Head Rear View .................................................................................. 2-23 Figure 2-24. Multiple Control Heads Parallel Configurations .................................................................. 2-24 Figure 2-25. Multiple Control Heads Series Configurations .................................................................... 2-25 Figure 2-26. APX Mobile O5 Control Head Front View........................................................................... 2-26 Figure 2-27. Radio Display with Current Control Head ID ...................................................................... 2-26 Figure 2-28. APX Mobile O5 Control Head Front View Mode Knob .................................................... 2-26 Figure 2-29. O3 Control Head................................................................................................................. 2-27 Figure 2-30. O3 Control Head Rear View ............................................................................................... 2-28 Figure 2-31. Hang-Up Clip Installation Exploded View ........................................................................... 2-28 Figure 2-32. Locking Kit (Optional) ........................................................................................................ 2-29 Figure 2-33. HKN6188_ Power Cable with External Speaker Connector ............................................... 2-30 Figure 2-34. HKN6187_ Power Cable with External Speaker Connector, Record Audio Output Jack (2.5 mm) and Earphone Jack (2.5 mm)................................................ 2-31 Figure 2-35. Battery Selector Switch....................................................................................................... 2-31 Figure 2-36. Multiple Antennas Separation for locations 1-10 ................................................................ 2-33 Figure 2-37. Multiplexer Views................................................................................................................ 2-34 Figure 2-38. GPS/GLONASS and Wi-Fi Antenna Connector on the Back of the Mid Power Radio ....... 2-34 Figure 2-39. Speaker Mounting............................................................................................................... 2-35 Figure 2-40. Removing the screws on the Control Head ........................................................................ 2-36 Figure 2-41. Removing the Control Head ............................................................................................... 2-36 Figure 2-42. Disconnecting the Speaker Connector ............................................................................... 2-37 Figure 2-43. Reattaching the Control Head ............................................................................................ 2-37 Figure 2-44. RFID Location on Mid Power Radio ................................................................................... 2-38 Figure 2-45. Read Angle for Mid Power Radio........................................................................................ 2-39 Figure 2-46. Tag Angle for Mid Power Radio .......................................................................................... 2-39 Figure 2-47. Examples of Reader and Tag Aligned (Reader Orientation)............................................... 2-40 Figure 2-48. Example of Reader and Tag Misaligned (Reader Orientation) ........................................... 2-40 Figure 3-1. Universal Relay Controller Orientation ................................................................................. 3-1 Figure 3-2. Universal Relay Controller Installation Exploded View ......................................................... 3-2 Figure 3-3. Power and Ground Cable Glands......................................................................................... 3-3 Draft List of Figures ix Figure 3-4. Cable Gland Assembly with Gasket...................................................................................... 3-4 Figure 3-5. Wires Installation................................................................................................................... 3-4 Figure 3-6. Wire Installation with Black Stick .......................................................................................... 3-5 Figure 3-7. O7/O9 to URC Cable Installation.......................................................................................... 3-5 Figure 4-1. Emergency Switch Wiring Diagram ...................................................................................... 4-1 Figure 4-2. Horn/Light Wiring Diagram.................................................................................................... 4-2 Figure 4-3. Radio MAP Connector .......................................................................................................... 4-2 Figure 4-4. Gunlock Switch Redundancy Diagram ................................................................................. 4-4 Figure 4-5. Siren/PA Horn-Ring Connections.......................................................................................... 4-5 Figure 4-6. Remote Control Head Pinouts .............................................................................................. 4-6 Figure 4-7. HKN6196_ VIP Connector Detail.......................................................................................... 4-6 Figure 4-8. Relay Coil.............................................................................................................................. 4-7 Figure 4-9. Exploded View of Accessory Connector Assembly (HLN6863_) ........................................ 4-10 Figure 4-10. J600 Accessory Connector Y-Cable KT000247A01............................................................ 4-11 Figure 4-11. Pinout for cable KT000247A01........................................................................................... 4-11 Figure 4-12. Interfacing the Y-cable to the Motorola Branded SB9600 Siren and External Accessories 4-12 Figure 4-13. Field adjustment for Emergency Operation with Siren Accessory ...................................... 4-13 Figure 4-14. Location for Pin 8................................................................................................................ 4-13 Figure 5-1. Identification of a Motorcycle Radio by Using a Label .......................................................... 5-1 Figure 5-2. Universal Mounting Plate Installation (Part of Radio Enclosure Kit) ..................................... 5-6 Figure 5-3. Motorcycle Control Head Cabling (3075217A01) ................................................................. 5-7 Figure 5-4. Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together .......................... 5-8 Figure 5-5. Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together ........... 5-10 Figure 5-6. Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately..................... 5-12 Figure 5-7. Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately........ 5-13 Figure 5-8. Antenna Band Identification................................................................................................ 5-15 Figure 5-9. Antenna Port Locations....................................................................................................... 5-16 Figure 5-10. Routing the GPS/Wi-Fi Cable ............................................................................................. 5-17 Figure 5-11. Routing the VHF Antenna Cable......................................................................................... 5-18 Figure 5-12. Routing the 700/800 Antenna Cable................................................................................... 5-18 Figure 5-13. Routing the UHF Antenna Cable......................................................................................... 5-19 Figure 5-14. Multiplexer and Trunnion Mounting..................................................................................... 5-19 Figure 5-15. Cable Routing ..................................................................................................................... 5-20 Figure 5-16. Cable from Radio to Multiplexer.......................................................................................... 5-20 Figure 5-17. Cable Routing ..................................................................................................................... 5-21 Figure 5-18. Weather-Resistant Enclosure Installation ........................................................................... 5-23 Figure 5-19. Installing Cables.................................................................................................................. 5-25 Figure 5-20. Installing the Transceiver .................................................................................................... 5-26 Figure 5-21. Motorcycle Wiring Harness Rework.................................................................................... 5-28 Figure 5-22. Remote Mount Trunnion with Sunshield ............................................................................. 5-29 Figure 5-23. Position the Sunshield ........................................................................................................ 5-29 Figure 5-24. Slide the Control Head onto Trunnion................................................................................. 5-30 Figure 5-25. Position Control Head as Desired....................................................................................... 5-30 Figure 5-26. Horn/Lights Wiring Diagram................................................................................................ 5-31 Figure 5-27. Emergency Switch Wiring Diagram .................................................................................... 5-31 Figure 6-1. Dust Cover Installation Locations ......................................................................................... 6-3 MN003109A01 Draft List of Tables x List of Tables Table 2-1. Dash and Remote O2, O3, O5, O7 or O9 Radio Power ON @ J2 ................................ 2-14 Table 2-2. Remote O2, O5, O7 or O9 Radio Power ON @ J200.................................................... 2-14 Ignition Interface Cables ................................................................................................ 2-14 Table 2-3. Table 2-4. Ignition Sense Switch Settings in CPS........................................................................... 2-15 Table 2-5. Power Level Configurations ...........................................................................................2-17 Table 2-6. Mid Power Trunnion Kit.................................................................................................. 2-19 Table 2-7. Available CAN Cables.................................................................................................... 2-25 Table 2-8. Power Cables................................................................................................................. 2-30 Table 2-1. Model Number Chart in 12-Digit ASCII Format.............................................................. 2-41 Table 2-2. Serial Number with Radio Band/Tier/Power................................................................... 2-41 Table 4-1. VIP Output Connections................................................................................................... 4-7 Table 4-2. VIP Input Connections ..................................................................................................... 4-8 Table 5-1. Transceiver Installation Parts List .................................................................................. 5-27 MN003109A01_aa List of Tables Draft Notes xi MN003109A01_aa Draft xii List of Tables MN003109A01_aa Draft Mobile Radio Model Numbering Scheme Mobile Radio Model Numbering Scheme xiii Typical Model Number:

Position:

M 3 7 1 2 3 T 4 S S 5 6 9 7 P W 1 8 10 9 A 11 N S 12 13 0 P 1 14 15 16 24 = APX 2500 22 = APX 4500 37 = APX 8500 Position 1 - Type of Unit M = Mobile L = Table Top Station Positions 2 & 3 - Model Series Model Series 30 = APX 7500 25 = APX 6500 36 = APX1500 Position 4 - Frequency Band

=

A

=

B

=

C

=

D

=

E

=

F

=

G

=

H Less than 29.7MHz 29.7 to 35.99MHz 36 to 41MHz 42 to 50MHz 300 to 345MHz 66 to 80MHz 74 to 90MHz Product Specific VHF Range 136 to 162MHz 146 to 178MHz 174 to 210MHz 190 to 235MHz

=

=

=

=

UHF Range N P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 330 to 370MHz 366 to 410MHz 403 to 437MHz 438 to 482MHz 470 to 620MHz Product Specific 806 to 870MHz*

825 to 870MHz 896 to 941MHz 403-470MHz 1.0 to 1.6GHz 1.5 to 2.0GHz

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

J K L M

* For APX 7500 "K" in Position 4 represents 136-174MHz.

* For APX 7500 "Q" in Position 4 represents 380-470MHz.

* For APX 7500 "S" in Position 4 represent 470-520MHz.

* For APX 7500 "U" in Position 4 represent 762-870MHz. Note: Values represented are not absolute, and are given to indicate range only. 36 to 60 Watts 61 to 110 Watts Up to 125 Watts 1 to 25 Watts 25 to 40 Watts 25 to 45 Watts 10 to 35 Watts 10 to 50 Watts 25 to 110 Watts 0 to 0.7 Watts 0.7 to 0.9 Watts 1.0 to 3.9 Watts 4.0 to 5.0 Watts 5.1 to 6.0 Watts 6.1 to 10 Watts 10.1 to 15 Watts 16 to 25 Watts 26 to 35 Watts Position 5 - Power Level

=

K

=

A

=

L

=

B

=

M

=

C

=

N

=

D

=

P

=

E

=

Q

=

F

=

R

=

G

=

S

=

H

=

T

=

J Note: Values represented are not absolute, and are given to indicate range only. Position 6 - Physical Packages A

=

B

=

C

=

D

=

E

=

F

=

G

=

H

=

J

=

K

=

L

=

M

=

N

=

P

=

Q

=

R

=

S

=

T

=

=

U

=

V

=

W Position 7 - Channel Spacing 0 =

1 = 5KHz 2 = 6.25KHz 3 = 10KHz 4 = 12.5KHz RF Modem Operation Receiver Only Standard Control; No Display Standard Control; With Display Limited Keypad; No Display Limited Keypad; With Display Full Keypad; No Display Full Keypad; With Display Limited Controls; No Display Limited Controls; Basic Display Limited Controls; Limited Display Rotary Controls; Standard Display Enhanced Controls; Enhanced Display Low Profile; No Display Low Profile; Basic Display Low Profile; Basic Display, Full Keypad Tranceiver with Selectable Control Head 5 = 15KHz 6 = 20/25KHz 7 = 30KHz 8 = 12.5/25KHz 9 = Variable/Programmable VDV Control Head Control Head #2 MN003109A01_aa Positions 13 - 16 SP Model Suffix Position 12 -

Unique Model Variations C = Cenelec N = Standard Package Position 11 - Version Version Letter (Alpha) - Major Change Position 10 - Feature Level 1 = Basic 2 = Limited Package 3 = Limited Plus 4 = Intermediate 5 = Standard Package 6 = Standard Plus 7 = Expanded Package 8 = Expanded Plus 9 = Full Feature/

Programmable A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 2 Position 9 - Primary System Type

=

Conventional

=

Privacy Plus

=

Clear SMARTNET

=

Advanced Conventional Stat-Alert

=

Enhanced Privacy Plus

=

Nauganet 888 Series

=

Japan Specialized Mobile Radio (JSMR)

=

Multi-Channel Access (MCA)

=

CoveragePLUS

=

MPT1327* - Public

=

MPT1327* - Private

=

Radiocom

=

Tone Signalling

=

Binary Signalling

=

Phonenet

=

IDEN Basic

=

IDEN Advanced Feature

=

JSMR Digital

=

LTR Protocol

=

Single Sideband

=

Programmable

=

Secure Conventional

=

Secure SMARTNET

=

TETRA

=

SmartZone

* MPT = Ministry of Posts and Telecommunications A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S T Position 8 - Primary Operation

=

Conventional/Simplex

=

Conventional/Duplex

=

Trunked Twin Type

=

Dual Mode Trunked

=

Dual Mode Trunked/Duplex

=

Trunked Type I

=

Trunked Type II

=

FDMA* Digital Dual Mode

=

TDMA** Digital Dual Mode

=

Single Sideband

=

Global Positioning Satellite Capable

=

Amplitude Companded Sideband (ACSB)

=

Digital Dispatch

=

Programmable

=

Digital Interconnect

=

Digital Multi-Service

=

9600 Capable

=

TDMA

* FDMA = Frequency Division Multiple Access

** TDMA = Time Division Multiple Access xiv Draft Notes Mobile Radio Model Numbering Scheme MN003109A01_aa Draft Commercial Warranty Commercial Warranty xv Limited Warranty MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS I. What This Warranty Covers And For How Long MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS INC. (MOTOROLA) warrants the MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS manufactured Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

ASTRO APX Mobile Radio Product Accessories One (1) Year One (1) Year Motorola Solutions, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. MN003109A01_aa Draft xvi II. General Provisions Commercial Warranty This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS'S responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS's option, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. III. State Law Rights SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. IV. How To Get Warranty Service You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by Motorola Solutions through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product, it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also call Motorola Solutions at 1-888-567-7347 US/Canada. V. What This Warranty Does Not Cover A. Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. B. Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. C. Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. D. Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. E. A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassemblies or repairs

(including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-Motorola Solutions supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with Motorola Solutions's normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. F. Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. G. Rechargeable batteries if:

- any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering.

- the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. H. Freight costs to the repair depot. MN003109A01_aa Draft Commercial Warranty xvii I. A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLA SOLUTIONSs published specifications or the FCC certification labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. J. Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. K. Normal and customary wear and tear. VI. Patent And Software Provisions MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

A. B. that MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim;

that MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise; and C. should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS's opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes noninfringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, nor will MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such Motorola Solutions software. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software or exercise of rights in such MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS patent rights or copyrights. VII. Governing Law This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, USA. MN003109A01_aa xviii Draft Notes Commercial Warranty MN003109A01_aa Draft Chapter 1 Introduction This manual covers the installation procedures for ASTRO APX mobile and motorcycle radios with O2, O3, O5, O7 and O9 control heads, and accessories required to complete the radio system. The radio system consists of a control head, radio, antenna, microphone, speaker, cabling, Universal Relay Controller (URC), and accessories. NOTE: APX Mobile high power do not support motorcycle radios. 1.1 Mobile Radio Description 1.1.1 Dimensions When installing the radio, plan the installation carefully and leave additional room in the rear of the radio for cabling and accessory connections. Allow additional room in the front of the radio for access, controls, and cabling for remote mount and to the sides of the radio so that you can access and install the trunnion screws/wing screws. NOTE: The measurement unit used in Figure 1-1 to Figure 1-20 is millimeter. 206 306 293 51 84 Figure 1-1. Front View of O2 Control Head Attached Figure 1-2. Side View of O2 Control Head to APX 8500 Attached to APX 8500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion 61 38 153 Draft 1-2 Introduction Mobile Radio Description Figure 1-3. Front View of O3 Control Head with Coiled Cable Figure 1-4. Side View of O3 Control Head with Coiled Cable 206 178 286 274 51 84 Figure 1-5. Front View of O5 Control Head Attached to APX 8500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion Figure 1-6. Side View of O5 Control Head Attached to APX 8500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion 206 178 291 278 51 84 Figure 1-8. Side View of O7 Control Head Attached to APX 8500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion Figure 1-7. Front View of O7 Control Head Attached to APX 8500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion Figure 1-9 and Figure 1-10, show the basic dimensions of the remote mount transceiver trunnion APX mobile radio. 206 178 261 51 84 Figure 1-9. Front View of Remote Mount and Trunnion Figure 1-10. Side View of Remote Mount and Trunnion MN003109A01_aa Draft Introduction Mobile Radio Description 1-3 209 123 97 99 Figure 1-11. Front View of O2 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion Figure 1-12. Side View of O2 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion 180 75 51 Figure 1-13. Front View of O5 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion Figure 1-14. Side View of O5 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion 209 178 108 82 91 Figure 1-15. Front View of O7 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion Figure 1-16. Side View of O7 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion MN003109A01_aa Draft 1-4 Introduction Mobile Radio Description 190 83 178 Figure 1-17. Front View of O9 Control Head with Trunnion Figure 1-18. Side View of O9 Control Head with Trunnion 185 210 61.5 Figure 1-19. Top View of O9 Universal Relay Controller with Trunnion (URC is an orderable accessory) Figure 1-20. Side View of O9 Universal Relay Controller with Trunnion (URC is an orderable accessory) Figure 1-21. Siren and Lights Interface Module (SLIM) MN003109A01_aa Draft Introduction Mobile Radio Description 1-5 Figure 1-22. Front View of SB9600 Whelen Siren T-Cable for Dual Control Head Only To Switch Box or DEK Speaker Leads Black Chassis Ground Cable Red Fused Cable Connects to Battery Positive Terminal Siren/PA Unit Figure 1-23. Siren/PA Cable Connections MN003109A01_aa Draft 1-6 Introduction Standard Configurations Standard Configurations 1.2 1.2.1 Dash Mount Configuration - Mid Power NOTE: The dash mount configuration is not applicable for O9 control heads. There are two versions of the APX mobile dash mount. The first are the O2, O5 and O7 control heads which are mounted on the front of the transceiver housing. The second is the O3 control head which is connected to the transceiver through a coiled cable, which is plugged into the CAN connector on the transceiver. Electrical connection between the two takes place within the radio through a flexible circuit board between the connectors on the front of the transceiver and at the back of the control head for O2, O5 and O7. Figure 1-24. Dash Mount Configuration for O2 Control Head Figure 1-25. Dash Mount Configuration for O3 Control Head

(No Extension Cable Present) MN003109A01_aa Draft Introduction Standard Configurations 1-7 Figure 1-26. Dash Mount Configuration for O5 Control Head Figure 1-27. Dash Mount Configuration for O7 Control Head For details on this configuration, see See 2.2.1. MN003109A01_aa Draft 1-8 Introduction Standard Configurations 1.2.2 Remote Mount Configuration In the remote mount configuration, the transceiver and the control head are mounted separately in the vehicle. The O2, O5, O7 and O9 control heads are mounted in remote trunnions near the operator. The transceiver and control head are mounted using a trunnion or other mounting hardware. If the transceiver is located in a car trunk, ensure that it is mounted securely and that sufficient cooling is provided. Do not cover the transceiver with baggage, blankets, and others. NOTE: The keypad mic should only be plugged into the Mobile Microphone Port (MMP) connector located on the control head, in either dash mount or remote mount configuration. MMP MMP Figure 1-28. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, CHIB Rear Assembly and O2 Control Head MMP MMP Figure 1-29. Remote Mount Configuration with High Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, CHIB Rear Assembly and O2 Control Head MN003109A01_aa Draft Introduction Standard Configurations 1-9 5 m (17 ft) Extension Cable Figure 1-30. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board and O3 Control Head 5 m (17 ft) Extension Cable Figure 1-31. Remote Mount Configuration with High Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board and O3 Control Head MN003109A01_aa Draft 1-10 Introduction Standard Configurations MMP MMP Figure 1-32. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, CHIB Rear Assembly and O5 Control Head MMP MMP Figure 1-33. Remote Mount Configuration with High Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, CHIB Rear Assembly and O5 Control Head MN003109A01_aa Draft Introduction Standard Configurations 1-11 MMP MMP Figure 1-34. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, CHIB Rear Assembly and O7 Control Head MMP MMP Figure 1-35. Remote Mount Configuration with High Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, CHIB Rear Assembly and O7 Control Head 17 ft Extension Cable Figure 1-36. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board and O9 Control Head MN003109A01_aa Draft 1-12 Introduction Standard Configurations 17 ft Extension Cable Figure 1-37. Remote Mount Configuration with High Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board and O9 Control Head 17 ft Extension Cable O7 to URC Cable Figure 1-38. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Radio Transceiver, Universal Relay Controller and O7 Control Head (URC is optional)

(Also Applicable for O2 and O5 Control Heads) MN003109A01_aa Draft Introduction Standard Configurations 1-13 17 ft Extension Cable O7 to URC Cable Figure 1-39. Remote Mount Configuration with High Power Radio Transceiver, Universal Relay Controller and O7 Control Head (URC is optional)

(Also Applicable for O2 and O5 Control Heads) MN003109A01_aa Draft 1-14 Introduction Standard Configurations 17 ft Extension Cable O9 to URC Cable Figure 1-40. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Radio Transceiver, Universal Relay Controller and O9 Control Head (URC is optional) 17 ft Extension Cable O9 to URC Cable Figure 1-41. Remote Mount Configuration with High Power Radio Transceiver, Universal Relay Controller and O9 Control Head (URC is optional) For details on these configurations, See 2.2.2. MN003109A01_aa Draft Introduction Motorcycle Configurations - Mid Power 1-15 1.2.3 Multi Control Head The multi control head option allows separate, remotely operated control heads to operate and control the radio. For example, a fire truck could have a control head located in the cab and on the rear of the truck so that the radio could be operated from outside the vehicle. 1.3 Motorcycle Configurations - Mid Power 1.4 NOTE: The motorcycle configurations are not applicable for O9 control heads. See Chapter 5: Motorcycle Radio Installation for further information. Base/Control Stations NOTE: The base/control station option is not applicable for O9 control heads. If mobile radio equipment is installed at a fixed location and operated as a control station or as a fixed unit, the antenna installation must comply with the following requirements in order to ensure optimal performance and compliance with the RF energy exposure limits in the standards and guidelines listed in the Safety Manual (refer to related publications):

The antenna should be mounted outside the building on the roof or a tower if at all possible. As with all fixed site antenna installations, it is the responsibility of the licensee to manage the site in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements and may require additional compliance actions such as site survey measurements, signage, and site access restrictions in order to ensure that exposure limits are not exceeded. 1.5 Tools Required for APX Mobile Installations Tool Part Number 10 mm wrench 5 mm Allen wrench Regular slot screwdriver of Phillips #2 Pin removal tool 6680163F01 MN003109A01_aa Draft 1-16 Introduction Tools Required for APX Mobile Installations MN003109A01_aa Draft Chapter 2 Standard Configurations 2.1 Planning the Installation The APX mobile radio operates only in negative ground electrical systems with a valid operating range of 13.6 V +/- 20%. Before starting the radio installation, make sure that the ground polarity of the vehicle is correct. Accidentally reversing the polarity could damage the radio and cause the cable fuses to blow. Planning is the key to fast, easy radio installation. Before starting the installation, inspect the vehicle and determine how and where you intend to mount the antenna, radio, and accessories. Plan wire and cable runs to provide maximum protection from pinching, crushing, and overheating.

!

C a u t i o n Before installing any electrical equipment, check the vehicle manufacturer user manual for warnings or recommendations. The installation of this device should be completed by an authorized servicer or installer. Failure to properly install the device may result in damage to the device, or improper operation. Draft 2-2 2.1.1 Standard Configurations Planning the Installation Installation Examples The mobile two-way radio offers various methods of installation, with accessories placed to the vehicle as desired. The radio can be a dash or remote mount except with O9 control head, which can only be mounted remotely. The O9 control head with the radio and the URC can only be mounted remotely (see Figure 2-3). Speaker Radio Antenna 911 Battery Radio Figure 2-1. Dash Mount Radios Can Be Located in the Middle Console, on the Transmission Hump, or Under the Dash (Mid Power) Speaker Control Head Antenna 911 Radio Battery Control Head Figure 2-2. Remote Mount Radio Control Heads Can Be Located in the Middle Console, on the Transmission Hump, or Under the Dash (Mid Power) Control Head Antenna Speaker Siren Speaker Radio Siren Box 911 Battery Universal Relay Controller Box Figure 2-3. Remote Mount of the Radio, O9 Control Head and Universal Relay Controller (URC is optional) MN003109A01_aa Draft Standard Configurations Planning the Installation 2-3 2.1.2 Wiring Diagrams Figure 2-4 through Figure 2-18 show the wiring diagrams for all the possible configurations. The title under each figure identifies the O2, O3, O5, O7 or O9 control head configurations. Identify which of these figures shows the configuration that you are installing, and use the diagram when planning the installation. FUSE BATTERY

(+)

(-) RED LEAD ANTENNA 1 ANTENNA 2 WIFI (OPTIONAL) ANTENNA 3 GPS (OPTIONAL) FUSE BLOCK IGN SENSE (ACC) P2

(SEE J2 PINOUT) FIREWALL HOLE Multi-

plexer DC POWER CABLE TRUNNION ANTENNA CONNECTION ANTENNA CONNECTION ANTENNA CONNECTION REAR ACCESSORY CONNECTOR J2 HORN RELAY FUSE LIGHT RELAY MIC CLIP SPEAKER MIC DASH MOUNT RADIO MOUNTING SCREW 26 SPKR-

20 SPKR+

VIPOUT 2

(RELAY) 12V VIPOUT 1

(RELAY) 12V IGN SENSE

(ACC) 7 13 EMERGENCY SWITCH EMERGENCY 21 GROUND 14 8 1 Figure 2-4. Radio Installation (O2 Mid Power Dash Mount) FUSE RED LEAD BATTERY

(+)

(-) ANTENNA 1 ANTENNA 2 WIFI (OPTIONAL) ANTENNA 3 GPS (OPTIONAL) HORN RELAY FUSE LIGHT RELAY MIC CLIP SPEAKER MIC FUSE BLOCK IGN SENSE (ACC) P2

(SEE J2 PINOUT) FIREWALL HOLE Multi-

plexer DC POWER CABLE ANTENNA CONNECTION ANTENNA CONNECTION ANTENNA CONNECTION J2 REAR ACCESSORY CONNECTOR TRUNNION MOUNTING SCREW 7 13 26 SPKR-

IGN SENSE

(ACC) 20 SPKR+

VIPOUT 2

(RELAY) 12V VIPOUT 1

(RELAY) 12V RADIO EMERGENCY SWITCH EMERGENCY 21 GROUND 14 8 1 Figure 2-5. Radio Installation (O3 Mid Power Dash Mount) MN003109A01_aa Draft 2-4 Standard Configurations Planning the Installation FUSE BATTERY

(+)

(-) RED LEAD ANTENNA 1 ANTENNA 2 WIFI (OPTIONAL) ANTENNA 3 GPS (OPTIONAL) FUSE BLOCK IGN SENSE (ACC) P2

(SEE J2 PINOUT) DASH MOUNT RADIO HORN RELAY FUSE LIGHT RELAY MIC CLIP SPEAKER MIC FIREWALL HOLE Multi-

plexer DC POWER CABLE ANTENNA CONNECTION ANTENNA CONNECTION ANTENNA CONNECTION TRUNNION MOUNTING SCREW J2 REAR ACCESSORY CONNECTOR 7 13 26 SPKR-

IGN SENSE

(ACC) 20 SPKR+

VIPOUT 2

(RELAY) 12V VIPOUT 1

(RELAY) 12V EMERGENCY SWITCH EMERGENCY 21 GROUND 14 8 1 Figure 2-6. Radio Installation (O5 Mid Power Dash Mount) FUSE BATTERY

(+)

(-) RED LEAD ANTENNA 1 ANTENNA 2 WIFI (OPTIONAL) ANTENNA 3 GPS (OPTIONAL) FUSE BLOCK IGN SENSE (ACC) P2

(SEE J2 PINOUT) DASH MOUNT RADIO HORN RELAY FUSE LIGHT RELAY MIC CLIP SPEAKER MIC FIREWALL HOLE Multi-

plexer DC POWER CABLE TRUNNION ANTENNA CONNECTION ANTENNA CONNECTION ANTENNA CONNECTION J2 REAR ACCESSORY CONNECTOR MOUNTING SCREW 26 SPKR-

20 SPKR+

VIPOUT 2

(RELAY) 12V VIPOUT 1

(RELAY) 12V IGN SENSE

(ACC) 7 13 EMERGENCY SWITCH EMERGENCY 21 GROUND 14 8 1 Figure 2-7. Radio Installation (O7 Mid Power Dash Mount) MN003109A01_aa Draft Standard Configurations Planning the Installation 2-5 NOTE: In dash mount configuration, it is mandatory that a rear accessory cable be attached at the back of a mid power transceiver, in order to ground the Emergency pin to GND. Or, an emergency footswitch or pushbutton switch must be attached at the back of a mid power. If the emergency pin is not grounded, upon the attachment of the A+ cable at the DC connector, the radio detects a HIGH for the emergency pin state, and assume that emergency has been activated. This attempts to power on the radio, and results in excessive current draw and incorrect radio operation. Refer to Section 2.1.3.1 for further details and recommended wiring of emergency in dash mount. BATTERY

(+)

(-) FUSE RED LEAD FUSE FUSE BLOCK YELLOW LEAD FUSE HORN RELAY BLACK LEAD LIGHT RELAY MIC CLIP SPEAKER MIC CONTROL HEAD EMERGENCY SWITCH RADIO ANTENNA 1 ANTENNA 2 WIFI (OPTIONAL) ANTENNA 3 GPS (OPTIONAL) ANTENNA CONNECTION ANTENNA CONNECTION ANTENNA CONNECTION Multi-

plexer FIREWALL HOLE DC POWER CABLE PORTS ON REAR OF REMOTE CONTROL HEAD ACC PWR SPK CAN CAN DEK VIP J400 USB VIP CONNECTOR PIN-OUT 10 9 6 8 5 7 4 2 1 J400 Function Radio Pin VIP Cable

(HKN6196_) Wire Color Number J400-1 RED SWB +

J400-2 GREEN GND J400-3 - NO PIN J400-4 - "VIP" detect: GPIO=HIGH J400-5 BLUE VIP_OUT_1 J400-6 YELLOW VIP_OUT_2 J400-7 BLACK VIP_OUT_3 J400-8 WHITE VIP_IN_1 (VIP_IN GPIO) J400-9 ORANGE VIP_IN_2 (VIP_IN GPIO) J400-10 VIOLET VIP_IN_3 Figure 2-8. Radio Installation (O2 Mid Power Remote Mount) Multi-

plexer Figure 2-9. Radio Installation (O2 High Power Remote Mount) MN003109A01_aa Draft 2-6 Standard Configurations Planning the Installation BATTERY

(+)

(-) FUSE RED LEAD ANTENNA 1 ANTENNA 2 WIFI (OPTIONAL) ANTENNA 3 GPS (OPTIONAL) HORN RELAY FUSE LIGHT RELAY SPEAKER CH hang up box EMERGENCY SWITCH O3 FUSE BLOCK IGN SENSE (ACC) P2

(SEE J626 PINOUT) CABLE HLN 6863 FIREWALL HOLE Multi-

plexer DC POWER CABLE ANTENNA CONNECTION ANTENNA CONNECTION ANTENNA CONNECTION J2 REAR ACCESSORY CONNECTOR 7 13 26 SPKR-

IGN SENSE

(ACC) 20 SPKR+

VIPOUT 2

(RELAY) 12V VIPOUT 1

(RELAY) 12V TRUNNION MOUNTING SCREW EMERGENCY 21 GROUND 14 8 1 5m (17ft) CABLE (PMLN4958) Figure 2-10. Radio Installation (O3 Mid Power Remote Mount) Multi-

plexer Figure 2-11. Radio Installation (O3 High Power Remote Mount) MN003109A01_aa Draft Standard Configurations Planning the Installation 2-7 BATTERY

(+)

(-) FUSE RED LEAD FUSE FUSE BLOCK YELLOW LEAD FUSE LIGHT RELAY MIC CLIP HORN RELAY SPEAKER MIC BLACK LEAD CONTROL HEAD ANTENNA 1 ANTENNA 2 WIFI (OPTIONAL) ANTENNA 3 GPS (OPTIONAL) ANTENNA CONNECTION ANTENNA CONNECTION ANTENNA CONNECTION FIREWALL HOLE DC POWER CABLE EMERGENCY SWITCH Multi-

plexer PORTS ON REAR OF REMOTE CONTROL HEAD ACC PWR SPK CAN CAN DEK VIP J400 USB VIP CONNECTOR PIN-OUT 10 9 6 8 5 7 4 2 1 J400 Function Radio Pin VIP Cable

(HKN6196_) Wire Color Number J400-1 RED SWB +

J400-2 GREEN GND J400-3 - NO PIN J400-4 - "VIP" detect: GPIO=HIGH J400-5 BLUE VIP_OUT_1 J400-6 YELLOW VIP_OUT_2 J400-7 BLACK VIP_OUT_3 J400-8 WHITE VIP_IN_1 (VIP_IN GPIO) J400-9 ORANGE VIP_IN_2 (VIP_IN GPIO) J400-10 VIOLET VIP_IN_3 RADIO Figure 2-12. Radio Installation (O5 Mid Power Remote Mount) Multi-

plexer Figure 2-13. Radio Installation (O5 High Power Remote Mount) MN003109A01_aa Draft 2-8 Standard Configurations Planning the Installation BATTERY

(+)

(-) FUSE RED LEAD FUSE FUSE BLOCK YELLOW LEAD FUSE LIGHT RELAY MIC CLIP HORN RELAY SPEAKER MIC BLACK LEAD CONTROL HEAD EMERGENCY SWITCH RADIO ANTENNA 1 ANTENNA 2 WIFI (OPTIONAL) ANTENNA 3 GPS (OPTIONAL) ANTENNA CONNECTION ANTENNA CONNECTION ANTENNA CONNECTION Multi-

plexer FIREWALL HOLE DC POWER CABLE PORTS ON REAR OF REMOTE CONTROL HEAD ACC PWR SPK CAN CAN DEK VIP J400 USB VIP CONNECTOR PIN-OUT 10 9 6 8 5 7 4 2 1 J400 Function Radio Pin VIP Cable

(HKN6196_) Wire Color Number J400-1 RED SWB +

J400-2 GREEN GND J400-3 - NO PIN J400-4 - "VIP" detect: GPIO=HIGH J400-5 BLUE VIP_OUT_1 J400-6 YELLOW VIP_OUT_2 J400-7 BLACK VIP_OUT_3 J400-8 WHITE VIP_IN_1 (VIP_IN GPIO) J400-9 ORANGE VIP_IN_2 (VIP_IN GPIO) J400-10 VIOLET VIP_IN_3 Figure 2-14. Radio Installation (O7 Mid Power Remote Mount) Multi-

plexer Figure 2-15. Radio Installation (O7 High Power Remote Mount) Refer to Section 2.1.3.2 and Section 4.2.1 for further details and recommended wiring of emergency in remote mount. MN003109A01_aa Draft Standard Configurations Planning the Installation 2-9 FUSE CIRCUIT BREAKER FUSE FUSE FUSE RED LEAD RED LEAD YELLOW LEAD CONTROL HEAD BATTERY

(+)

(-) FUSE BLOCK HORN RELAY EARJACK Control Head Speaker GUN LOCK

(SEE J2 PINOUT) RED LEAD ANTENNA 1 WIFI (OPTIONAL) GPS (OPTIONAL) ANTENNA CONNECTION ANTENNA CONNECTION ANTENNA CONNECTION Multi-

plexer EMERGENCY SWITCH MIC CLIP MIC Siren Bullhorn CAN Cable FIREWALL HOLE DC POWER CABLE LIGHTBAR URC Controller Box Siren Box RED LEAD RADIO O9 TO URC Cable BLACK LEAD Figure 2-16. Radio Installation of O9 Remote Mount with Transceiver (URC is optional) - Mid Power MN003109A01_aa Draft 2-10 Standard Configurations Planning the Installation Multi-

plexer Figure 2-17. Radio Installation of O9 Remote Mount with Transceiver (URC is optional) - High Power MN003109A01_aa Draft Standard Configurations Planning the Installation 2-11 REAR ACCESSORY CONNECTOR J2 J500 USB J100 M.A.P. J200 PWR/SPKR

(RED) J300L CAN

(BLUE) J300R CAN

(BLUE) J400 DEK/VIP

(YELLOW) MMP 7 13 26 SPKR-

IGN SENSE

(ACC) 20 SPKR+

VIPOUT 2

(RELAY) 12V VIPOUT 1

(RELAY) 12V EMERGENCY 21 GROUND 14 8 1 VIP CONNECTOR PIN-OUT 10 9 6 8 5 7 4 2 1 J400 Function Radio Pin VIP Cable

(HKN6196_) Wire Color Number J400-1 RED SWB +

J400-2 GREEN GND J400-3 - NO PIN J400-4 - "VIP" detect: GPIO=HIGH J400-5 BLUE VIP_OUT_1 J400-6 YELLOW VIP_OUT_2 J400-7 BLACK VIP_OUT_3 J400-8 WHITE VIP_IN_1 (VIP_IN GPIO) J400-9 ORANGE VIP_IN_2 (VIP_IN GPIO) J400-10 VIOLET VIP_IN_3 Figure 2-18. Radio Installation (O9 Remote Mount with Pinouts) Refer to Section 2.1.3.2 and Section 4.2.1 for further details and recommended wiring of emergency in remote mount. J200 J300L J300R J400 J500 J100 CAN

(BLUE) CAN

(BLUE) DEK VIP

(YELLOW) USB M.A.P. PWR SPK

(RED) Figure 2-19. Remote Control Head Pinouts MN003109A01_aa Draft 2-12 Standard Configurations Planning the Installation Y R E T T A B E L C H E V I T N E M T R A P M O C I E L C H E V I H C T W S N O T N G I I I T N E M T R A P M O C R O T A R E P O

=

T N E M T R A P M O C O D A R I I D N G S S S A H C I E L C H E V Y R E T T A B E S U F T E M M O R G E T O N E E S E S U F e n i l C C A E S N E S N G I H S A D

) D E R n h i t

(

) D E R

(

+

A R E K A E P S TIB I R E V E C S N A R T CONTROL HEAD E N O H P O R C M I i

. n o i t a r e p o o d a r t c e r r o c r o f d e r i u q e r s i s s s a h c r a c e h i t o t n o i t c e n n o c D N U O R G d o o g A

. l g u p y r o s s e c c a r a e r n o e r i i w D E R n h t e h t f o g n i r i w r o f 1

-

2 E L B A T e e S

:

E T O N t n u o M h s a D r o f m a r g a D i t c e n n o c r e t n I g n i l b a C

. 0 2

-

2 e r u g F i MN003109A01_aa

) 2 0 E 3 8 2 0 8 5 6

(

e s u f p m a

-

4 r o

) 1 0 E 3 8 2 0 8 5 6

(

e s u f p m a

-

3 r e h t i e s e s u e b a c e s n e s n o l i t i n g I

:

E T O N Draft Standard Configurations Planning the Installation 2-13 Y R E T T A B E L C H E V I T N E M T R A P M O C I E L C H E V I H C T W S N O T N G I I I

) E N O H P O R C M I I W E V R A E R

(

D A E H L O R T N O C E L B A C L O R T N O C L A T G D I I I N O T A R E P O T N U O M E T O M E R T N E M T R A P M O C R O T A R E P O T N E M T R A P M O C O D A R I MN003109A01_aa T E M M O R G E T O N E E S E S U F e n i l C C A E S N E S N G I

) W O L L E Y

(

I D N G S S S A H C I E L C H E V Y R E T T A B E S U F T E M M O R G

) D E R

(

+

A R E K A E P S TIB I R E V E C S N A R T t n u o M e t o m e R r o f m a r g a D i t c e n n o c r e t n I g n i l b a C

. 1 2

-

2 e r u g F i i

. n o i t a r e p o o d a r t c e r r o c r o f i d e r i u q e r s i s s s a h c r a c e h t o t n o i t c e n n o c D N U O R G d o o g A

. e r i w W O L L E Y e h t f o g n i r i w r o f 1

-

2 E L B A T e e S

:

E T O N Draft 2-14 Standard Configurations Planning the Installation Y R E T T A B E L C H E V I T N E M T R A P M O C T N E M T R A P M O C R O T A R E P O T N E M T R A P M O C O D A R I I N O T U A C r e k a e p S n e r i S I E L C H E V I H C T W S N O T N G I I I D N G s s s a h C i I E L C H E V Y R E T T A B

)

-

(

)

+

(

+

A

) d e R

(

R E K A E P S F O T R A P E L C H E V I I G N R W I T E M M O R G E T O N E E S C C A N O

/

E S U F A 4 R O A 3 R O A 0 2

, A 5 1 E S U F A 0 3 T E M M O R G r e k a e r B t i u c r i C A 6 1

+

A

) d e R

(

E L B A C R E W O P O D A R I

) T O H Y R E T T A B D E R

/

(

e s n e S N G I

) w o l l e y

(

) K L B

(

l e b a c i n o s n e t x e N A C e s u F A 5 1

+

A

) d e R

(

) w e V i r a e R

(

d a e H l o r t n o C

) K L B

(

x o B n e r i S T E M M O R G D N G s s s a h C i r e l l o r t x o B n o C C R U TIB TRANSCEIVER 5 4 J R o t P M M l e b a C

) l a n o i t p o s i C R U

(

t n u o M e t o m e R 9 0 r o f m a r g a D i t c e n n o c r e t n I g n i l b a C

. 2 2

-

2 e r u g F i l

. s e b a c W O L L E Y d n a D E R e h t g n i r i w i f o s n o i t a n b m o c r o f 2

-

2 E L B A T e e S

. r o t c e n n o c y r o s s e c c a r a e r s o d a r e h t t a N O T N G I I i

'

l I y p p u s t o n o d

, s n o i t a r u g l

.

) 4 7 6 3 1 8 0 0 9 5

(

y a e r s n o i t u o S a o r o t o M a h t i l l l w e b a c D E R e h t e t a o s I

. r u c c o l y a m s m e b o r p l i e s o n r e h i f t o n o c t n u o m e t o m e r r o F d n a i e n h w r o t a n r e t l A

:

E T O N MN003109A01_aa Draft Standard Configurations Planning the Installation 2-15 2.1.3 Radio Operation Wiring for Dash and Remote Configurations Determine from Table 2-1 or Table 2-2 the radio functionality you want to achieve, which is controlled by the vehicle ignition switch state, the physical wiring of the radio ignition sense (ACC) wire, and by the programmed CPS setting. For additional radio functionality as determined by the programming of the ignition switch in CPS, refer to the HELP menu in your CPS that is Ignition as: Required, Blank, Soft Power Off, TX Inhibit, PTT TX Inhibit, Ignition Only Power Up). Choose a clean ignition point which is not shared in the immediate vicinity by other high current accessories/devices to reduce the transients on the ignition line. Examples of high-current accessories/devices are: Air Horn, relays, lightbars, and others. It is recommended to wire to the vehicle ACC line, not the START or the solenoid side of the ignition circuit. Refer to chapter 6 for best installation practices. The Ignition sense (ACC) cable uses either a 3-amp fuse

(6580283E01) or 4-amp fuse (6580283E02). 2.1.3.1 Dash Mount: Power, Ignition, and Emergency Cable Installation - Mid Power The standard dash mount rear ignition sense cable HLN6863 contains a thin red ignition wire, a jumper wire that shorts emergency to ground, and two gray wires attached to an external speaker plug. The thin RED wire is the ignition sensed wire. Refer to Table 2-1 or Table 2-2 for its correct wiring configurations. NOTE: This cable MUST be attached in order for the radio to operate in Dash mount, regardless of how emergency is programmed in CPS or wired inside the vehicle. Either the emergency jumper wire or an emergency accessory (footswitch or button) must be wired to the rear of the transceiver in Dash mount. Otherwise, upon attachment of the radio power cable to the vehicle battery, the radio incorrectly determines that emergency operation has been activated, such as when an emergency footswitch is de-pressed and the emergency pin is ungrounded. MN003109A01_aa Draft 2-16 Standard Configurations Planning the Installation 2.1.3.2 Remote Mount: Power, Ignition, and Emergency Cable Installation The single control head O2, O5, O7 or O9 remote mount configurations receive power from the J200 connector red and black wires. The yellow wire at J200 is one ignition sense wire. The J2 connector can also be used for ignition sense. If the HLN6863 is attached at J100 of the O2, O5, O7 or O9 control head, the thin red wire do NOT function as an ignition sense wire, since the J100 connector has no ignition sense electrical connection. NOTE: It is incorrect for installation to attach ignition sense at more than one wire or connector. Refer to Table 2-1 or Table 2-2 for its correct wiring configurations. The O3 control head receives its power down the CAN cable, and detects the ignition state by the ignition sense pin at J2. The J2 connector can also be used for ignition sense. In Multi-Control Head installations, the yellow ignition wire must be connected to the head assigned ID # 1. Section 2.2.2.4: Setting the Initial Control Head ID for further information. The design of the control head is different compared to the transceiver, therefore it is also NOT necessary to attach HLN6863 at J100 to prevent accidental emergency operation. The control head can have an emergency accessory attached at connector J100 instead of at the transceiver connector J2. Wherever the emergency accessory is placed, it is recommended to only attach at one location rather than multiple emergency accessories attached at different points of the radio. MN003109A01_aa Draft Standard Configurations Planning the Installation 2-17 Dash/Remote Mount Connected to battery Connected to ignition switch Ignition switch controls Remote Connected to battery Connected to ignition switch Ignition switch controls Table 2-1. Dash and Remote O2, O3, O5, O7 or O9 Radio Power ON @ J2 Transceiver Transceiver Red Power Red Power Transceiver Red Power Thin Red Wire Thin Red Wire HLN6863 HLN6863 Wire

@ J2 Wire

@ J2 Wire HLN6863 Thin Red Wire

@ J2 X X X X X X X No ignition switch control. Enables ignition switch functionality as programmed in the codeplug. Illegal wiring configuration. See CAUTION note. Table 2-2. Remote O2, O5, O7 or O9 Radio Power ON @ J200 Control Head Red Wire

@J200 Control Head Yellow Wire

@J200 Control Head Red Wire

@J200 Control Head Yellow Wire

@J200 Control Head Red Wire

@J200 Control Head Yellow Wire

@J200 X X X X X X X No ignition switch control. Enables ignition switch functionality as programmed in the codeplug. Illegal wiring configuration. See CAUTION note. Table 2-3. Ignition Interface Cables Part Number Description HLN6863_ Cable, M.A.P. 26pin with Only Ignition and SPK KT000274A01 Y-Cable, M.A.P to M.A.P. and DB 25

!

C a u t i o n DO NOT connect any wires to the battery terminals until you have finished the entire radio installation (Dash or Remote Mount) configuration to avoid potential equipment damage. Incorrect wiring of the radio may result in incorrect ignition sense detection, incorrect power-on state, or incorrect power-off state of the radio system. The Control Head Power cable wire (RED) and Transceiver Power cable wire (RED) are always attached to the battery terminal and NOT to the ignition switch. MN003109A01_aa Draft 2-18 2.1.4 Standard Configurations Planning the Installation Ignition Sense Switch (Radio Wide Advance) CPS selectable settings to control the radio functionality based on the state of the vehicle Ignition status. These descriptions can be found in the CPS (customer programming software) tool HELP Guides and are repeated here for convenience. Feature Blank TX Inhibit PTT TX Inhibit Table 2-4. Ignition Sense Switch Settings in CPS Description Radio POWERS ON when the Power Button is pressed or with the emergency power up feature. Radio POWERS OFF when the Power Button is pressed.

(Available only when: the radio is model/option capable) Radio POWERS ON with a radio Power On button / knob selection. Radio POWERS OFF with a radio Power Off button / knob selection, or when the Inactiv-

ity Auto Power Off timer expires. While IGNITION is not present, certain communications are not possible:

I. II. The radio does not register with ASTRO 25 (APCO) - Trunking Systems and there-

fore cannot receive this type of Trunking communications (see the System Type field), however, Type II Trunking Systems can receive dispatch without being regis-

tered. Also, the radio cannot be powered-on with the Emergency Power UP feature, and Emergency Alarm transmissions using the Emergency Power UP footswitch are not possible.

(Available only when: the radio is model/option capable) Radio POWERS ON with a radio Power On button / knob selection. Radio POWERS OFF with a radio Power Off button / knob selection, or when the Inactiv-

ity Auto Power Off timer expires. While IGNITION is not present, all PTT button transmissions are inhibited:

I. II. The radio does not register with ASTRO 25 (APCO) - Trunking Systems and therefore cannot receive this type of Trunking communications (see the System Type field), however, Type II Trunking Systems can receive dispatch without being registered. Also, the radio cannot be powered-on with the an Emergency Power UP footswitch-press; however, the footswitch can be used to initiate Emergency Alarm transmissions if the radio is already on. Required Radio POWERS ON when the Power Button is pressed and Ignition is present. Radio POWERS ON when Ignition is cycled and radio was previously ON. Radio POWERS OFF when the Power Button is pressed, or when Ignition is lost. Soft Power Off Radio POWERS ON when the Power Button is pressed, or when Ignition is detected. Radio POWERS OFF when the Power Button is pressed, or when Ignition is lost. Ignition Only Power Up Radio POWERS ON when Ignition is present. Radio POWERS OFF when Ignition is lost. Control head power button is ignored. MN003109A01_aa Draft Standard Configurations Planning the Installation 2-19 NOTE: When either TX Inhibit, PTT TX Inhibit or Required are selected, the Emergency Power Up feature is not be available to the radio-user. When any other Ignition Switch setting is made, Emergency Power Up is available to the radio-user, regardless of current ignition state. Any optional inactivity time-out timer setting in CPS may delay the power off of the radio once Ignition sense is removed. MN003109A01_aa Draft 2-20 Standard Configurations Planning the Installation 2.1.5 Motorola Solutions Branded SB9600 Siren/PA Configuration/Programming The Siren/PA is shipped pre-wired for 100 W operation. It can be rewired for 65 W, 75 W, or 130 W power levels. To change to another power level, perform the following:

1. Open the Siren/PA connector cover to gain access to the two-connector speaker leads. Do not change the speaker common lead (pin 20). The other lead is connected to pin 35 (for 100 W operation). 2. Using an appropriate pin removal tool, extract pin 35 and move it to one of the following pin locations:

- pin location 36 for 75 W operation

- pin location 28 for 65 W or 130 W operation 3. For 65 W or 75 W operation, no further changes are required. Reassemble the connector. 4. For 130 W operation, you must parallel two 11 speakers, each rated at 65 W minimum. Proper phasing of the two speakers is important--when connecting two speakers in parallel, wire similar speaker terminals together to ensure maximum loudness and prevent

"deadspots." For example, if the terminals are marked "1" and "2", connect the terminals marked "1" together and connect those wires to one speaker lead. Connect the terminals marked "2" together and connect those wires to the other speaker lead.

!

C a u t i o n Before continuing, remember that under a high-line supply condition

(16.6 V), up to 30 % more power goes to the speaker(s) after reconfiguring for 130 W operation. Do this only when your PA speakers are capable of handling the extra power. 5. When the Siren/PA is configured for dual speaker, 130 W operation, it is necessary to remove a resistor and move two jumpers to set the correct power level. Remove the Siren/PA cover, and locate resistor R219 (0 ). This resistor should be removed for 130 W operation. Locate jumpers JU100 and JU101. These jumpers should be installed for 130 W operation. 6. Close and reconnect the Siren/PA connector cover. NOTE:Jumpers JU100 and JU101 do not affect the Siren output level. JU100 and JU101 compensate for the lower speaker load and the two speakers in parallel, by decreasing the gain U102-1. JU100 affects the radio PA level and JU101 affects the PA audio level. Pin locations of various power level configurations are listed in Table 2-5 Table 2-5. Power Level Configurations Pin location of speaker leads 65 W 75 W 100 W 130 W 20,28 20,36 20,35 20,28 R219 IN IN IN OUT JU100/JU101 Across pins A and B Across pins A and B Across pins A and B Across pins B and C MN003109A01_aa Draft Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2.2 Radio Mounting 2-21

!

C a u t i o n DO NOT mount the radio on a plastic mounting surface without first reinforcing the mounting surface; the weight of the radio may crack or break the mounting surface. DO NOT mount the radio on any surface where the radio could be partially submersed in water. This is especially important if the cab area of the vehicle is cleaned by spraying with water. If the radio sits in water for a length of time, moisture may seep inside the radio and damage the electronic components. DO NOT allow water to stand in recessed areas of vertically mounted radios. Remove any moisture immediately to prevent it from seeping down into the radio. Care must be taken to shield the control head (front and back) from direct exposure to pressurized water. The pressurized water from a hose, in most cases, is more severe than the stated test and conditions in typical environments. The mounting location must be accessible and visible. Select a location that permits routing the RF antenna cable as directly as possible. NOTE: For optimum radio performance, orient the mounting trunnion as shown in Figure 2-23. For new or existing installations of all use only the APX mobile trunnion, kit number HLN7002

(mid power) and HLN7003 (high power). RADIO APPLIES TO RADIOS IN DASH AND REMOTE INSTALLATIONS Figure 2-23. APX8500 Mid Power Trunnion Orientation MN003109A01_aa Draft 2-22 NOTE: . Standard Configurations Radio Mounting RADIO FRONT APPLIES TO RADIOS IN REMOTE INSTALLATIONS Figure 2-24. APX8500 High Power Trunnion Orientation MN003109A01_aa Draft Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2-23 2.2.1 Dash Mount with Trunnion - Mid Power 1. Select the location to mount your radio on the transmission hump (see Figure 2-25) or under the dash (see Figure 2-26) NOTE: When mounting the trunnion on the transmission hump take care that the transmission housing is not affected. Plan your installation ensuring enough room for the Accessory connector and cable in the back of the radio. 2. Using the trunnion mounting bracket as a template, mark the positions of the holes on the mounting surface. Use the innermost four holes for a curved mounting surface such as the transmission hump, and the four outmost holes for a flat surface such as under the dash. 3. Center punch the spots you have marked and realign the trunnion in position. 4. Secure the trunnion mounting bracket with the four self-drilling screws provided

(see Figure 2-25 and Figure 2-26). 5. Ensure that the plastic guides are aligned (horizontal) to the grooves of the trunnion. Slide the radio into the grooves until it snaps into place (see Figure 2-26). Item Part Number Description High/Mid Power Transceiver Table 2-6. Mid Power Trunnion Kit 1 2 3 4 0371859H01 Trunnion Mounting Screw 0312002B14 Self-Drilling Tapping Screw APX 8500 APX 8500 HLN7002_ Mackinaw Trunnion Hardware Kit APX 8500 HLN7003_ Mackinaw Trunnion Hardware Kit APX 8500 1 3 2 Tabs Plastic Guides 1 Groove Threaded Hole for Screw Figure 2-25. Below Dash Trunnion Mounting MN003109A01_aa Draft 2-24 Standard Configurations Radio Mounting Figure 2-26. Below Remote Trunnion Mounting 3 1 1 Figure 2-27. Transmission Hump Trunnion Mounting - Mid Power MN003109A01_aa Draft Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2-25 3 1 1 Figure 2-28. Transmission Hump Trunnion Mounting - High Power 6. ecure the radio with two screws provided (Item 1 in Table 2-6). The torque

0371859H01 should be between 50 in-lbf to 52 in-lbf. NOTE: This configuration shows the O5 control head. The TIB is used for O3 control head for the same configuration. 2.2.2 Remote Mount with Trunnion Before installing any electrical equipment, check the vehicle manufacturer user manual.

!

C a u t i o n The installation of this device should be completed by an authorized servicer or installer. Before making any holes in the trunk for radio mounting, check the vehicle manufacturer's user manual for restrictions such as due to the gas tank location. For a remote mount installation, the transceiver may be mounted anywhere in the vehicle, provided that the installation location is safe, follows the cautions mentioned at the beginning of this section, and is accessible for servicing/maintenance as well as cabling. A typical mounting location recommended by Motorola Solutions is in the vehicle trunk. For mid power, the trunnion provided may still be used to mount the transceiver, and the mounting process is the same as for the dash mount installation (Section 2.2.1). See Figure 2-12 or Figure 2-14 for a remote installation. The followings are the remote installation procedure for high power:

1. Select the location to mount your radio on the transmission hump ( see) or under the dash (see) NOTE: When mounting the trunnion on the transmission hump ensure that the transmission housing is not affected. Plan your installation ensuring enough room for the Accessory connector and cable in the back of the radio. MN003109A01_aa Draft 2-26 Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2. Using the trunnion mounting bracket as a template, mark the positions of the holes on the mounting surface. Use the innermost four holes for a curved mounting surface such as the transmission hump, and the four outmost holes for a flat surface such as under the dash. 3. Center punch the spots you have marked and re-align the trunnion in position. 4. Secure the trunnion mounting bracket with the four self-drilling screws provided (see and ) 5. Ensure that the plastic guides are aligned (horizontal) to the grooves of the trunnion. Slide the radio into the grooves until it snaps into place (see ) 2.2.2.1 Remote Mount Control Head Installation Choose a mounting location for the radio, considering accessibility, and control and antenna cable lengths. The recommended mounting surfaces for the control unit are under the mounting surface, on the transmission hump, or on the center console. Figure 2-29 and Figure 2-30 shows how the trunnion, control head, and cables should be installed for the O2, O3, O5, O7 or O9 control head. NOTE: Connector-protective covers (Remote Mount Dust Cover kit) KT000246A01 are provided with the radio. They should be installed on exposed connectors for added environmental robustness. MN003109A01_aa Draft Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2-27 An adjustable trunnion, which allows a number of mounting positions, is supplied for mounting the control unit. The installation must not interfere with the operation of the vehicle or its accessories, nor disturb passenger seating or leg room. The control head must be within convenient reach and viewing of the user. If the trunnion is mounted on a plastic mounting surface, all four mounting screws should penetrate the mounting surface supporting metal frame. If that is not possible, use a metal backing plate (not supplied) to strengthen the installation. The followings are the installation procedure:

1. Use the control unit trunnion as a template to mark the mounting holes; drill 5/32" holes. If mounting on a plastic surface, use a metal backing plate. 2. Attach the trunnion bracket using all four 10-16" x 5/8" self-tapping screws provided. 3. Temporarily install the control head (adjusting for proper viewing angle) and fasten it to the trunnion with two wing screws. Test the installation to be sure the control head feels securely locked in place while you are pressing its buttons. 4. Finish installation by fully tightening screws. Metal Backing Plate

(Not Supplied) Figure 2-29. O5 Control Head Installation Exploded View (Also applicable for O2 and O7 Control Heads) MN003109A01_aa Draft 2-28 Standard Configurations Radio Mounting Adjust the control head to desired angle and secure with wing screws Mounting surface IMPORTANT:

Use a metal backing plate (not supplied) if mounting trunnion on plastic or unstable surface Use four mounting screws on all installations Trunnion Drill four 5/32 holes in mounting surface Figure 2-30. O9 Control Head Installation Exploded View Figure 2-31. O5 and O9 Control Head Rear View MN003109A01_aa Draft Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2-29 2.2.2.2 Multiple Control Head Installation Control heads in a multiple control head configuration should be installed per the steps detailed in Section 2.2.2.1: Remote Mount Control Head Installation . Two heads can be connected to each of the two CAN connectors on the transceiver, see Figure 2-32. Control heads can also be connected a daisy chain configuration from a single transceiver CAN connector. See Figure 2-34 for examples. NOTE: The transceiver must be configured for Multiple Control Head through CPS programming. Navigate to the Control Head tab in the Radio Wide section of CPS, and select Help for further information and tutorials. FUSE J300R J300L J200 J300R FUSE J200 Control Head 3 FUSE Control Head 4 J300R J300L J200 J300R FUSE J200 Control Head 1 Control Head 2 RED LEAD

(+)

(-) BATTERY Figure 2-32. Multiple Control Heads Parallel Configurations - Mid Power MN003109A01_aa Draft 2-30 Standard Configurations Radio Mounting Figure 2-33. Multiple Control Heads Parallel Configurations - High Power MN003109A01_aa Draft Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2-31 FUSE J300R J300L J200 J300R J300L J200 FUSE Control Head 1 Control Head 2 RED LEAD

(+)

(-) BATTERY FUSE J300R J300L J200 J300R FUSE J200 Control Head 3 Control Head 4 Figure 2-34. Multiple Control Heads Series Configurations - Mid Power MN003109A01_aa Draft 2-32 Standard Configurations Radio Mounting Figure 2-35. Multiple Control Heads Series Configurations - High Power NOTE: In Multiple Control Head (MCH) installations, the yellow ignition sense wire must be connected to the head assigned ID # 1. Section 2.2.2.4: Setting the Initial Control Head ID for further information. Use the most convenient configuration for your installation, ensuring that the combined cable lengths do not exceed 131 feet (40 meters). See Table 2-7 for a list of available CAN cable lengths. Control head ground, power and ignition sense wires (black, red, and yellow respectively) may need additional length (not supplied) in installations that locate the head more than 10 feet from a power source. Table 2-7. Available CAN Cables Part Number Description HKN6164_ Cable, Remote Mount, 40 m (131 ft) HKN6165_ Cable, Remote Mount, 35 m (115 ft) HKN6166_ Cable, Remote Mount, 23 m (75 ft) HKN6167_ Cable, Remote Mount, 15 m (50 ft) HKN6168_ Cable, Remote Mount, 9 m (30 ft) HKN6169_ Cable, Remote Mount, 5 m (17 ft) HKN6170_ Cable, Remote Mount, 3 m (10 ft) MN003109A01_aa Draft Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2-33 Table 2-7. Available CAN Cables Part Number Description PMLN4958_ Cable, O3 Extension, 5 m (17 ft) 2.2.2.3 Cable Installation Route the cables where they are protected from pinching, sharp edges or crushing. Use grommets in any holes where the cable passes through metal panels. Figure 2-20 shows how the cables and components are connected. It is not recommended to route cabling or wiring inside the wheel wells of a vehicle. 2.2.2.4 Setting the Initial Control Head ID The Front Panel Programming (FPP) mode allows you to define which control head in a Multi Control Head system becomes control head number 1-4. Set the control head ID number for each attached head the first time Multi Control Head is used. 1. Press the power button to power off the radio. 2. Press and hold left-most menu and the orange button on the control head simultaneously. O5 Emergency Button Power Button Left-most Menu Button Figure 2-36. APX Mobile O5 Control Head Front View 3. Press the power button to power on the control head. The head powers on into FPP mode and display the current control head ID number:

CH ID#

1 Figure 2-37. Radio Display with Current Control Head ID 4. Turn the Mode knob to change the control head ID number. O5 Mode Knob MN003109A01_aa Draft 2-34 Standard Configurations Radio Mounting Figure 2-38. APX Mobile O5 Control Head Front View Mode Knob 5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 above to set the ID of the remaining control heads. NOTE: In Multiple Control Head (MCH) installations, the yellow ignition sense wire must be connected to the head assigned ID # 1. 2.2.2.5 O3 Control Head and Remote Mount Cabling Choose a mounting location for the radio, considering accessibility, and control and antenna cable lengths. The control head extension cable and the accessories cable should be installed and routed properly to avoid complications. Route the cables in the vehicle wiring troughs (where available) or route the cables where they are protected from pinching, sharp edges, or crushing. One suggested route is along one side of the driveshaft hump under the carpet. Use grommets in any holes where the cable passes through metal panels. Top Left Front Right Back Figure 2-39. O3 Control Head The recommended mounting surface for the control unit is on the center console. Figure 2-41 shows how the hang-up clip control head, and cables should be installed for the O3 control head. NOTE: Connector-protective covers are provided with the radio. They should be used for added environmental robustness. A mounting clip, which allows the control head to be mounted, is supplied together with the control head. The installation must not interfere with the operation of the vehicle or its accessories, nor disturb the passenger seating. The control head must be within convenient reach and viewing of the user. Install the mounting clip as follows:

1. Use the provided mounting clip to determine the location of the two screw holes. 2. Drill 7/16 deep holes for upper and lower screws. 3. Use the tapping screw provided to install the mounting clip. MN003109A01_aa Draft Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2-35

!

C a u t i o n Care must be taken to shield the control head (front and back) from direct exposure to pressurized water. The pressurized water from a hose, in most cases, is more severe than the stated test and conditions in typical environments. Vehicle Mounting Surface VEHICLE DASHBOARD 1 1 2 2 2 2 Item No. 1 2 Part Number Description 01-80743T91 03-07644M19 Mic Hang-Up Clip Assembly Screw, Machine, 8-32 x 7/16 Figure 2-40. O3 Control Head Rear View Figure 2-41. Hang-Up Clip Installation Exploded View MN003109A01_aa Draft 2-36 Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2.2.3 Locking Kit (Optional) - Mid Power 2.2.3.1 All Radios If an optional locking kit (HLN6372_) is used (shown in Figure 2-42), position the lock housing on the trunnion after installing the radio mounting screws. Then rotate the lock with the key in it and remove the key to lock the radio. You can install the lock on either side of the radio, and in dash and remote mount installations. Existing Mounting Screw Lock Lock Housing Figure 2-42. Locking Kit (Optional) MN003109A01_aa Draft Standard Configurations Power Cables (Transceiver and Control Head) 2-37 2.3 Power Cables (Transceiver and Control Head) Route the RED power cable from both the radio and the control head to the vehicle battery compartment, using accepted industry methods and standards. Be sure to grommet the firewall hole to protect the cable. Remove the 15-amp (part number 6580283E06), 20-amp (part number 6580283E07) or 30-amp (part number 6580283E09) fuse from the fuseholder and connect the red lead of the radio power cable to the positive battery terminal using the hardware provided as shown in Figure 2-43 and Figure 2-44. Connect the black lead to a convenient solid chassis ground point. DO NOT connect the black lead directly to the battery negative terminal. Table 2-8. Power Cables Description Part Number Mid Power Dash Mount Mid Power Remote Mount High Power Remote Mount O5, O7, and O9 Remote Control Head Power Cable - Mid Power HKN4191_ HKN4192_ HKN6110 HKN6188_ O5, O7, and O9 Remote Control Head Power Cable - High Power HKN6188_ or HKN6188_ 2.3.1 O2, O5, O7 or O9 Control Head Power Cables Figure 2-43. HKN6188_ Power Cable with External Speaker Connector MN003109A01_aa Draft 2-38 Standard Configurations Power Cables (Transceiver and Control Head) Figure 2-44. HKN6187_ Power Cable with External Speaker Connector, Record Audio Output Jack (2.5 mm) and Earphone Jack (2.5 mm) NOTE: Audio Out Does not require CPS programming. Attaching a headset mutes the external speakers of the radio which are attached at the SPK jack of the control head. Record Out Requires CPS programming. In CPS, navigate to Radio Wide/Advanced/

Record Audio and select TX + RX Audio. 2.3.2 Battery Selector Switch In vehicles which have installed a Battery Selector Switch, the ignition sense (yellow) wire should be the only wire connected to the battery selector switch (see Figure 2-45). Radio transceiver and control head power wires (red) must be connected directly to the vehicle battery. If the control head power wire and the control head ignition sense wire are both connected to a battery selector switch, but the radio transceiver power lead is not, improper power-cycling and off-state battery drainage may occur. If the desired state of the radio is a total battery drain elimination, then all power and ignition sense wires must be routed through the battery selector switch, so that the control head and radio transceiver both see the loss of battery power at the same time. Figure 2-45. Battery Selector Switch MN003109A01_aa Draft Standard Configurations Antenna Installation 2-39 2.4 Antenna Installation IMPORTANT:

regulations, To assure optimum performance and compliance with RF Energy Exposure installation guidelines and instructions are limited to metal-body vehicles with appropriate ground planes and take into account the potential exposure of back seat passengers and bystanders outside the vehicle. these antenna 2.4.1 Selecting an Antenna Site/Location on a Metal Body Vehicle 1. External installation Check the requirements of the antenna supplier and install the vehicle antenna external to a metal body vehicle in accordance with those requirements. 2. Roof top For optimum performance and compliance with RF Energy Exposure regulations, mount the antenna in the center area of the roof. 3. Trunk lid On some vehicles with clearly defined, flat trunk lids, the antennas of some radio models (see restrictions below) can also be mounted on the center area of the trunk lid. For vehicles without clearly defined, flat trunk lids (such as hatchback autos, sports utility vehicles, and pick-up trucks), mount the antenna in the center area of the roof. Before installing an antenna on the trunk lid,

- Be sure that the distance from the antenna location on the trunk lid is at least 85 cm (33 inches) from the rear seat head-rest to ensure compliance with RF Energy Exposure regu-

lations.

- Ensure that the trunk lid is grounded by connecting grounding straps between the trunk lid and the vehicle chassis.

!

C a u t i o n If these conditions cannot be satisfied, then mount the antenna on the roof top. 4. Mounting restrictions for certain radio models. NOTE: Do not cut antenna cables to ensure compliance with RF Energy Exposure regulations NOTE:

5. Ensure that the antenna cable can be easily routed to the radio. Route the antenna cable as far away as possible from any vehicle electronic control units and associated wiring. 6. Check the antenna location for any electrical interference. NOTE: Any two metal pieces rubbing against each other (such as seat springs, shift levers, trunk and hood lids, exhaust pipes, and others in close proximity to the antenna can cause severe receiver interference. MN003109A01_aa Draft 2-40 Standard Configurations Antenna Installation NOTE: Do not cut the antenna cable F F E LOC:7 Roof Center LOC:8 E A B LOC:1 LOC:2 LOC:3 G LOC:9 Trunk Center C D LOC:10 G H LOC:4 LOC:5 LOC:6 H Figure 2-46. Multiple Antennas Separation for locations 1-10 Figure 2-46 indicates the separation distances required for the various antennas used with an APX 8500 radio. Each "cross-hair" symbol represents a possible location, that is LOC of an antenna. The recommendation is to locate them as close to the center of the roof and/or trunk as possible, without interference with a lightbar. This picture is not drawn to scale. For letters A, B, C, and D, the table indicates the EXACT distance for separation of the LMR antennas. For letters E, F, G, and H, the table indicates the maximum distance between the edge of the ground plane and the accessory antenna (BT/WLAN, LTE or GPS) location. Table 2-1 Distance Between Antenna Characters A B C D Distance 8 inches 8 inches 8 inches 8 inches Characters E F G H Distance 8 inches 8 inches 8 inches 8 inches NOTE:

A minimum of 18 inch separation is required between lightbar and any roof mounted antenna, to prevent interference with the lightbar circuitry (see lightbar manufacturers installation information). The LMR 700/800 antenna should only be placed at LOC:2 or LOC:5. Standard LMR VHF and UHF antenna should only be placed at LOC:1, LOC:3, LOC:4 and LOC:6. 1/4 wave LMR VHF and UHF antenna

should only be placed at LOC:1 and LOC:3 (i.e.roofonly) to ensure compliance with RF Energy Exposure regulations. The VML antenna must be separated from any LMR antenna by at least 40 inches. The LTE Main and Diversity Antenna locations should be at LOC:9 and LOC:10 when the LMR All-Band or LMR 700/800 narrow band antenna are at LOC:2 (i.e LTE opposite location from the LMR). The LTE Main and Diversity Antenna locations should be at LOC:7 and LOC:8 when the LMR All-Band or LMR 700/800 narrow band antennas are at LOC:5 (i.e LTE opposite location from the LMR). In some mobile installations that include an LTE modem, external filtering on the LMR portand/

or the LTE port may be needed to reduce interference. Contact your local MotorolaSolutions Service Center for more information and for filter kit numbers (See Appendix forcontact info). MN003109A01_aa Draft Standard Configurations Antenna Installation 2-41 2.4.2 Multiplexers and Vehicle Installation Figure 2-47. Multiplexer Views 2.4.3 QMA Connection (APX 8500 Only) APX8500 is using a quick disconnect connection called QMA. This does not require any tightening. Ensure there is sufficient slack in the antenna cable. Ensure that the collar of the antenna cable plug does not bind. Engage the QMA cable plug onto the jack, listening for a click to ensure proper engagement. Gently tug on the cable to ensure that it is engaged. To disengage, pull back on the cable plug collar and pull the cable straight off the jack. 2.4.4 GPS/GLONASS/Wi-Fi/Antenna Placement (APX 8500 Only) Figure 2-48. GPS/GLONASS and Wi-Fi Antenna Connector on the Radio MN003109A01_aa Draft Standard Configurations Speaker 2-42 2.5 Speaker

!

C a u t i o n DO NOT ground the radio's speaker leads. This system has a floating speaker output

(DC voltage on both leads); damage to the audio circuit results if either lead is grounded or if they are shorted together. The speaker kit includes a trunnion bracket that allows the speaker to be mounted in a variety of ways. With the trunnion bracket, the speaker can mount permanently on the mounting surface or in accessible firewall areas. The trunnion allows the speaker to tilt for best operation. Mount the speaker out of the way so that it is not kicked or knocked around by the vehicle occupants. Mount the speaker as follows:

1. Use the speaker mounting bracket as a template to mark the mounting hole locations. 2. Use the self-drilling screws provided to fasten the trunnion. 3. Attach the speaker and fasten to the trunnion with two wing screws. 4. Route the speaker wires under the carpet or floor covering, or behind the kick panels. Be sure the wires are out of the way and is not snagged and broken by the occupants of the vehicle. 5. Do not submerse the 2-pin speaker connector in water nor place this connector in an area that could have standing water. Dashboard Trunnion Bracket Firewall OR Figure 2-49. Speaker Mounting MN003109A01_aa Draft Standard Configurations Speaker 2-43 2.5.1 Internal Speaker Disassembly NOTE: This configuration is only applicable for O2 Control Heads. You can disable the internal speaker of your radio by following the instructions below. The followings are the procedure to disassemble your radio for mid power radios:

1. Unplug power, antenna, microphone and all accessories connections. If the radio is a remote-mount radio, disconnect the remote-mount control cable from the front of the transceiver. 2. Remove the four screws found on the control head with a Torx T-20 bit as shown in Figure 2-50. Discard the screws. Figure 2-50. Removing the screws on the Control Head 3. Firmly grasp the front panel of the control head. Carefully remove the front housing assembly from the back housing assembly as shown in Figure 2-51. Note the position of the attached flex and do not pull on it excessively. Figure 2-51. Removing the Control Head MN003109A01_aa Draft 2-44 Standard Configurations Speaker 4. Put the control head face down on a clean, flat surface to avoid damaging it. Do not touch the o-ring on the back housing. 5. Carefully disconnect the speaker connector from the circuit board as shown in Figure 2-52. Figure 2-52. Disconnecting the Speaker Connector 6. Reattach the front housing assembly to the back housing assembly as shown in Figure 2-53. Make sure that the flex is returned to its original position and that the o-ring on the back housing assembly is not pinched. Figure 2-53. Reattaching the Control Head 7. Secure the front housing assembly back to the back housing assembly with four new screws using the Torx T-20 bit as shown in Figure 2-53. Apply 9 in. lbs. torque for each screw. The followings are the procedure to disassemble your radio for high power radios:

1. Remove the O2 Control Head front housing assembly. Refer to the APX8500 HP Basic Service Manual (Add APX8500 HP Basic Service ManualP/N). 2. Put the control head face down on a clean, flat surface to avoid damaging it. Do not touch the o-ring on the back housing. 3. Carefully disconnect the speaker connector from the circuit board as shown in Figure 2-52. MN003109A01_aa Draft Standard Configurations Speaker 2-45 Figure 2-54. Disconnecting the Speaker Connector 4. Reattach the front housing assembly. Refer to the APX8500 HP Basic Service Manual, Remove the O2 Control Head . MN003109A01_aa Draft 2-46 Standard Configurations Microphone Hang-Up Clip 2.6 Microphone Hang-Up Clip 2.6.1 Standard or O3 Control Head Hang-Up Clip The hang-up clip must be within reach of the operator(s) and close enough to the control head to prevent cable strain. Measure this distance before actually mounting the bracket. Since the bracket has a positive-detent action, the microphone can be mounted in any position. Use the hang-up clip as a template to locate the mounting holes. To avoid interference when removing the microphone, install the flathead screw in the top clip hole. Some microphone models require the grounding of the microphone clip in order for HUB operation to work correctly. Refer to the documentation that comes with your Motorola Solutions microphone model. NOTE: For multi-control head configuration where only one of the control heads has a microphone, the control heads without a microphone attached must have their HUB or Monitor pin

(J100-22) jumpered by a wire to GND (J100-1 or J100-14) for HUB operation to work. 2.7 RFID (Option) An APX mobile radio equipped with an RFID tag allows an alternate option for tracking the radio asset. Each RFID equipped radio has an RFID tag preprogrammed with the individual radio serial number (also found on the FCC label) as well as band and radio model information (see below for further information). Figure 2-55. RFID Location on Mid Power Radio RFID Tag Figure 2-56. RFID Location on High Power Radio RFID Tag MN003109A01_aa Draft Standard Configurations RFID (Option) 2.7.1 RFID Reading 2-47 To read an RFID tag using a UHF Gen 2 RFID reader (e.g. Motorola Solutions MC9090-G), open an appropriate RFID read application, point the RFID reader at the tag and activate the reader's RFID antenna (e.g. pull Motorola Solutions MC9090-G scanning trigger). RFID reader must be within 1 foot from tag in order to read. Two variables, Read Angle and Reader Orientation, aid in the distance needed to read and write to the RFID Tag. Read distance is independent of Tag Angle, but the reader should be as close to perpendicular to the tag as possible (Read Angle). As Read Angle increases past 60 degrees, read distance begins to decrease; tag becomes unreadable once Read Angle exceeds 90 degrees (see Figure 2-57). RFID tag cannot be read through metal. The orientation of the reader (Reader Orientation) and the tag must be aligned to improve read and writability (see Figure 2-61). Read Angle RFID Tag Figure 2-57. Read Angle for Mid Power Radio Read Angle RFID Tag Figure 2-58. Read Angle for High Power Radio MN003109A01_aa Draft 2-48 Standard Configurations RFID (Option)

. Tag Angle RFID Tag Figure 2-59. Tag Angle for Mid Power Radio Tag Angle RFID Tag Figure 2-60. Tag Angle for High Power Radio Reader Tag Reader Tag Figure 2-61. Examples of Reader and Tag Aligned (Reader Orientation) MN003109A01_aa Draft Standard Configurations RFID (Option) 2-49 Reader Tag Figure 2-62. Example of Reader and Tag Misaligned (Reader Orientation) MN003109A01_aa Draft 2-50 Standard Configurations RFID (Option) 2.7.2 Programming RFID (If Equipped) The user can reprogram the tag (up to 12 ASCII characters when encoded to hexadecimal format) using any UHF Gen 2 capable RFID writer (e.g. Motorola Solutions MC9090-G). NOTE: Follow read direction in Section 2.7.1 to optimized reprogramming. Table 2-1. Model Number Chart in 12-Digit ASCII Format Model Number Radio Tier/Band/Output Level Last Two Digits M37TXS9PW1AN APX Mobile 700/800 VHF UHFHP M37TSS9PW1AN APX Mobile 700/800 VHF UHFMP M30KSS9PW1AN APX Mobile SBMP VHF M24KSS9PW1AN M22KSS9PW1AN APX Low Tier MobileMP VHF M36KSS9PW1AN APX Lowest Tier MobileMP VHF M30KTS9PW1AN APX Mobile SBHP VHF M30QSS9PW1AN APX Mobile SBMP UHF1 M30QTS9PW1AN APX Mobile SBHP UHF1 M30SSS9PW1AN APX Mobile SBMP UHF2 M20TSS9PW1AN APX Mobile DBMP 700/800MP VHF M30TXS9PW1AN APX Mobile DBMP 700/800HP VHF M30URS0PW1AN APX Mobile SBMP 700/800 M22URS9PW1AN M24URS9PW1AN APX Low Tier MobileMP 700/800 M36URS9PW1AN APX Lowest Tier MobileMP 700/800 M24QSS9PW1AN M22QSS9PW1AN APX Low Tier MobileMP UHF1 M36QSS9PW1AN APX Lowest Tier MobileMP UHF1 M24SSS9PW1AN M22SSS9PW1AN APX Low Tier MobileMP UHF2 M36SSS9PW1AN APX Lowest Tier MobileMP UHF2 M22WRS9PW1AN APX Low Tier MobileMP 900 T0 D2 D8 D9 D3 E2 E3 D2 R2 R3 F2 F8 F9 E8 E9 E8 E9 F8 Table 2-2. Serial Number with Radio Band/Tier/Power Characters Radio Band/Tier/Power F 700/800 and 900 MN003109A01_aa Draft Standard Configurations Completing the Installation 2-51 Table 2-2. Serial Number with Radio Band/Tier/Power D E R T E S 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 VHF UHF 700/800 and VHF Multi-Band UHF1 and UHF2 700/800 and UHF APX 8500 APX 7000 APX 7500 Mid Power APX 7500 High Power APX 6000 APX 6500 Mid Power APX 6500 High Power APX Low Tier Portable APX Low Tier Mobile MP/APX 4500 MP/APX 2500 MP APX Lowest Tier Mobile MP/APX 1500 MP 2.8 Completing the Installation Complete the installation by connecting the speaker to the accessory cable; verify the ignition sense wire is attached according to planned ignition sense; verify the control head is attached to either the TIB or the CAN extension cable; and then attach the power cable to the back of the transceiver. MN003109A01_aa Draft 2-52 Standard Configurations Completing the Installation MN003109A01_aa Draft Chapter 3 Universal Relay Controller Installation The Universal Relay Controller (URC) is an extension of and an orderable accessory for O7 or O9 control head. URC is used to control high power switching peripherals, e.g. lightbar. URC works on all lightbars which can be controlled by power application. URC is connected to the transceiver's MMP port. The URC design consists of a microcontroller and uses 10 relays to control the switching device. A separate ground for isolation exists between the relay and MCU sections, which is provided by the use of iCoupler from Analog Devices. Each relay is connected to an output with 15 A fuse. The maximum load allowed on each output is 12 A. Two cables, each with the maximum of 60 A, can be used to connect to the input connector at the bus bar. Each cable is connected with a 60 A circuit breaker. One-wire EEPROM is employed to enable MMP to recognize the URC accessory ID. CPS can be used to program the relay patterns. When installing URC, make sure to plan the installation carefully and leave additional room in the front and rear of the box for cabling and accessory connections; and also to the sides of the radio so that you may access and install the trunnion screws. The recommended mounting location for URC is in the car trunk, either next to the transceiver or within the area not further than 4.5 m away from the transceiver. Ensure that sufficient cooling is provided. Do not cover URC with baggage, blankets, and others

!

C a u t i o n Do not backfeed power into URC. 3.1 Universal Relay Controller Mounting The mounting location must be accessible and visible. Select a location that permits routing the cable as directly as possible. NOTE: For optimum URC performance, orient the mounting trunnion as shown in Figure 3-1. Figure 3-1. Universal Relay Controller Orientation An adjustable trunnion, which allows a number of mounting positions, is supplied for mounting the URC. The installation must not interfere with the operation of the vehicle or its accessories. Draft 3-2 Universal Relay Controller Installation Universal Relay Controller Mounting Install the URC as follows:

1. Use the URC trunnion as a template to mark the mounting holes;

drill 5/32" holes. If mounting on a plastic surface, use a metal backing plate. 2. Attach the trunnion bracket using all four 10 16" x 5/8" self-tapping screws provided. 3. Temporarily install the URC (adjust for proper viewing angle) and fasten it to the trunnion with two wing screws. Test the installation to ensure that the unit is securely locked in place. Use four mounting screws on all installations Mounting surface IMPORTANT:

Use a metal backing plate (not supplied) if mounting trunnion on plastic or unstable surface Adjust the universal relay controller to desired angle and secure with wing screws TRUNNION Drill four 5/32 holes in mounting surface Figure 3-2. Universal Relay Controller Installation Exploded View MN003109A01_aa Draft Universal Relay Controller Installation O7/O9 Universal Relay Controller Cable Assembly 3-3 3.2 O7/O9 Universal Relay Controller Cable Assembly 3.2.1 Power Cable 1. Remove the cap nut of power cable gland assembly, and insert the power cable through the cap nut and neoprene seal in the cable gland body. Use power cable with either AWG 6 or AWG 8 only (recommended OD range of cable is 5.5 mm to 9 mm) that is able to withstand 80 A and 50 A respectively, to ensure water sealing of the controller. User can decide to install one or two power cables based on the requirements. The power cables (A+) are not supplied. 2. The loose end of the power cable with cable strip length 7.94 mm (5/16) is then placed on the power lug and secured down by a set screw. The cap nut is then reassembled with tightening torque 18 lb-in. 3. The other end of the power cable should be connected to circuit breaker (Motorola Solutions part number 40012006001) end which indicates "AUX" and then, to power supply on the other end which indicates "BAT", instead of connecting to power supply directly. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to install the second power cable, if required. 5. If only one power cable is installed, it is recommended to cover the other side of the power cable gland with power cable gland seal with tightening torque 18 lb-in. 3.2.2 Ground Cable 1. Remove the cap nut of ground cable gland assembly, insert the ground cable through the cap nut and then reassemble the cap nut. Use ground cable with AWG 14 only (recommended OD range of cable is 2 mm to 4 mm) that is able to withstand 5 A. The ground cables (A+) are not supplied. NOTE: The ground is used to switch the relays, and not act as a ground to the actual device being controlled. 2. The loose end of the ground cable with cable strip length 7.94 mm (5/16) is then connected to a two-pin terminal block. Both pins on the terminal block are inter-connected and either pin can be used. The cap nut is then reassembled with tightening torque 7 lb-in. Power Cable Gland Figure 3-3. Power and Ground Cable Glands Ground Cable Gland MN003109A01_aa Draft 3-4 Universal Relay Controller Installation O7/O9 Universal Relay Controller Cable Assembly Cable Gland Counter Nut Gasket, Cable Gland Neoprene Seal Cap Nut 3.2.3 Wires Figure 3-4. Cable Gland Assembly with Gasket 1. Assemble the wires into the lightbar gasket retainer and lightbar gasket. The URC can support lightbars through control wires with outer diameter ranging from 1.52 mm to 3.77 mm (0.06 to 0.148), with wire gages ranging from AWG 12 20. 2. Each individual loose wire (prior to stripping off the wire jacket) needs to be inserted one at a time through the chassis. Ensure the lightbar wire is straight before inserting the wire into the chassis. Each wire is sealed individually by the radial gasket seal. When a thick wire that is AWG 14 wire or wire OD > 2.90 mm is inserted through the chassis, there is potential torn at the rubber gasket. Remove the rubber gasket residual and continue to the next step. 3. Thin wires 2.5 mm and below should be dressed into the retention feature using a black stick

(see Figure 3-5); thick wires above 2.5 mm should be routed above the retention feature. Strip off the wire until 7.94 mm (5/16) after the wire is inserted into the URC, and install the wire into respective lightbar terminal block. 4. Cover the lightbar gasket retainer's hole with seal, gasket and ground cable gland, if no wire is inserted. WIRE RETENTION FEATURE LIGHTBAR WIRE WITH DIAMETER 2.5 mm AND BELOW LIGHTBAR WIRE WITH DIAMETER ABOVE 2.5 mm Figure 3-5. Wires Installation MN003109A01_aa Draft Universal Relay Controller Installation O7/O9 Universal Relay Controller Cable Assembly 3-5 Black Stick Figure 3-6. Wire Installation with Black Stick 5. The lightbar gasket should be replaced at each reassembly of the wire. NOTE: Use of other cable gages except as recommended in this manual may result in water intrusion. Any reassembly of wire needs a new lightbar gasket replaced. If the current loading for one wire is higher than 12 A, the wires should be splitted before being assembled to the URC system. Wires kit (PMKN4109_) is provided to ease installation of the URC. Incorrect use of the wires kit, e.g. improper connection at external loose end wires, may impact the robustness of the URC. Remove the wires and gasket residual inside the URC after the wire installation, before closing the top housing of the URC. 3.2.4 O7/O9 to URC Cable The O7/O9 to URC cable (Motorola Solutions part number 3064153H02) can be assembled either before or after reassembling the top housing. Assemble the RJ45 port of the cable into the RJ45 connector on the URC and turn the locking collar instead of cable, 90 degrees to the right to ensure it is locked properly. After that, test whether the cable is locked properly or not by trying to pull out the cable. Figure 3-7. O7/O9 to URC Cable Installation MN003109A01_aa 3-6 Draft Notes Universal Relay Controller Installation MN003109A01_aa Draft Chapter 4 Options and Accessories Installation 4.1 Dash-Mount Accessory Installation - Mid Power For dash-mounted configurations, the accessories must be installed through the accessory connector assembly that is located on the rear of the radio, adjacent to the power connector. Motorola Solutions-approved accessories are supplied with male terminals crimped to a 20-gauge wire specifically designed to fit the plug of the accessory connector assembly. Insert the male terminal into the accessory connector assembly in the appropriate location and connect the accessory connector assembly in the rear accessory port. Do not use other generic terminals in the plug. Generic terminals can cause electrical intermittencies and may cause damage to the plug. 4.1.1 Dash-Mount Emergency Pushbutton or Footswitch Installation Mount the footswitch using the hardware that comes with the kit. Open the accessory cable connector housing; remove the jumper wire. Connect the emergency switch wires to pins 14 and 15

(see Figure 4-1). Close the connector housing; route the finished cable from the switch location to the control head location. NOTE: The emergency footswitch should be attached with A+ unattached. A+ should be attached after successfully securing the screws in the connector. SPST NORMALLY CLOSED EMERGENCY SWITCH NOTE 1 PIN 14 PIN 15 NOTE 1: REMOVE BLACK JUMPER WIRE INSIDE ACCESSORY CONNECTOR HOUSING. INSERT WIRES FROM EMERGENCY SWITCH ACCESSORIES CONNECTOR 20 13 26 7 J2 IN DASH MOUNT J100 IN REMOTE MOUNT EMER GND 21 14 8 1 Figure 4-1. Emergency Switch Wiring Diagram

!

C a u t i o n The radio is sold with correct accessory cables and jumpers in order to have emergency de-activated by default, regardless of the setting in CPS. However, if cables are not used, or if jumpers are removed without replacing with an emergency accessory button/switch at one of the accessory ports, the radio power-up upon the application of A+. The display may not show an indication that the radio is on, and this can result in an incorrect operation of the radio as well as excessive current drain of the vehicle battery when the engine is off.

 

 

Draft 4-2 Options and Accessories Installation Remote-Mount Accessory Installation 4.1.2 Dash-Mount Horn and Lights (External Alarms) Relays NOTE: For installations that use the horn/lights option, select a suitable location for mounting

(normally under the dash) and, referring to Figure 4-2, perform the following procedure:

1. Horn Relay Connect the relay contacts across the horn ring switch, typically found in the steering column. Open the accessory cable connector and connect the two control wires

(male pins) into locations 18 and 24 of the connector. 2. Lights Relay Connect the relay across the head lamp ON/OFF switch, typically found in the steering column. Open the accessory cable connector and connect the two control wires

(male pins) into locations 19 and 24 of the accessory connector. CONNECT ACROSS HORN RING SWITCH CONNECT ACROSS HEAD LAMP SWITCH SPST N.O. RELAY 12V COIL SPST N.O. RELAY 12V COIL VIP OUT 1 SWB+

VIP OUT 2 PIN 18 PIN 24 PIN 19 ACCESSORIES CONNECTOR Figure 4-2. Horn/Light Wiring Diagram 20 13 26 7 VIP OUT 2

(LIGHTS) VIP OUT 1

(HORN) SWB+

21 14 8 1 Figure 4-3. Radio MAP Connector 4.2 Remote-Mount Accessory Installation Perform the following installation procedure:

1. Select an appropriate place to mount the option or accessory hardware. 2. Route the accessory-to-control head cables under floor coverings or behind panels so that the vehicle occupants do not snag or break the wires. 3. Attach wires from the accessory to the appropriate wire on the VIP cable (see Table 4-1 and Table 4-2). MN003109A01_aa Draft Options and Accessories Installation Remote-Mount Accessory Installation 4-3

!

C a u t i o n The radio is sold with correct accessory cables and jumpers in order to have emergency de-activated by default, regardless of the setting in CPS. However, if cables are not used, or if jumpers are removed without replacing with an emergency accessory button/switch at one of the accessory ports, the radio power-up upon the application of A+. The display may not show an indication that the radio is on, and this can result in an incorrect operation of the radio as well as excessive current drain of the vehicle battery when the engine is off. 4.2.1 Emergency Pushbutton or Footswitch Installation Mount the switch using the hardware that comes with the kit. Connect the button/switch wires to a ground pin and the emergency pin, removing the default jumper wire in the rear accessory cable. The button/switch shorts the pins when in-active. When the button/switch is pressed, its contact opens, the emergency path is un-ungrounded and pulled-high inside the radio transceiver, and detected by the processor. If an emergency accessory is used at either (or both) J2 connector and J626 connector, all jumper wires, shorting emergency to ground, must be removed so button/switch press can be detected. 4.2.2 Horn (External Alarm) Relay Installation Mount the horn relay in a suitable location (normally under the dash). Connect the relay contacts across the horn ring switch, typically found in the steering column. Connect the two control wires to a SW B+ pin and a VIP OUT pin on the VIP connector. 4.2.3 Lights (External Alarm) Relay Installation Mount the light relay in a suitable location (normally under the dash). Connect the relay contacts across the head lamp ON/OFF switch. Connect the two control wires to a SW B+ pin and a VIP OUT pin on the VIP connector. 4.2.4 Gunlock Installation The O7 or O9 control head can program up to three gunlocks through the programmable buttons. You can set the time for the momentary trigger using the time-out trigger button. Connect the relay contacts across the gunlock switch to install the gunlock. Connect the two control wires to a SW B+

pin and a VIP OUT pin on the VIP connector. It is recommended to install a failsafe/redundant bypass switch for the gunlock. It is suggested to use a separate timer switch or a manual push-on button switch to activate the gunlock. Connect the switch from the supply to the gunlock directly, as shown in Figure 4-4. Place the manual button at a suitable and reachable location, yet not easily seen. MN003109A01_aa Draft 4-4 Options and Accessories Installation Remote-Mount Accessory Installation A+ into Transceiver Car Battery GND Redundancy Wiring Momentary or time-out bypass manual switch Relay and Diode for Activation of Gunlock Gunlock VIP OUT pin from either J2 (Transceiver) or J400 (control head) VIP OUT GND Figure 4-4. Gunlock Switch Redundancy Diagram - Mid Power MN003109A01_aa Draft Options and Accessories Installation Remote-Mount Accessory Installation 4-5 Figure 4-5. Gunlock Switch Redundancy Diagram - High Power NOTE: Refer to section 4.3.1 for information related to wiring and activation of VIPOUTs The Y-cable KT000247A01 is primarily designed to allow for simultaneous operation of the Motorola Solutions Branded SB9600 siren and still retain duplicate access to all the MAP (J2) connector pins located on the APX 8500 remote TIB. Use of emergency accessories, speakers, programming cables, VIPS, and others are possible through the P3 connector of Y-cable KT000247A01. The 26pin connector P2 does not contain every signal from the legacy DB25 port, called J600 on the APX 7500. Therefore, some legacy functionality that is A+ is reduced with the APX 8500 remote mount configuration compared to the APX 7500 remote mount configuration. MN003109A01_aa Draft 4-6 Options and Accessories Installation Remote-Mount Accessory Installation 4.2.5 Horn-Ring Transfer Configure the Horn Relay for either Negative Contact or Positive Contact as shown in section 6.3 of the siren/PA manual (6881093C18). Program the designated VIP-OUT line for Horn-Ring Transfer and program the designated VIP-IN line for Horn-Ring. Figure 4-6 shows wiring diagrams for connecting the Horn-Ring through a transfer relay for both negative and positive ground systems. Refer to the siren/PA manual (6881093C18) for more information. Horn Ring Break Here

+ 12V N.C. COM. N.O. To Control Head VIP Output Programmed for Horn-Ring Transfer To SW B+ at VIP Connector To Control Head VIP Input Programmed for Horn-Ring Any SPDT Relay with 12V Coil and Suitable Contact Ratings for Vehicle Installation Negative-Contact Horn-Ring Break Here To Horn N.C. COM. N.O. To DIG. GND at VIP Connector Under Hood Horn Relay Horn Horn Ring

+ 12V To Control Head VIP Output Programmed for Horn-Ring Transfer To SW B+ at VIP Connector To Control Head VIP Input Programmed for Horn-Ring Positive-Contact Horn-Ring Normally-Open Momentary Contact Pushbutton To VIP Input Programmed for Horn-Ring To DIG. GND at VIP Connector Pushbutton Connections NOTE: Locate Pushbutton in a Location Convenient to the Driver 4.2.6 Record Audio Out Jack of Transmit and Receive Audio Figure 4-6. Siren/PA Horn-Ring Connections The use of Power Cable kit HKN6187_ (see Figure 2-44) provides access to both the transmitted audio speech, as well as the received audio speech. This can be recorded with a standard tape recorder using a 2.5 mm connector. 4.2.7 Earphone Jack The use of Power Cable kit HKN6187_ (see Figure 2-44) provides the ability to use a standard earphone/headset instead of the external speaker. Once a cable is plugged into this 2.5 mm jack, the external speaker attached at the control head turns mute. MN003109A01_aa Draft Options and Accessories Installation Vehicle Interface Port Overview 4-7 4.2.8 USB Data Cables It is recommended that the USB 1.5 meter data cable HKN6163_ is used for both dash mount configurations (at J2 connector) and for remote mount configurations (at J100 connector). This is because the HKN6163_ has the emergency jumper present, which is necessary for correct dash mount configurations. For interfacing at the MMP port, use Cable HKN6184_ which is a USB device cable. The USB 4 meter (15 feet) data cable HKN6172_ is recommended for connections to the J2. If the customer intends to use the HKN6172_ for connections to the J2, the cable 26-pin connector must be opened and an emergency jumper-wire placed across pins 14 and 15. Refer to Figure 4-1. 4.2.9 RS232 Cables 4.3 The following are RS232 cables. Although not compatible with CPS radio reading or programming, they can be used for interfacing with RS232 accessories or RS232 computer programs. HKN6160_ is a 6 feet RS232 cable from J2 connector. HKN6161_ is a 20 feet RS232 cable from J2 connector. Vehicle Interface Port Overview The Vehicle Interface Port (VIP) allows the control head to operate outside circuits and to receive inputs from outside the control head. There are three VIP outputs which are used for relay control. There are also three VIP inputs which accept inputs from switches (remote mount only). Function Radio Pin VIP Cable

(HKN6196_) Wire Color Number J400-1 RED SWB +

J400-2 GREEN GND J400-3 - NO PIN J400-4 - "VIP" detect: GPIO=HIGH J400-5 BLUE VIP_OUT_1 J400-6 YELLOW VIP_OUT_2 J400-7 BLACK VIP_OUT_3 J400-8 WHITE VIP_IN_1 (VIP_IN GPIO) J400-9 ORANGE VIP_IN_2 (VIP_IN GPIO) J400-10 VIOLET VIP_IN_3 Figure 4-7. Remote Control Head Pinouts Figure 4-8. HKN6196_ VIP Connector Detail MN003109A01_aa Draft 4-8 Options and Accessories Installation Vehicle Interface Port Overview 4.3.1 VIP Output Connections The VIP output pins are on the back of the control head (J100 and J400), or the rear accessory port

(J2), as shown in Figure 2-12. Use these connections to wire control relays. One end of the relay should connect to switched B+ voltage, while the other side connects to a software controlled ON/

OFF switch inside the control head. The relay can be normally on or normally off depending on the configuration of the VIP outputs. There are three VIP output connections, as follows:

Table 4-1. VIP Output Connections J400 J2 J100 VIP OUT #

SW B+ Pin Number On/Off Switched Pin Number SW B+ Pin Number On/Off Switched Pin Number 1 2 3 Red 1 Red 1 Red 1 5 (Blue) 6 (Yellow) 7 (Black) 24 24 NA 18 19 NA SW B+ Pin Number 24 24 NA On/Off Switched Pin Number 18 19 NA The function of these VIP outputs can be field programmed in the control head. Typical applications for VIP outputs are external horn/lights alarm and horn ring transfer relay control. For further information on VIP outputs, see the control head programming manual. VIP OUT 1 and VIP OUT 2 can be accessed from either J100 or J400 connectors. This is to allow a previously wired VIP OUT at J2 to move easily to J100. However, when any cable is inserted into J400, J100 VIP OUTs are disabled. When installing relays to the VIP OUT lines, a diode is necessary to prevent damage to the transistor or MOSFET, due to back EMF when the field collapses on the relay coil. Some vendor relays already come with this diode built-in, and other relays require the customer to install it. Figure 4-9 shows the proper placement of the diode across the relay coil. The transistor or MOSFET is located inside the radio or the D.E.K. box. G D S SW B+

VIPout Protection Diode Relay N.C. N.O. Note:

To 'activate' a VIPOUT, you have to ground the VIPOUT, such that the current now flows thru the relay coil to GND through a MOSFET inside the radio or control head, which causes the relay wiper to toggle. The MOSFET of a VIPOUT should never be used to directly drive an accessory. The MOSFET should be used to control an external relay. Figure 4-9. Relay Coil NOTE: See Appendix A: Replacement Parts Ordering to order relay for your VIP OUT applications. Example relay hardware: TLN4533_ (relay without internal diode), HLN6969_ (relay with internal back EMF protection diode), and HKN4258_ (relay wiring cable). MN003109A01_aa Draft Options and Accessories Installation Vehicle Interface Port Overview 4-9 4.3.2 VIP Input Connections The VIP input pins are only available on the back of the control head (remote mount). These connections control inputs from switches. One side of the switch connects to ground while the other side connects to a buffered input on the control head. The switch can be normally closed (NC) or normally open (NO) depending on the configuration of the VIP inputs. There are three VIP input connections, as follows:

Table 4-2. VIP Input Connections J400 J2 VIP IN #

1 2 3 Ground Pin Number 2 (green) 2 (green) 2 (green) On/Off Switched Pin Number Ground Pin Number On/Off Switched Pin Number 8 (white) 9 (orange) 10 (violet) NA NA NA NA NA NA NOTE: Remote Mount requires the VIP cable to be attached to J400. MCH installations require the VIP inputs to be connected to the head assigned ID #1. See Section 2.2.2.4 for further information.

!

C a u t i o n APX mobile radios equipped with the following features are capable of transmitting automatically, even if the radio is turned off:

Automatic Vehicle Location Other Special Data Products All APX mobile have accessory connector pins 14 and 15 connected together to allow the radio to power down. Opening this connection by REMOVING the accessory connector, or otherwise failing to maintain a normally closed path, could, if left unchecked, drain the vehicle battery, and possibly cause transmissions to occur. MN003109A01_aa Draft 4-10 4.4 Options and Accessories Installation Accessory Connector Assembly Details (P2) Accessory Connector Assembly Details (P2) The APX mobile accessory connector assembly is mounted on the right rear of the radio, opposite the antenna and adjacent to the power connector. It is fastened to the radio using the jackscrews and held together by the two cover screws. It is a multi-functional connector that allows for many different types of adaptations. All approved accessory wires are securely strain-relieved through the exiting slots at the back of the accessory connector assembly. The terminations that are supplied with all accessories are designed to be fully engaged and locked into the plug connector (6680163F01). They can also be detached for service with the assistance of a terminal removal tool. The accessory connector assembly can be serviced multiple times for future installation upgrades. For mid power, the accessory connector assembly, supplied with every APX mobile dash-mounted radio, is equipped with a 26-pin plug assembly, two covers, two jackscrews, two cover screws, one emergency jumper, one ignition sense cable assembly, and one speaker pigtail. The jumper is provided to complete the circuit for emergency mode. If this circuit becomes open, the radio is set to emergency mode. 39800834F05 is the crimping pin part number for use with any wires used inside the accessory cable connector. 4.4.1 Disassembly and Assembly 4.4.1.1 Disassembly 1. Disconnect the negative terminal from the vehicle battery. Make sure that the battery cable is secured and do not power the vehicle electrical system. 2. Unscrew both jackscrews completely. 3. Pull the accessory connector assembly out from the radio. 4. Loosen both cover screws, but do not remove them completely. 5. Pull the jackscrews away from the plug and hold them back. 6. Pry apart the accessory connector assembly covers. 7. Attach any new wire to its proper location by pushing in the male terminal. When you hear a pop, the wire is engaged. To verify that the wire is engaged, tug gently on the wire and be sure it does not come out. Do not overload the wire to avoid severe damage to the plug. MN003109A01_aa Draft Options and Accessories Installation Accessory Connector Assembly Details (P2) 4-11 4.4.1.2 Assembly 1. Place the plug in one cover. Be sure that the flange of the plug is in the slot of the cover. See Figure 4-10. 2. Push the jackscrew through the plug to hold it in. 3. Position each wire across the strain-relief features in the cover. Avoid damaging loads on the plug by allowing some slack in each wire in the accessory connector assembly wire chamber. 4. Place the second cover onto the plug. Be sure that the flange is protruding through both covers. Figure 4-10. Exploded View of Accessory Connector Assembly (HLN6863_) 5. Squeeze the covers together bending the wires in the strain-relief features. You may need a pair of pliers to seat the assembly covers. 6. Once the covers are fully seated, fasten them with the cover screws. Tighten the screws firmly but do not over-tighten them. Be sure none of the wires are pinched. 7. Reattach the accessory connector assembly to the back of the radio and fasten it by finger-tightening the jackscrews to prevent any loosening. NOTE: See APX Mobile Basic Service Manual for more detailed descriptions of these pins and other connectors located in the APX mobile radio. MN003109A01_aa Draft 4-12 Options and Accessories Installation Motorola Solutions Branded SB9600 Siren Connection to APX 8500 4.5 Motorola Solutions Branded SB9600 Siren Connection to APX 8500

#1 #8 #14 #21 130 340

#7 #13 #20 #26 P3

#1

#14

#13

#25 P2

#21 #11 #8 #1

#26 #20 #13 #7 P1 CABLE 2 CABLE 1 Figure 4-11. J600 Accessory Connector Y-Cable KT000247A01 CONNECTION P3 1 CUT CUT 4 5 6 7 CUT CUT 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 22 AWG YELLOW SPIRAL 22 AWG BROWN SPIRAL SPIRAL 22 AWG ORANGE 22 AWG WHITE SPIRAL 22 AWG BLACK 22 AWG PINK 22 AWG PURPLE 22 AWG GRAY 22 AWG TAN 22 AWG DRAIN 22 AWG BLUE 22 AWG RED 22 AWG GREEN 18 AWG RED 18 AWG YELLOW 22 AWG LIGHT BLUE 22 AWG LIGHT GREEN 18 AWG ORANGE 18 AWG BROWN 22 AWG BROWN/WHITE 22 AWG BLACK/WHITE 18 AWG BLACK P1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 22 AWG YELLOW SPIRAL 22 AWG BROWN SPIRAL SPIRAL 22 AWG ORANGE 22 AWG WHITE SPIRAL 22 AWG BLACK 22 AWG PINK 22 AWG PURPLE 22 AWG GRAY 22 AWG TAN 22 AWG DRAIN 22 AWG BLUE 22 AWG RED 22 AWG GREEN 18 AWG RED 18 AWG YELLOW 22 AWG LIGHT BLUE 22 AWG LIGHT GREEN 18 AWG ORANGE 18 AWG BROWN 22 AWG BROWN/WHITE 22 AWG BLACK/WHITE 18 AWG BLACK P2 10/11 5 14 2 3 CUT CUT 19 23 8/17 4 CUT CUT 18/21 13 1 CUT 15 CUT 25 6/9 CUT 12 20/22 16 24 MN003109A01_aa Draft Options and Accessories Installation Motorola Solutions Branded SB9600 Siren Connection to APX 8500 4-13 Figure 4-12. Pinout for cable KT000247A01 Siren Cable Figure 4-13. Interfacing the Y-cable to the Motorola Solutions Branded SB9600 Siren and External Accesso-

ries The Y-cable KT000247A01 is primarily designed to allow for simultaneous operation of the Motorola Solutions Branded SB9600 siren and still retain duplicate access to all the MAP (J2) connector pins located on the APX 8500 remote TIB. Use of emergency accessories, speakers, programming cables, VIPS, and others are possible through the P3 connector of Y-cable KT000247A01. The 25pin connector P2 does not contain every signal from the legacy DB25 port, called J600 on the APX 7500. Therefore, some legacy functionality that is A+ is reduced with the APX 8500 remote mount configuration compared to the APX 7500 remote mount configuration. NOTE: Only USB 1.5 meter data cable HKN6163_ is approved for use in series with the Y-cable KT000247A01 at connector P3. USB 4 meter data cable HKN6172_ is not approved for use in series with the Y-cable at connector P3. MN003109A01_aa Draft 4-14 Options and Accessories Installation Compatibility of Emergency when Attaching a Motorola Solutions Branded 4.6 Compatibility of Emergency when Attaching a Motorola Solutions Branded SB9600 Siren When using emergency footswitch or pushbutton with siren/PA configuration, REMOVE pin 8

(emergency) from the siren connector of the HKN4363_ siren cable as follows:

Notes Siren Cable Figure 4-14. Field adjustment for Emergency Operation with Siren Accessory 1. Remove the knob from the siren/PA cable connector. 2. Remove all four screws from the connector in the siren/PA cable. 3. Open the connector cap and locate pin 8. 4. Using the contact removal tool (6684690C02), remove pin 8 from the connector. 5. Put the connector cap in place and proceed to reinstall the four screws and the knob. Pin 8 A B 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 28 27 26 25 24 23 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 Figure 4-15. Location for Pin 8 MN003109A01_aa Draft Chapter 5 Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power 5.1 Motorcycle Radio Description The motorcycle model includes all the same components in the standard radio. The following paragraphs describe the unique items provided with the motorcycle models. A small label is included with the motorcycle radio, which can be placed on the radio to identify it as a motorcycle radio. The label should be placed on a flat and protected area to avoid damage during handling. See Figure 5-1. Figure 5-1. Identification of a Motorcycle Radio by Using a Label 5.1.1 Transceiver Enclosure The transceiver is mounted in the weather-resistant enclosure that consists of a bottom housing and a hinged top cover. The top cover has a locking latch that requires a key to open. The enclosure is mounted above the rear motorcycle wheel, oriented so that the lock is forward and the hinged cover opens toward the rear of the motorcycle. The bottom housing has a grommeted hole for cable entry and weep holes to permit water drainage. The enclosure is mounted on the motorcycle with a universal mounting plate and shock and vibration isolators. A large, braided ground-strap (installed between the mounting plate bolts and the motorcycle frame) grounds the transceiver. 5.1.2 Control/Display Unit All radio functions, except push-to-talk (PTT), are activated from the control head, which also is weather-resistant. The control head and the external speaker are mounted for easy access near the center of the handlebars. The control head is positioned for unobstructed viewing, and it may be tilted on the horizontal axis for ease of viewing. The microphone cable port on the front of the control head is plugged and is not used. 5.1.3 Control Head Cable The control-head cable connects the control head to the transceiver. The cable is routed along the motorcycle frame and has weather-resistant connections at both ends. Excess cable is coiled under the transceiver inside the weather-resistant enclosure. Each end of the cable is strain-relieved with jackscrews at the control head and the transceiver. The cable is shielded to reduce the effects of radio frequency interference and ignition sense noise. Draft 5-2 Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power Motorcycle Radio Description 5.1.4 Microphone A weather-resistant, palm microphone and coiled cord plug into a pigtail connector on the control cable. The microphone attaches to a hang-up bracket located within easy reach of the motorcycle rider. The coiled cord is long enough to be operated by someone standing next to the motorcycle, yet short enough to not interfere with the motorcycle steering or operation. 5.1.5 External Speaker A 3.2-ohm, 10-watt-rated-audio-power, external speaker is mounted on the front of the motorcycle. The speaker cable is routed along the motorcycle frame to the transceiver rear accessory connector. A sealed, weather-resistant, speaker-muting (toggle) switch is mounted on top of the speaker. The external speaker connects to the rear accessory connector of the transceiver. 5.1.6 Headset Capability The motorcycle radio is compatible with various headset accessories that provide hands-free operation of the radio. Motorola Solutions does not manufacture headset equipment, but provides the interconnection for headset equipment with the motorcycle radio. Aftermarket headset equipment is available through Motorola Solutions (see Appendix A: Replacement Parts Ordering).

!

C a u t i o n To avoid loud audio, refer to the CPS help menu for audio settings if the Motorola Solutions mobile radio is used with any motorcycle helmet headset. 5.1.7 Antenna 5.1.8 The antenna(s) are mounted on top of the transceiver weather-resistant enclosure. The enclosure metal lining acts as the antenna ground plane. Ignition Sense (ACC) Wire The ignition sense wire connects to the motorcycle fuse box and is routed along the motorcycle frame to the transceiver rear accessory connector. The radio is wired so that transmission is inhibited if the motorcycle ignition sense switch is off. If the PTT switch is pressed with the ignition sense off, a low-frequency tone sounds. The receiver is controlled by the control head on/off switch. MN003109A01_aa Draft Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power Installation Overview 5-3 Installation Overview 5.2 5.2.1 General All APX mobile radios are tested and inspected before shipment. It is, however, suggested that the transmitter frequency, deviation, and power output be checked at the time of installation. It is the license holder responsibility to ensure that the operating parameters of his station comply with applicable laws governing radio communications equipment. For tests and alignment procedures, refer to the appropriate service manual (refer to Related Publications. Generally, the installation of the motorcycle radio takes place in the following parts:

Mounting the universal mounting plate and related hardware at the rear of the motorcycle;

Mounting the control head, speaker, microphone, and related hardware forward on the motorcycle;

Routing the power cable, control-head cable, speaker cable, and ignition sense cable to the weather-resistant enclosure;

Mounting the weather-resistant enclosure and radio chassis, and connecting the cables;

Mounting the antenna(s) to the weather-resistant enclosure. A universal mounting plate, supplied by Motorola Solutions, is first mounted to either a motorcycle carrier at the rear of the motorcycle or to the rear frame of the motorcycle itself. The mounting procedures for the universal mounting plate vary from motorcycle to motorcycle. Therefore, the procedures given in this manual for installing the mounting plate may not specifically apply, but are provided for guidance. The control head, speaker, and microphone are mounted forward on the motorcycle, on or near the steering column. There are several possible mounting configurations which use a combination of Motorola Solutions and customer-built brackets. These configurations are outlined in this manual. Because of the large number of motorcycle makes and models in existence, the customer-built brackets are necessary to tailor the mounting of the Motorola Solutions equipment to the particular motorcycle being used. Suggestions for customer-built brackets are given in this manual. The power cable, control-head cable, speaker cable, and ignition sense cable are routed to the weather-resistant enclosure position. The enclosure and the radio chassis are then mounted. Special care is required when connecting cables to the radio equipment within the enclosure. MN003109A01_aa 5-4 5.2.2 Draft Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power Installation Overview Important Motorcycle Installation Hints Consider the following when mounting the radio components:

Excess lengths of control-head, power, ignition sense, and speaker cables must be routed in the enclosure as shown in Figure 5-19. All components must be mounted securely in order to withstand the constant and sometimes severe vibration experienced on a motorcycle. No cantilever action, which could cause severe vibration, should be generated in the mounting hardware. The control head and microphone must be placed for ease of accessibility by the motorcycle operator. Forward components (control head, microphone, and speaker) should not interfere with visual or physical access to controls and instruments. Forward components should not interfere with the handling of the motorcycle. Cabling between the control head and the radio chassis should be run to minimize interference with operator movements. The weather-resistant enclosure should be placed to avoid any interference with the motorcycle operator. Electrical continuity must be present through the enclosure shock mounts to the motorcycle frame for proper electrical and RF grounding. The antenna(s) are designed for mounting on the top of the weather-resistant enclosure and an adequate metal ground plane. Only the supplied microphone mounting clip should be used to ensure secure mounting of the microphone. This clip has a very strong spring to ensure positive retention of the microphone over rough terrain. Also, there must be electrical continuity from this clip to the motorcycle frame for DC grounding. Direct access to the microphone should be provided from both sides of the motorcycle. Sufficient slack in the microphone coiled cord should be allowed so as not to impede steering. Mounting hardware must be stainless steel to prevent corrosion. If an extra length of cable is used to extend the microphone, ensure that the added capacitance does not interfere with the operation of the radio. A suitable covering should be applied to the DB-9 receptacle when the water resistant microphone (HMN1079) is not connected. MN003109A01_aa Draft Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power Installation Overview 5-5 5.2.3 Parts Identification The following installation procedures refer to Figure 5-2 through Figure 5-20. Detailed descriptions of the mounting hardware used in each procedure are provided in parts lists located in the exploded views located in the APX Mobile Basic Service Manual (see related documentation). Those parts supplied by Motorola Solutions are contained in one of the following kits:

Motorcycle Weather-Resistant Microphone Motorcycle Weather-Resistant Speaker with Mute Switch Motorcycle Hardware Kit SECURENET or Motorcycle Hardware Kit Motorcycle Power Cable Kit Motorcycle Mounting Kit Weather-Resistant Enclosure Antenna 5.2.4 Order of Installation Before starting the installation, familiarize yourself with the mounting hardware (see Figure 5-2 through Figure 5-20). Perform the installation procedures in the order that follows. Install the universal mounting plate on the motorcycle. Install the control head and speaker. Install the microphone hang-up clip. Install antenna base and cable onto enclosure. Install the cables. Install the weather-resistant enclosure on the universal mounting plate. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Route the cables inside the weather-resistant enclosure. Install the transceiver in the weather-resistant enclosure. 8. 9. Install the antenna(s) on the enclosure. MN003109A01_aa Draft 5-6 5.3 Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power Installing the Universal Mounting Plate Installing the Universal Mounting Plate The universal mounting plate, supplied with the motorcycle radio, must be mounted on the motorcycle first. It provides the base on which the weather-resistant enclosure is to be mounted. The method used for mounting the plate depends on the make and model of the motorcycle and whether the plate is mounted to a carrier or to the motorcycle chassis. After the plate has been securely mounted to the motorcycle, mounting the weather-resistant enclosure onto the plate is straightforward. Figure 5-2 illustrates the universal mounting plate mounted to a motorcycle carrier. Since there are so many makes and models of motorcycles and motorcycle carriers, it is impossible to give specific step-by-step instructions for mounting the universal mounting plate. However, noting the following considerations aids in the installation procedure. A minimum of holes are predrilled into this plate as supplied. Mounting holes must be drilled as required for the particular motorcycle on which the plate is being mounted. The universal mounting plate should be mounted on the motorcycle in such a manner that the later mounting of the weather-resistant enclosure do not interfere with the motorcycle seat back, with any other obstacles, or with the motorcycle operator. The enclosure may be temporarily bolted to the universal mounting plate and the unit positioned on the motorcycle to ensure the above criteria are met. To ensure a good grounding path from the universal mounting plate to the motorcycle carrier or frame, stainless steel lock washers must be used with the mounting hardware in two areas to score through the paint on the universal mounting plate and on the carrier or frame, thereby, providing good electrical contact with the underside of the motorcycle carrier or motorcycle frame. Figure 5-2. Universal Mounting Plate Installation (Part of Radio Enclosure Kit) Follow the procedures below to mount the universal mounting plate to the motorcycle

(see Figure 5-2). 1. Determine the mounting position for the mounting plate. 2. Determine whether stainless steel spacers are required for clearance in mounting the plate. 3. Drill four 9/32-inch holes in the mounting plate and the corresponding motorcycle carrier or chassis for mounting the plate. 4. Attach the universal mounting plate to the motorcycle using four machine screws, eight lock washers, and four nuts. Tighten screws securely. The lock washers must cut through the paint on the plate and motorcycle carrier or frame to ensure a good ground path. MN003109A01_aa Draft Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power Installing the Speaker and Control Head 5-7 5.4 Installing the Speaker and Control Head NOTE: To disable the internal speaker of the O2 Control Head, please refer to Section 2.5.1: Internal Speaker Disassembly . The control head mounting location and configuration is determined largely by the make and model of motorcycle. Two different mounting configurations are described below. One involves mounting the speaker and control head together as a unit using the combination speaker/control-head bracket

(shown in Figure 5-4) supplied by Motorola Solutions. Alternately, the control head may be mounted by itself using a smaller control-head bracket supplied by Motorola Solutions. In this case, the speaker is mounted elsewhere. This section outlines installation procedures for each configuration mentioned above. The customer (or installer) is in the best position to determine the most appropriate mounting configuration for the control head and speaker based on the particular motorcycle on which the equipment is to be mounted.

!

C a u t i o n When determining its location, position the control head so that it is clearly visible and within easy reach of the motorcycle operator. Figure 5-3. Motorcycle Control Head Cabling (3075217A01) MN003109A01_aa Draft 5-8 Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power Installing the Speaker and Control Head 5.4.1 Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together Figure 5-4 illustrates the combination speaker/control head bracket. This combination bracket is used only when the control head and speaker are to be mounted as a unit. Also illustrated in Figure 5-4 is a handlebar-mounting bracket which may be required if the combination speaker/

control-head bracket cannot be easily mounted to the motorcycle. In this case the handlebar-mounting bracket is mounted to the motorcycle, and the combination bracket is then mounted to the handlebar-mounting bracket. Figure 5-4. Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together MN003109A01_aa Draft Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power Installing the Speaker and Control Head 5-9 Provision has been made on the combination speaker/control-head bracket for mounting the microphone hang-up clip. If that mounting is desired, the hang-up clip must be attached to the bracket before installing the control head and speaker. See Section 5.6: Installing the Microphone Hang-Up Clip for the hang-up clip procedure. Install the speaker and control head as described below. 1. Determine the location where the speaker/control head is to be mounted. Consider how the speaker/control-head bracket may be mounted, and whether or not a handlebar-mounting bracket is needed. Take care to select a location that is not only mechanically convenient, but is located for ease of operation. NOTE: The angle at which the handlebar-mounting bracket or the speaker/control-head bracket is mounted to the motorcycle determines the firing angle of the speaker. If the handlebar-mounting bracket is needed, install it first. 2. 3. Mount the speaker/control-head bracket, either directly to the motorcycle, or, if used, to the handlebar-mounting bracket, using four stainless-steel machine screws, lock washers, and nuts. 4. Mount the 9-pin D-connector end of the motorcycle control-head cable to the speaker/control head bracket, using two machine screws, flat washers, and nuts. (Cable routing directions appear later in this section.) 5. Mount the speaker on the speaker/control-head bracket, using two machine screws and lock washers. Torque these screws to 20 in-lbs. 6. Attach the control-head cable to the control head and tighten the locking screws on the connector. This connection must be made before you mount the control head in the bracket.

(Cable routing directions appear later in this section.) 7. Mount the control head to the bracket, using two machine screws, lock washers, and flat washers. 8. Adjust the control head viewing angle by loosening its mounting screws and rotating the control head to the desired angle. Then, retighten screws to 20 in-lbs torque. This concludes the speaker/control-head installation. 5.4.2 Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together Some motorcycles provide a console for mounting radio equipment. This console is attached to the top of the fuel tank. With the use of a mounting bracket, screws, nuts, and lock washers, the combination speaker/control-head bracket can be mounted to this console. Figure 5-5 illustrates this type of mounting. The console attachment screws must be removed, and the console must be lifted slightly from the fuel tank to gain access in order to attach mounting hardware, and to route cables later. In this installation, the microphone (mic), mic hang-up bracket, and mic extension bracket interferes with handlebar travel. Installation using this method is the same as in Section 5.4.1: Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together . MN003109A01_aa Draft 5-10 Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power Installing the Speaker and Control Head Figure 5-5. Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together f MN003109A01_aa Draft Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power Installing the Speaker and Control Head 5-11 5.4.3 Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately It may be necessary to use the smaller control head bracket (part number 07-80127N02) and mount the speaker and microphone hang-up clip in another location on the motorcycle. Before installing the control head using the bracket described above, the control-head end of the control-head cable should be temporarily fastened to the control head, and the control head fastened to its bracket. Motorola Solutions-supplied spacers and the mic-cable bracket are required to mount the control head to the handlebar. This mic-cable bracket has holes to mount the microphone-cable connector. Follow these procedures when mounting the smaller control-head bracket:

1. Determine the location at which the control head is to be mounted. Take care to choose a location that is not only mechanically convenient, but is located for ease of operation. 2. Securely mount the Motorola Solutions-supplied spacers, mic-cable bracket, and small control-head bracket to the handlebars. 3. Mount the 9-pin D-connector end of the motorcycle control-head cable to the mic-cable bracket, using two machine screws, flat washers, and nuts. (Cable routing directions appear later in this section.) 4. Attach the control-head end of the cable to the control head and tighten the locking screws on the connector. 5. Mount the control head to the small control-head bracket, at the proper viewing angle, using two wing screws. Tighten firmly. This concludes the control-head installation. MN003109A01_aa Draft 5-12 Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power Installing the Speaker and Control Head Figure 5-6. Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately 5.4.4 Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately The control head may be mounted to the fuel tank console using the smaller control-head bracket and spacers/hardware. In this configuration, the microphone cable connector may be attached directly to the console, eliminating the need for a custom bracket. MN003109A01_aa Draft Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power Installing the Speaker and Control Head 5-13 Figure 5-7. Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately Installation is the same as detailed in Section 5.4.2: Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together and Section 5.4.3: Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately . MN003109A01_aa Draft 5-14 5.5 Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power Installing the Speaker Installing the Speaker NOTE: To disable the internal speaker of the O2 Control Head, please refer to Section 2.5.1: Internal Speaker Disassembly . Use the following procedure when the speaker is mounted separate from the control head. The speaker bracket supplied with the speaker may be used alone if a suitable location can be found, or if necessary, a customer-supplied bracket may be fabricated for mounting the speaker. 1. Determine the location in which the speaker is to be mounted and whether there is a requirement for a customer-supplied bracket. 2. Fabricate a bracket if required. Use the Motorola Solutions-supplied speaker bracket as a template for drilling mounting holes. Also drill holes in the fabricated bracket for mounting to the motorcycle. 3. Mount the fabricated bracket to the motorcycle chassis. 4. Mount the Motorola Solutions-supplied bracket to the fabricated bracket using two machine screws, flat washers, lock washers, and nuts. 5. Mount the speaker to the speaker bracket using two wing screws. Directions for speaker cable routing appear later in this section. Speaker mounting is now complete. 5.6 Installing the Microphone Hang-Up Clip Install the hang-up clip either on the supplied microphone extension bracket or on the side of the speaker/control head bracket. Both methods are shown in Figure 5-4. Determine the mounting location and install as described in the following paragraphs. NOTE: Wherever the hang-up clip is mounted, it must be DC grounded for proper operation. After mounting the clip, be sure there is electrical continuity between the clip and the motorcycle chassis. 5.6.1 Extension Bracket Mounting Using this method, you can mount the clip so that it faces the operator. 1. Attach the bracket to the speaker/control-head bracket using two machine screws, four lock washers, and two nuts as shown in Figure 5-4. 2. Torque nuts to 20 in-lbs torque. 3. Fasten the hang-up clip to the extension bracket using two machine screws, lock washers, and nuts as shown in Figure 5-4. 4. Torque nuts to 20 in-lbs torque. 5.6.2 Speaker/Control Head Bracket Side Mounting Attach the hang-up clip to the left side of the speaker/control-head bracket using two machine screws, lock washers, and nuts as shown in Figure 5-4. Torque nuts to 20 in-lbs. torque. MN003109A01_aa Draft Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power Installing Antenna Base, Cables and Multiplexer 5-15 5.6.3 Other Hang-Up Clip Mounting To mount the microphone hang-up clip in another location, a customer-supplied bracket may be used. Suggested locations include the handlebars, fuel-tank console, or any location which provides easy access to the microphone without blocking controls and indicators and without interfering with motorcycle handling. See Figure 5-5, Figure 5-6, and Figure 5-7 for alternative microphone hang-up clip mounting methods. 1. Fabricate a bracket, then secure it to the motorcycle. 2. Use two machine screws, lock washers, and nuts to secure the hang-up clip to the customer-supplied bracket. Ensure that the microphone clip is DC grounded to the motorcycle chassis (a grounding lug and strap are provided in the hang-up clip kit for this purpose) this is essential for proper radio operation. 5.7 Installing Antenna Base, Cables and Multiplexer NOTE: Antenna hole placement and cable routing in 700/800, VHF and UHF antenna manuals are not applicable for the APX Series. The GPS antenna assembly must be done after the removal of the metal liner but before reinstalling the APX Series liner. LMR all-band Port Wi-Fi GPS Figure 5-8. Antenna Band Identification 1. Open the top cover of the weather-resistant enclosure. 2. Uninstall the metal liner that is shipped attached to the weather-resistant enclosure. This liner has one depressed area at the top of the enclosure liner just toward the rear of the enclosure. This metal liner is not used with APX Series products. 3. Place the metal liner with two round, depressed areas toward the enclosure hinge and 1 inch hole near the front of the housing, inside the top cover, and align the six slots in the metal liner with the screw holes in the top housing. 4. The metal liner of the enclosure top cover acts as a ground plane for the antenna. 5. Locate the two round, depressed areas about 3 inches in diameter in the metal liner near the enclosure hinge. Referring to Figure 5-9, these areas are either VHF or UHF depending on the antenna port locations. For the GPS antenna, use the 1 inch hole near the front of the housing near the lock. MN003109A01_aa Draft 5-16 Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power Installing Antenna Base, Cables and Multiplexer Top Cover for APX Radios GPS/Wi-Fi VHF Antenna 700/800 Antenna UHF Antenna Figure 5-9. Antenna Port Locations 6. These holes in the metal liner is used as a template to mark the position of the hole(s) to be drilled at the top cover. Follow the below guidelines for the various options. 7. Remove the metal liner from the top cover. 8. For LMR all-band antenna, use the Motorola Solutions RPX-4378A Hole-Cutting Saw or equivalent, and carefully drill a 3/4-inch hole at the marked location from the inside of the cover until the saw bottoms out. For the GPS/WiFi carefully drill a 1 1/16-inch hole at the marked location from the inside of the cover until the saw bottoms out. The saw should clean a neat circle to assure good contact between the antenna and the housing. IMPORTANT:

For proper seating of the antennas, deburr and scrape any foreign matter from both sides of the hole, being careful not to mar the finish of the shell. 9. Clean the mounting surface around the hole to remove dirt and wax. 10. Refer to the Motorcycle GPS Instruction Manual for further installation instruction for the GPS. GPS must be mounted before the APX metal liner is installed. 11. Reinstall the APX metal liner with the cable clamps provided in the weather-resistant housing. 12. Attach the 700/800, VHF or UHF antenna base per Antenna Installation Manual. IMPORTANT:

Antenna Placement and Cable Routing in the Antenna Installation Manual is not applicable for the APX series. MN003109A01_aa Draft Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power Installing Antenna Base, Cables and Multiplexer 5-17 13. Route the coaxial cable for the 700/800, VHF or UHF antenna(s) through the cable clamps per Figure 5-11 for VHF hole, Figure 5-12 for 700/800 hole and Figure 5-13 for UHF hole.

!

C a u t i o n Be sure to observe the correct routing of the antenna cable. Failure to do so can damage the cable. 14. After routing cable, allow enough of the cable to reach the radio antenna connector and cut off any excess length of the cable. 15. Install the connector per Antenna Installation Manual. Cable Clamps need to be included and routing to be through cable clamps Cable routes underneath radio mounting plate and connects to multiplexer mounted underneath radio on the radio mounting plate Figure 5-10. Routing the GPS/Wi-Fi Cable NOTE: Do not cut the antenna cable GPS/Wi-Fi cables connect to radio directly MN003109A01_aa Draft 5-18 Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power Installing Antenna Base, Cables and Multiplexer Cable Clamps need to be included and routing to be through cable clamps NOTE: Do not cut the antenna cable NOTE: Do not cut the antenna cable Figure 5-11. Routing the VHF Antenna Cable Figure 5-12. Routing the 700/800 Antenna Cable Cable routes underneath radio mounting plate and connects to multiplexer mounted underneath radio on the radio mounting plate Cable Clamps need to be included and routing to be through cable clamps Cable routes underneath radio mounting plate and connects to multiplexer mounted underneath radio on the radio mounting plate MN003109A01_aa Draft Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power Installing Antenna Base, Cables and Multiplexer 5-19 Cable Clamps need to be included and routing to be through cable clamps Cable routes underneath radio mounting plate and connects to multiplexer mounted underneath radio on the radio mounting plate NOTE: Do not cut the antenna cable Figure 5-13. Routing the UHF Antenna Cable Figure 5-14. Multiplexer and Trunnion Mounting MN003109A01_aa Draft 5-20 Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power Installing Antenna Base, Cables and Multiplexer NOTE: Do not cut the antenna cable Figure 5-15. Cable Routing Figure 5-16. Cable from Radio to Multiplexer NOTE: Radio has to be mounted with the TIB facing the front of the enclosure MN003109A01_aa Draft Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power Installing the Antenna 5-21 5.8 5.9 Installing the Antenna IMPORTANT:

Antenna Placement and Cable Routing as described inside the Antenna Installation Manual is not applicable for the APX radio series. Refer to information listed below. Connect the appropriate antenna connectors to the antenna receptacles on the radio. Tighten the coupling until fully engaged. Cable Routing Five cables must be installed to interconnect the components of the radio system as shown in Figure 5-17. The antenna cable is routed away from the other cables inside the enclosure hinged cover (see Section 5.7). The four remaining cables, routed along the motorcycle frame, are described in the following paragraphs. NOTE: Antenna Hole Placement and Cable Routing information in the Antenna Installation Manual is not applicable to the APX series. Removal of the fuel tank and seat from the motorcycle facilitates routing the cables along the frame. Motorcycles with consoles attached to fuel tanks require routing cables between console and fuel tank. In this case the tank is not removed. CONTROL HEAD CABLE SPEAKER/

CONTROL HEAD SPEAKER CABLE MICROPHONE CONTROL HEAD CABLE ACCESSORY CABLE POWER CABLE ANTENNA CABLE BATTERY FUSE BLOCK IGNITION CABLE SPEAKER CABLE CHASSIS GROUND FUSED POWER CABLE Figure 5-17. Cable Routing 1. Speaker Cable runs from the speaker to the accessory-cable connector inside the weather-resistant enclosure. MN003109A01_aa Draft 5-22 Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power Cable Routing 2. Control Cable runs from the rear of the control head to the front of the transceiver inside the enclosure. Ignition Sense (Red) Wire Portion of Accessory Cable runs from the ignition sense fuse terminal of the fuse box to the rear area inside the enclosure. The lug for attaching the ignition sense wire is contained on the accessory cable. 3. 4. Power Cable The red, unterminated end runs from the positive terminal of the battery to the power connector that plugs in the rear of the transceiver. Lugs for attaching the red and black leads are contained in the motorcycle power-cable kit. The black, unterminated end runs from a suitable motorcycle chassis ground to the power connector. DO NOT connect the black lead directly to the negative battery post. You may route the cables in any order. As you route each cable, temporarily fasten it at both ends. When all cables have been run, permanently fasten the cables with appropriate cable tie wraps. Observe the following during routing and hook-up:

1. Route the cables so that none interfere with motorcycle operation. 2. Fasten the cables with supplied nylon tie wraps. The wraps should be firmly installed at frequent intervals along the cable length in such a manner that motorcycle vibration do not cause metal fatigue and subsequent breakage of the cable wires. 3. Take care to position cables away from parts of the motorcycle that get hot. Bundle excess cable length inside the weather-resistant enclosure as discussed later in Section 5.11: Transceiver, Cabling and Multiplexer Installation . The fifth cable is the microphone with coiled cord. Plug the 9-pin D-connector end of the coiled cord into its mating connector, which was attached near the control head discussed in an earlier paragraph. Tighten the coiled-cord-retention screws. Insert the S-hook strain relief (terminated to the coiled cord) into the hole in the mounting bracket. Slide the microphone into the microphone hang-up bracket. MN003109A01_aa Draft Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power Installing the Weather-Resistant Enclosure 5-23 5.10 Installing the Weather-Resistant Enclosure 7 7 2 3 4 8 5 6 1 Item No. Description Item No. TO MOTORCYCLE CHASSIS GROUND Description 1 2 3 4 Universal Mounting Plate Machine Screw Lockwasher Flat Washer 5 6 7 8 Flat Rubber Washer Shouldered Rubber Washer 7-1/2-inch Ground Strap Ground Strap Figure 5-18. Weather-Resistant Enclosure Installation 1. Remove the radio-mounting plate by removing four screws, lock washers, and flat washers. 2. The weather-resistant enclosure is mounted to the universal mounting plate using shock mounts. Assemble the shock-mount components exactly as shown in Figure 5-18. Be sure to install ground straps between the shock-mount and the transceiver trunnion mount, and install one 7-1/2-inch ground strap between the right rear mount and the enclosure lid antenna ground plane 0 (shown in Figure 5-18 and in Figure 5-20). 3. The order of assembly is important to ensure proper shock mount operation. All components are supplied with the mounting kit. The five 7- 1/2-inch straps are used on the rear and front shock mounts four from shock mount to trunnion, and one from the shock mount to the lid antenna ground plane. NOTE: Grounding through the power-supply cable is NOT sufficient. Whether the radio transceiver is mounted to a carrier or the chassis itself, the transceiver MUST be properly grounded to the motorcycle chassis. The ground strap supplied with the installation kit may have to be used to ensure a good RF ground path from the radio transceiver to the motorcycle chassis. Install the 3-foot ground strap on one of the front shock mounts. Route it through the cable-

routing hole and connect the other end to the motorcycle frame (see Figure 5-18). 4. DO NOT connect the ground strap directly to the negative battery post.

!

!

W A R N I N G MN003109A01_aa Draft 5-24 Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power Transceiver, Cabling and Multiplexer Installation 5. The diagram of the shock mount is shown loosely assembled. After the hex screws are tightened, the rubber washers are compressed to fasten the weather- resistant enclosure securely to the universal mounting plate. 6. Figure 5-20 is an exploded view of the enclosure; it shows details that helps to understand how the enclosure is mounted. After the enclosure is completely mounted, check for proper ground connectioncontinuity between the antenna ground plane and the motorcycle frame. 5.11 Transceiver, Cabling and Multiplexer Installation After the weather-resistant enclosure has been installed, the radio chassis (transceiver) is installed in the enclosure and then appropriate cables are connected. However, before the transceiver can be installed, the cabling must be properly positioned in the enclosure. 5.11.1 Installing Cabling in the Enclosure Position the cabling in the weather-resistant enclosure as follows:

1. Run the speaker, power, control-head, and ignition sense cables into the enclosure. 2. Lay the excess cable length between the radio mounting bosses in an S configuration as shown in Figure 5-19. Do not coil any excess cable. Use the supplied tie wraps to bundle cable as shown. NOTE: If the extra cable length is not sufficient to match the illustrated cable routing, then match the illustration as closely as possible. 3. Connect the speaker cable to the accessory cable connector. NOTE: The accessory-cable emergency connector is shipped with a shorting plug installed. The headset connector is also shipped with a shorting plug installed. The plugs must remain in if an emergency switch and/or headset is not used. If an emergency switch and/or headset is used, remove the shorting plug(s) and discard. Install the mounting plate in position on top of the cables installed above. Take care not to damage or pinch the cables when securing the mounting plate in position. 4. NOTE: At this point, the control-head cable plug should be located at the forward end of the enclosure, and the power-cable, speaker-cable, and accessory-cable plugs should be located at the rear of the enclosure. MN003109A01_aa Draft Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power Transceiver, Cabling and Multiplexer Installation 5-25 ACCESSORY CABLE EMERGENCY AND EXTERNAL ALARM CONNETOR TRANSCEIVER POWER CABLE ACCESSORY CABLE CONTROL CABLE

(CAN) ACCESSORY CABLE HEADSET CONNECTOR HEADSET SPORTING PLUG EMERGENCY CABLE SHORTING PLUG IGNITION SENSE

(ACC) CONTROL HEAD GROUND (BLACK) CONTROL HEAD POWER (RED) CONTROL HEAD POWER FUSE Figure 5-19. Installing Cables 5.11.2 Installing the Transceiver Install the transceiver in the weather-resistant enclosure as follows (see Figure 5-20). NOTE: For new or existing installations, use only the APX mobile trunnion (kit number: HLN7002_). Install the mounting trunnion and loose ends of the four ground straps to the radio-mounting plate, using four screws, flat washers, and external-tooth lock washers (see Figure 5-20). The ground straps must be sandwiched between the flat washers and lock washers. The lock washer must be against the trunnion. The flat washer must be under the screw head. 1. 2. Attach the transceiver to the mounting trunnion and secure with the two screws provided. 3. Connect the control cable to the front of the transceiver. Ensure the control-cable connector screws are tightened. 4. Attach the accessory connector to the transceiver. Plug in the power connector. 5. Install the grommet around the cables and push the grommet into the cable-routing hole of the weather-resistant enclosure. MN003109A01_aa Draft 5-26 Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power Transceiver, Cabling and Multiplexer Installation 15 3 2 18 17 16 4 1 2 8 9 6 7 10 13 12 14 11 6 Figure 5-20. Installing the Transceiver MN003109A01_aa Draft Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power Installing the Emergency Switch Option 5-27 Item No. Description Item No. Description Table 5-1. Transceiver Installation Parts List 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Lock washer Flat washer (8 used) Screw Screw Grommet Screw Lock catch Radio mounting plate Bottom housing 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Ground shield plane Top cover Gasket Hinge Enclosure mounts Transceiver Screw Trunnion External tooth lock washer (8 used) 5.12 Installing the Emergency Switch Option Use the two-conductor, green/black cable which has as one end terminated with two contacts (part number 3080221P02) and which is supplied with this W688 Motorcycle Emergency Push Button. Disconnect the emergency switch shorting plug from the accessory cable. Replace the shorting wire of the shorting plug with the terminated end of the green/black emergency cable. Reconnect the plug to the accessory cable. 5.13 Installing the External Alarm Relay Option The motorcycle radio is offered with only one optional relay connection. If both horn and lights are required, wire a second relay coil parallel to the first relay. Use the two-conductor green/black cable which has one end terminated with two contacts (part number 3080221P02) and which is supplied with this W116 Motorcycle Alarm Relay Option. Insert the contacts into positions 3 and 4 of the emergency shorting plug of the accessory cable. Refer to Figure 5-26. 5.14 Installing the Headset Accessory A six-position connector on the accessory cable has been made available for connecting a headset accessory. Headset manufacturers should be consulted for compatibility with the motorcycle radio prior to purchase and installation of the headset. To install, disconnect the headset shorting plug. Remove the headset shorting wire from the headset shorting plug. Terminate the contacts provided to the applicable wires of the headset cable. Insert the terminated wires into the headset shorting plug per the contact positions illustrated in the typical headset schematic found in this manual. Reconnect the terminated headset shorting plug to the accessory cable. When upgrading from an APX mobile radio, the existing headset cable HLN6890 requires these two pins to be swapped (see Figure 5-21). The other motorcycle headset cable with this pin change already performed is called cable 3080010R04. MN003109A01_aa Draft 5-28 Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power 20 13 26 7 Remove from Pin 1

(VI P OU T 1 ) Insert into Pin 22

(Monitor) J2, BACK OF RADIO 21 14 8 1 Rework for Handlebar HUB operation when upgrading existing cable HLN6890. SPK +

GND AUX_PTT 1 3 5

(Female-Pins) 2 4 6 SPK -

VIP OUT 1 AUX_MIC Figure 5-21. Motorcycle Wiring Harness Rework MN003109A01_aa Draft Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power Installing the O5 Control Head Sunshield 5-29 5.15 Installing the O5 Control Head Sunshield Install the sunshield (part number NNTN7279_) to the O5 control head as follows. 1. Assemble the sunshield to the remote mount trunnion as shown in Figure 5-22. The same process can be used for the motorcycle trunnion. Figure 5-22. Remote Mount Trunnion with Sunshield 2. Position the sunshield as shown in Figure 5-23 and remove the Velcro adhesive backing. Velcro Adhesive Backing Figure 5-23. Position the Sunshield MN003109A01_aa Draft 5-30 Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power 3. Slide the control head onto the trunnion while aligning the edge of the control head with the edge of the sunshield as shown in Figure 5-24. Make sure the Velcro properly adheres to the control head. Figure 5-24. Slide the Control Head onto Trunnion 4. Position control head as desired and install screws as shown in Figure 5-25. Figure 5-25. Position Control Head as Desired MN003109A01_aa Draft Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power Horn/Lights Wiring 5-31 5.16 Horn/Lights Wiring 5.17 Emergency Switch Wiring Figure 5-26. Horn/Lights Wiring Diagram Figure 5-27. Emergency Switch Wiring Diagram

!

!

W A R N I N G Motorcycle products must have pins 1 and 2 connected together to allow the radio to power down. Opening this connection by REMOVING the emergency shorting plug, or pressing the emergency switch, turns the radio on. Failure to maintain a normally-closed path could drain the vehicle battery if left unchecked. EMERGENCY-equipped radios are capable of TRANSMITTING without warning. MN003109A01_aa Draft 5-32 Motorcycle Radio Installation - Mid Power Emergency Switch Wiring MN003109A01_aa Draft Chapter 6 Finishing the Installation Cable Connection 6.1 6.1.1 O2 Control Head Perform the following if it has not been previously done:

1. Remove the control head from its mounting trunnion. Plug the radio CAN cable into the proper location on the back of the control head (see Figure 2-29 and Figure 2-31 in Chapter 2). The connectors click when snapped into place. The control head model can have the microphone plugged into the lower left corner of the control head front panel. 2. Connect the plug from the speaker lead to the mating connector coming out of the power cable. 3. Plug the VIP connector into the correct location on the back of the control head. 4. Connect the CAN cable to the proper location on the transceiver. NOTE: Connector-protective covers are provided with the radio. They should be used for added environmental robustness. Be sure the control head and microphone PTT switches are OFF. Install the 15-amp fuse in the radio power cable fuseholder and the 3- or 4-amp fuse(s) in the ignition sense cable fuseholder(s). Turn the radio ON at the control head and verify proper operation of all controls and indicators. Radio operation in some installations require turning on the ignition sense. Perform a complete operational check of the radio. Dress the control and power cables out of the way to prevent damage (pull any excess cable into the trunk area) securing with clamps and tie wraps where necessary. 6.1.2 O3 Control Head Perform the following if it has not been previously done:

1. Unplug the CAN coiled cable connector on the Transceiver Interface. Plug in the connector again. A click sound should be heard. Ensure location of CAN connector is correct that is J800L or J800R on the transceiver interface. Connect the plug from the speaker lead to the mating connector of J2. 6.1.3 O5 Control Head Perform the following if it has not been previously done:

1. Remove the control head from its mounting trunnion. Plug the radio's CAN cable into the proper location on the back of the control head (see Figure 2-29 and Figure 2-31 in Chapter 2). The connectors click when snapped into place. The control head model can have the microphone plugged into the lower left corner of the control head front panel. 2. Connect the plug from the speaker lead to the mating connector coming out of the power cable. Draft 6-2 Finishing the Installation Cable Connection 3. Plug the VIP connector into the correct location on the back of the control head. 4. Connect the CAN cable to the proper location on the transceiver. 6.1.4 O7 Control Head Perform the following if it has not been previously done:

1. Remove the control head from its mounting trunnion. Plug the radio's CAN cable into the proper location on the back of the control head (see Figure 2-29 and Figure 2-31 in Chapter 2). The connectors click when snapped into place. The control head model can have the microphone plugged into the lower left corner of the control head front panel. 2. Connect the plug from the speaker lead to the mating connector coming out of the power cable. 3. Plug the VIP connector into the correct location on the back of the control head. 4. Connect the CAN cable to the proper location on the transceiver. 6.1.5 O9 Control Head Perform the following if it has not been previously done:

1. Remove the control head from its mounting trunnion. Plug the radio's CAN cable into the proper location on the back of the control head (see Figure 2-30 and Figure 2-31 in Chapter 2). The connectors click when snapped into place. The control head model can have the microphone plugged into the MMP connection on the control head back panel. 2. Connect the plug from the speaker lead to the mating connector coming out of the power cable. 3. Plug the VIP connector into the correct location on the back of the control head. 4. Connect the CAN cable to the proper location on the transceiver. MN003109A01_aa Draft Finishing the Installation Dust Cover Installation 6-3 6.2 Dust Cover Installation To help protect and ensure debris does not effect or damage your unused connectors, please use the provided dust covers. Refer to Figure 6-1 to determine which cover is for which connector. Table 6-1 Dust Cover Kit Number Kit Number Description KT000245A01 Dash Mount KT000246A01 Remote Mount A: 1515047C01 B: 1515048C01 C: 7575262A01 D:SL000319A01 E: 1515327H02 B C A A E Control Head Control Head (Rear) D D C B A D D C APX 8500 Rear (with no TIB) APX 8500 Rear (with TIB) Figure 6-1. Dust Cover Installation Locations NOTE: Parts B and E require inserting then turning approximately 1/3 turn using a coin as a tool until it contacts the stop. Part C shall be installed onto DB25 accessory cable assembly when the corresponding cable assembly connection is not in use. MN003109A01_aa Draft 6-4 Finishing the Installation Dust Cover Installation MN003109A01_aa Draft Chapter 7 Best Practices: Installation & Troubleshooting In this section are Motorola Solutions recommended vehicle installation practices that can address or prevent many issues, including:

Radio circuit damage due to over voltage condition Radio/Accessories "lock up"

Radio/Accessories change state/lock-up when radio PTT is depressed Radio powers up in the FL 01/90 state (general communication error code) Radio intermittently resets Radio loses secure key Transmit audio distortion on motorcycle radio when engine is running for mid power radios Keypad buttons become inoperative for motorcycle radios when engine is running for mid power radios Alternator whine present when transmitting with engine running Radio/Accessories turn themselves on/off 7.1 Check Wiring of Ignition and Radio Ignition Sensing If it is required to turn the radio on and off through the ignition sense switch, in addition to the control head on/off switch, connect the ignition sense lead to the accessory terminal from the ignition switch (usually in the vehicle fuse panel under accessory or radio). NOTE: Motorola Solutions recommends protecting or isolating the radio ignition sense input from voltage spikes in excess of +/- 40 VDC. Such spikes can be hundreds of volts in amplitude and are common in larger vehicles (utility trucks, buses and others), especially when the source is common to a solenoid coil. A triggerable oscilloscope is required to determine the existence of such spikes as most voltmeters cannot measure in short duration (< 1 msec). If the condition of the intended ignition sense source is unknown, Motorola Solutions recommends isolating the source from the radio with a relay or the use of a suppression diode wired between the source and ground. Any high current suppression diode that is MR2535 with a breakdown voltage of between 18 and 40 V suffices. A suitable diode kit is available from Motorola Solutions parts, kit number HLN6325_. If it is required to have the radio power up only through the control head on/off switch, then connect the ignition sense lead directly to the positive terminal of the battery. This means the ignition sense is always ignored and a re-wiring is necessary in the future if the operator chooses any ignition sense CPS setting. Draft 7-2 7.2 Best Practices: Installation & Troubleshooting Check Physical Installation of Radio Ground and Radio Accessory Wiring Check Physical Installation of Radio Ground and Radio Accessory Wiring Take care to scrape away paint on the chassis at the place where the ground connection is to be made, and try to keep the ground lead as short as possible. NOTE: Some vehicles have dedicated ground points. If available, use the ground points for the radio ground connection. Verify that the A+ lead (red) is connected directly to the positive terminal of the battery and the ground lead (black) is connected to the vehicle chassis using as short of a length of wire as is practical. For vehicles that have other types of electronic equipment installed (lights, flashers, computers siren/PA and others), use a separate ground for the mobile radio equipment. Make sure that the mobile radio antenna is the minimum required distance (three feet) from the mobile radio equipment to prevent radio frequency interference (RFI) from interfering with the radio and/or accessories. NOTE: If multiple radios/antennas are installed, ensure that the minimum antenna separation requirements are met. Do not coil up any excess length of the A+ (red) lead. Doing this may cause a large transient voltage to be produced when there is a high current drain (e.g. during transmit). This could cause the radio to reset when the push-to-talk (PTT) is depressed. For mid power radios, make sure that the antenna ground connection is solid for motorcycle mounted radios. An intermittent ground connection can cause the transmission to be distorted when the motorcycle engine is running. Do not coil up any excessive length of antenna cable, if possible. It may affect the radio receive performance. If an extra length of cable is used to extend the microphone, make sure the added capacitance does not interfere with the operation of the radio. 7.3 Improve the Electrical Quality of the Power and Ignition Lines Use a relay to isolate the vehicle ignition switch point (ACC) from the radio ignition sense point. Control this relay from the vehicle ignition switch point (ACC). Supply a cleaner voltage from the positive terminal of the battery into the relay, which is attached to the radio ignition sense point. Now the ACC line toggles the relay, instead of directly toggling the radios ignition sense line. Install a Power Line Filter between the A+ lead and the positive terminal of the battery. This is intended to filter the battery power applied to the transmitter power amplifiers. Pay extra caution to this because the series filter introduces a negative spike when the radio transmits that may cause problems with radio operation. For vehicles that use electromechanical relays to control external devices (lights, motors, switch boxes and others), these relay circuits should be isolated as best as possible from the mobile radio equipment. Also, diode suppression should be used across the relay contacts to minimize the noise produced by the collapsing magnetic field. If the ignition sense switch is to be used, make sure that there is not a large voltage drop between the A+ point (usually the positive terminal of the battery) and the ignition sense point. In general, the voltage difference between these two points, should not be greater than 1.5 volts when all accessories/air-conditioner, others are turned on. Refer to the Basic Service Manual for specifications for minimum and maximum voltage levels. Typical battery voltage levels are 13.6V +/- 20%. MN003109A01_aa Draft Best Practices: Installation & Troubleshooting Minimize the Effect of Poorly Grounded Antennas 7-3 7.4 Minimize the Effect of Poorly Grounded Antennas For vehicles with high power radios that use glass mount antennas, care must be taken to keep the radio and antenna cable as far as possible from the radiating element of the antenna. If a sufficient distance is not maintained, the glass mount antenna lack of a proper ground plane may cause the radio transmit signal to interfere with itself and cause a reset. To minimize this effect, it may be necessary to install ferrite beads on the antenna cable to protect the radio from this interference. 7.5 Jump-Start the Vehicle

!

C a u t i o n Do not jump-start vehicle with radio power or ignition sense cables connected. Damage to the radio and/or accessories may result. Jump-starting a vehicle can crank 300+ volts through the vehicle charging system and these transients can damage electrical equipment. The state of your radio prior to needing a jump-start may be unknown, and the radio may attempt to return to its last state (radio ON), when doing a jump-start. Therefore, Motorola Solutions recommends the following steps be taken before jump-starting any vehicle containing a radio. 1. Locate the ignition sense line (thin yellow wire or thin red wire, depending on dash mount or remote mount installation) and the main power leads (thick red wire) near the battery positive terminal. NOTE: These lines are fused. In the event these lines are not fused (add the appropriate fuse in line) use whatever tools necessary to physically disconnect the ignition sense and power lines from the battery terminal. Make sure that the disconnected lines are not in the way of moving parts or interfering with the operation in any way. 2. Open up the fuse holders and remove the fuses out of the kits. 3. Re-tighten the fuse holders but without the fuses to insure that ignition sense and power lines do not interfere with moving parts. 4. Proceed with the jump-start routine as described by your vehicle owner manual. 5. Once the jump-start process is complete, re-install the fuses into their holders. 7.6 Eliminate Noise/Howling from PA Speaker 1. Refer to Section 2.1.1 for recommended methods of installation available for the mobile two-way radio, with accessories placed on or inside the vehicle. 2. Refer to Section 2.1.2 for the wiring diagrams for the recommended configurations. 3. Refer to the Siren/PA User Manual for further details on lowering the wattage. MN003109A01_aa 7-4 Draft Notes Best Practices: Installation & Troubleshooting MN003109A01_aa Draft Appendix A Replacement Parts Ordering A.1 Basic Ordering Information When ordering replacement parts or equipment information, the complete identification number should be included. This applies to all components, kits, and chassis. If the component part number is not known, the order should include the number of the chassis or kit of which it is a part, and sufficient description of the desired component to identify it. The ASTRO APX Mobile Radio Basic Service Manual includes complete parts lists and part numbers. Refer to Table of Content for applicable manual numbers. A.2 Motorola Online Service and Support For general support, users can access http://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/support.html http://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/contact-us.html http://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/products/two-way-radios/project-25-radios/mobile-

radios/apx8500.html Motorola Online Website: https://businessonline.motorolasolutions.com/

To register for online access:

Domestic customers: please call 800-814-0601 (U.S. and Canada). International customers: please go to https://businessonline.motorolasolutions.com/ and click on Sign Up Now. Draft A-2 Replacement Parts Ordering Accessories Aftermarket Division (AAD) ECAT As a registered user, you have access to the electronic catalogue for purchasing accessories and radios. A.3 Accessories Aftermarket Division (AAD) The Accessories Aftermarket Division is able to provide Motorola Solutions Branded accessories for all your radio needs. Contact Motorola Solutions after you have a KIT number, identified from the Motorola Online website and/or the ECAT catalog. You can contact them at: 800-422-4210. MN003109A01_aa Draft Index Index A accessories connector assembly ....................................... 4-1, 4-9 assembly ......................................................... 4-10 disassembly ....................................................... 4-9 exploded view .................................................. 4-10 connector pins ....................................................... 4-8 headset ........................................................ 5-2, 5-27 installing dash mount ........................................................ 4-1 horn relay ........................................................... 4-3 light relay ........................................................... 4-3 remote mount .................................................... 4-9 antenna ..................................................................... 5-5 cable, see Cables, antenna installing .....................................................2-32, 5-21 motorcycle ............................................................. 5-2 mounting ............................................................. 2-32 site ....................................................................... 2-32 B base stations ........................................................... 1-11 black lead ..............................................2-30, 5-22, 5-27 D dash mount accessories installations ....................................... 4-1 configuration ......................................................... 1-6 installation examples ............................................. 2-2 radio dimensions ..............................1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 1-4 trunnion ............................................................... 2-19 E emergency footswitch ............................................... 4-1 emergency pushbutton ............................................. 4-1 emergency switch installing .............................................................. 5-27 wiring ................................................................... 5-31 external alarm installing .............................................................. 5-27 see also Horn relay or Light relay F footswitch, emergency .............................................. 4-1 H horn relay .........................................4-2, 4-3, 5-27, 5-31 C cables ................................................5-3, 5-4, 5-5, 5-24 accessory .....................................4-1, 4-2, 5-22, 5-27 antenna ............................................................... 2-18 battery ................................................................... 4-9 connection ...................................................... 6-1, 7-1 diagrams ...........................................2-22, 5-21, 5-25 emergency .......................................................... 5-27 excess ................................................................. 5-24 ignition ................................................................... 4-9 microphone ..................................................5-2, 5-12 motorcycle control head ...............5-1, 5-9, 5-11, 5-22 motorcycle control head, installing ...................... 5-21 motorcycle transceiver ........................................ 5-24 power .........................................................2-30, 5-22 remote mount ...................................................... 2-21 routing ................................................................. 5-22 speaker ...............................................5-2, 5-14, 5-21 configurations dash mount ........................................................... 1-6 motorcycle ........................................................... 1-11 multi control ......................................................... 1-11 remote mount ........................................................ 1-8 control head ..............................................2-26, 4-6, 4-8 cabling ................................................................. 2-21 diagrams ....................................................2-22, 2-23 multi ..................................................................... 1-11 remote mount ........................................................ 1-8 control stations ........................................................ 1-11 I ignition installation cable ..................................................................... 4-9 wire ..................................................................... 5-22 wire, for motorcycle ............................................... 5-2 examples ............................................................... 2-2 important hints ...................................................... 5-4 order of .................................................................. 5-5 J J2 ....................................................................... 4-7, 4-8 L leads black .................................................. 2-30, 5-22, 5-27 light relay .........................................4-2, 4-3, 5-27, 5-31 locking kit, installing ................................................ 2-29 M microphone ........................................................ 5-2, 5-4 hang-up clip, installing ........................................ 5-14 hang-up clip, standard ................. 2-38, 5-5, 5-9, 5-11 mounting ............................................................... 5-4 motorcycle antenna ................................................................. 5-2 configuration ........................................................1-11 control head cable ................................................. 5-1 Draft Index-2 display unit ............................................................ 5-1 external speaker .................................................... 5-2 headset ................................................................. 5-2 ignition wire ........................................................... 5-2 installation ............................................................. 5-3 antenna ............................................................ 5-21 cables .............................................................. 5-21 cabling ............................................................. 5-24 control head ....................................................... 5-7 emergency switch ...................................5-27, 5-31 external alarm .................................................. 5-27 fuel tank console ..............................5-9, 5-10, 5-12 handlebar .................................................. 5-8, 5-11 headset ............................................................ 5-27 horn/lights wiring .............................................. 5-31 microphone hang-up clip ................................. 5-14 speaker ..................................................... 5-7, 5-14 transceiver ..............................................5-24, 5-26 universal mounting plate .................................... 5-6 weather-resistant enclosure ............................. 5-23 microphone ........................................................... 5-2 transceiver ............................................................. 5-1 mounting configurations .......................................... 2-18 dash ............................................................. 1-6, 2-19 motorcycle ........................................................... 1-11 multi control ......................................................... 1-11 remote .......................................................... 1-8, 2-21 mounting plate, universal ............................5-1, 5-3, 5-5 installing ................................................................ 5-6 mounting, antenna restrictions ........................................................... 2-32 roof top ................................................................ 2-32 trunk lid ................................................................ 2-32 multi control configuration ........................................................ 1-11 S speaker ..................................................................... 5-5 cable, see Cables, speaker external ................................................................. 5-2 fuel tank console installation ............... 5-9, 5-10, 5-12 handlebar installation .......................... 5-8, 5-11, 5-12 installing ................................................ 5-7, 5-9, 5-14 mounting ............................................................. 2-35 T trunnion ................................................................... 2-22 bracket for speaker ............................................. 2-35 dash mount ......................................................... 2-19 diagrams ............................................................. 2-22 locking kit ............................................................ 2-29 motorcycle installation ......................................... 5-25 mounting bracket ................................................ 2-19 remote mount ............................................... 1-8, 2-21 transmission hump mounting .............................. 2-20 U universal mounting plate ............................. 5-1, 5-3, 5-5 installing ................................................................ 5-6 V VIP connector ....................................................... 4-2, 6-2 input connections .................................................. 4-8 output connections ................................................ 4-7 O ordering replacement parts .......................................A-1 W wiring diagrams ........................................................ 2-3 P parts, ordering replacement ......................................A-1 pin SW B+ .....................................................4-3, 4-7, 4-8 VIP in ..................................................................... 4-8 VIP out ............................................................ 4-3, 4-7 pushbutton, emergency ............................................ 4-1 R relays horn ..............................................4-2, 4-3, 5-27, 5-31 light ...............................................4-2, 4-3, 5-27, 5-31 remote mount accessory installations .......................................... 4-9 cabling ................................................................. 2-21 configuration .......................................................... 1-8 control cable installation ...................................... 2-26 installation examples ............................................. 2-2 trunnion ............................................................... 2-21 replacement parts, ordering ......................................A-1 MN003109A01 Draft Glossary Glossary This glossary contains an alphabetical listing of terms and their definitions that are applicable to the ASTRO radio. Term band CPS Customer Programming Software default D.E.K digital FCC firmware frequency GLONASS GNSS Definition Frequencies allowed for a specific purpose. See Customer Programming Software. Software with a graphical user interface containing the feature set of an ASTRO radio. A pre-defined set of parameters. Direct Entry Keyboard. Refers to data that is stored or transmitted as a sequence of discrete symbols from a finite set; most commonly this means binary data represented using electronic or electromagnetic signals. Federal Communications Commission. Code executed by an embedded processor such as the Host or DSP in a subscriber radio. This type of code is typically resident in non-volatile memory and as such is more difficult to change than code executed from RAM. Number of times a complete electromagnetic-wave cycle occurs in a fixed unit of time (usually one second). GLObalnaya NAvigatsionnaya Sputnikovaya Sistema: The Russian Global Navigation satellite system, consisting of at least 24 operational satellites which fly in medium Earth orbit at an altitude of approximately 19,130 km. Each satellite circles the Earth slightly faster than twice a day. GLONASS provides Time and Location to anywhere on Earth, where there is an unobstructed line of sight to four or more GPS satellites. A GLONASS receiver triangulates its position using these satellites. Global Navigation Satellite System: Standard generic term for satellite navigation systems that provide geo-spatial positioning with global coverage. This term includes GPS, GLONASS, Galileo, Beidou and other regional systems. GNSS is a term used worldwide The advantage to having access to multiple satellites is accuracy, redundancy and availability at all times. Draft Glossary-2 Term GPS kHz kilohertz MCU MHz Megahertz microcontroller unit PA paging PTT Publication Manual Revision Push-to-Talk radio frequency receiver registers RESET RF RX Definition Global Positioning System: U.S.A. Satellite based radio navigation system developed by the U.S. Department of Defense and operated by the U.S. Air Force, which consists of at least 24 operational satellites which fly in medium Earth orbit at an altitude of approximately 20,180 km. Each satellite circles the Earth twice a day. GPS provides Time and Location to anywhere on Earth, where there is an unobstructed line of sight to four or more GPS satellites. A GPS receiver triangulates its position using these satellites. See kilohertz. One thousand cycles per second. Used especially as a radio-frequency unit. See microcontroller unit. See Megahertz. One million cycles per second. Used especially as a radio-frequency unit. Also written as C. A microprocessor that contains RAM and ROM components, as well as communications and programming components and peripherals. Power amplifier. One-way communication that alerts the receiver to retrieve a message. See Push-to-Talk. A publication that provides supplemental information for its parent publication before it is revised and reissued. The switch or button that causes the radio to transmit when pressed. When the PTT switch or button is released, the unit returns to standby or receive operation. The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum between audio sound and infrared light (approximately 10 kHz to 10 GHz). Electronic device that amplifies RF signals. A receiver separates the audio signal from the RF carrier, amplifies it, and converts it back to the original sound waves. Short-term data-storage circuits within the microcontroller unit or programmable logic IC. Reset line: an input to the microcontroller that restarts execution. See radio frequency. Receive. MN003109A01_aa Draft Glossary-3 Term signal software time-out timer TOT transceiver transmitter Triangulation TX UHF Universal Serial Bus USB VHF Waypoint Wi-Fi XCVR Definition An electrically transmitted electromagnetic wave. Computer programs, procedures, rules, documentation, and data pertaining to the operation of a system. A timer that limits the length of a transmission. See time-out timer. Transmitter-receiver. A device that both transmits and receives analog or digital signals. Also abbreviated as XCVR. Electronic equipment that generates and amplifies an RF carrier signal, modulates the signal, and then radiates it into space. A method of determining the relative positions of points in space by measuring the distances, and sometimes angles, between those points and other reference points whose positions are known. Triangulation involves the use of trigonometry. It is commonly used in the navigation of vehicles, aircraft and boats, and is the method used in the Global Positioning System, in which the reference points are satellites. Transmit. Ultra-High Frequency. An external bus standard that supports data transfer rates of 12 Mbps. See Universal Serial Bus. Very-High Frequency. Geographic Coordinates of a specific location. It can also be an Intermediate point on a route or line of travel. Wireless Data Transmission protocol 802.11. See transceiver. MN003109A01_aa Glossary-4 Draft Notes MN003109A01_aa Draft Draft

Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 East Algonquin Road Schaumburg, Illinois 60196 U.S.A. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2016 and 2018 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. May 2018

*MN003109A01*

MN003109A01_AB

 

 

Draft Draft Contents Computer Software Copyrights....14 Declaration of Conformity......................... 8 Documentation Copyrights...........15 Important Safety Information........10 Disclaimer.......................................16 Notice to Users (FCC and Industry Canada)........................11 Software Version........................................... 11 Consignes de scurit importantes.................................12 Avis aux utilisateurs (FCC et Industrie Canada).......................13 Version logicielle............................................13 Getting Started...............................17 How to Use This Guide..................................17 Notations Used in This Manual......................17 Additional Performance Enhancement.......... 17 ASTRO 25 Enhanced Data.................18 Dynamic System Resilience (DSR).... 18 CrossTalk Prevention..........................18 Encrypted Integrated Data (EID).........18 SecureNet...........................................18 P25 Digital Vehicular Repeater System (DVRS)............................. 18 Conventional Talkgroup and Radio Scan Enhancements......................18 What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You.............................................19 English C o n t e n t s 1 Draft Preparing Your Radio for Use.......20 Turning On the Radio.................................... 20 Adjusting the Volume.....................................21 Validating Compatibility During Power Up.....21 Identifying Radio Controls............ 22 Radio Parts and Controls.............................. 22 Control Head and Microphone............22 Programmable Features................................23 Assignable Radio Functions............... 23 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions....................................... 26 Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions.....26 Menu Select Buttons...........................27 Advance Programmable Buttons........ 27 Home Button.......................................28 4-Way Navigation Button.................... 28 Data Feature Button........................... 28 Volume Knob...................................... 29 Using the Mode Knob......................... 29 Keypad.......................................................... 29 Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode..............................................29 Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode..............................................30 Keypad Characters Numeric Mode..............................................32 Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode..............................................33 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button............................34 Identifying Status Indicators.........35 Status Icons...................................................35 Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators.....38 TMS Status Icons................................38 TMS Menu Options.............................39 LED Indicator.................................................40 Intelligent Lighting Indicators ........................ 41 Alert Tones.................................................... 43 General Radio Operation...............46 Selecting a Zone............................................46 Selecting a Radio Channel............................ 46 Selecting a Channel via Channel Search Button....................................................... 47 Mode Select Feature..................................... 47 s t n e t n o C 2 English Draft Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Softkey...........................................48 Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Button............................................ 48 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call... 49 Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call................................49 Receiving and Responding to a Private Call (Trunking Only)...........50 Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call (Trunking Only).....50 Methods to Make a Radio Call.......................51 Making a Talkgroup Call..................... 51 Making a Private Call (Trunking Only).............................................. 52 Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only).............................................. 53 Switching Between Repeater or Direct Operation Button...................................... 54 Monitor Feature............................................. 54 Monitoring a Channel..........................54 Monitoring Conventional Mode........... 55 Advanced Features........................56 Advanced Call Features................................ 56 Calling a Phone Not in the List............56 Selective Call (ASTRO Conventional Only)........................ 56 Talkgroup Call Feature

(Conventional Operation Only)...... 57 Sending a Status Call......................... 58 Responding to the Dynamic C o n t e n t s Regrouping Feature (Trunking Only).............................................. 59 Dynamic Zone Programming (DZP)....60 Multiple Control Head Features.....................62 Setting the ID of the Initial Control Head.............................................. 62 All Active Mode................................... 63 Activating and Deactivating Intercom in All Active Mode........... 63 One Active Mode................................ 64 Contacts........................................................ 65 Making a Private Call from Contacts...66 Adding a New Contact Entry...............67 Deleting a Contact Entry.....................67 Adding a Contact to a Call List............68 Methods of Contact Editing in a Call List.......................................... 68 Scan Lists...................................................... 70 Viewing a Scan List.............................70 Editing the Scan List........................... 70 3 English Draft Changing the Scan List Status............71 Viewing and Changing the Priority Status.............................................72 Scan.............................................................. 72 Turning Scan On or Off.......................72 Turning Scan On While Disregarding the Squelch Code

(Conventional Channels Only).......73 Transmitting While the Scan is On......73 Deleting a Nuisance Channel............. 73 Restoring a Nuisance Channel........... 74 Changing Priorities Status While Scan is On..................................... 74 Restoring Priorities in a Scan List.......74 Using the Hang Up Box (HUB)........... 75 Call Alert Paging............................................75 Receiving a Call Alert Page................ 75 Sending a Call Alert Page...................76 Enabling and Disabling In-Call User Alert.......................................77 Quick Call II (ASTRO P25 Digital Trunking and Conventional)..................... 78 Initiating a Quick Call II Transmission................................. 78 Emergency Operation....................................78 Sending an Emergency Alarm............ 79 Sending an Emergency Call

(Trunking Only).............................. 79 Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call............................. 80 Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm.... 80 Special Considerations for Emergencies..................................81 Automatic Registration Service (ARS)...........81 Selecting or Changing the ARS Mode..............................................82 User Login Feature............................. 83 Text Messaging Service (TMS)..................... 85 Accessing the Messaging Features....85 Composing and Sending a New Text Message................................ 86 Sending a Quick Text Message..........87 Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message................. 88 Secure Operations.........................................95 Enabling Secure Transmission........... 95 Accessing the Secure Feature............96 Managing Encryption.......................... 96 Global Positioning System / Global Navigation Satellite System....................101 GPS Operation................................. 101 GPS Performance Enhancement......102 s t n e t n o C 4 English Draft The Outdoor Location Feature

(Using GPS).................................102 Accessing the Outdoor Location Feature........................................ 103 Turning Off GPS............................... 103 Saving a Waypoint............................104 Viewing a Saved Waypoint............... 105 Editing the Alias of a Waypoint......... 105 Editing the Coordinates of a Waypoint......................................106 Deleting a Single Saved Waypoint....107 Deleting All Saved Waypoints...........108 Measuring the Distance and Bearing from a Saved Waypoint.. 108 Location Feature in Emergency Mode............................................109 Peer-Location on the Display

(ASTRO Conventional only)........ 109 Geofence (ASTRO 25 Trunking System).... 110 Entering the Geofence Area............. 111 Mission Critical Geofence................. 112 Entering Mission Critical Geofence...112 Exiting Mission Critical Geofence..... 112 Trunking System Controls........................... 113 Operating in Failsoft System.............113 Out-of-Range Radio..........................113 SmartZone........................................ 113 Site Trunking Feature....................... 114 Locking and Unlocking a Site............114 Site Display and Search Button........ 114 Trunked Announcement....................115 Ignition Switch Options................................ 116 Blank.................................................116 Tx Inhibit........................................... 116 PTT Tx Inhibit....................................116 Required........................................... 116 Soft Power Off.................................. 117 Ignition Only Power Up..................... 117 Using Emergency Power Up.............117 Auto Power Off Timer....................... 118 Voice Announcement.................................. 118 Site Selectable Alerts (ASTRO 25)..............119 Sending SSA Notification to Single Site...............................................120 Sending SSA Notification to Single Site Via Manual Entry.................. 121 Sending SSA Notification to All Sites.............................................121 Sending SSA Notification to All Available Sites............................. 122 Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site....................................123 Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site Via Manual Entry....... 123 C o n t e n t s 5 English Draft Stopping SSA Notification of All Sites.............................................124 Stopping SSA Notification of All Available Sites............................. 125 Channel Change on Off Hook on All Channels................................................ 125 Low Voltage Threshold Warning..................126 Wi-Fi............................................................ 127 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off.....................127 Checking the Wi-Fi Configuration and Status of the Radio............... 128 Utilities......................................................... 129 Viewing Recent Calls........................129 Selecting the Power Level................ 129 Selecting a Radio Profile...................130 Controlling the Display Backlight...... 131 Turning the Keypad Tones On or Off................................................ 131 Turning Voice Mute On or Off...........132 Using the Time-Out Timer.................132 Using Conventional Squelch Operation Features......................132 Using the PL Defeat Feature............ 133 Digital PTT ID Support......................134 Smart PTT Feature (Conventional Only)............................................ 134 Transmit Inhibit................................. 135 General Radio Information................136 External Alarms (Horn and Lights)....139 Helpful Tips.................................. 142 Radio Care.................................................. 142 Cleaning the External Surface of the Radio..................................... 142 Cleaning the External Plastic Surface........................................ 142 Accessories..................................144 Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range..................... 145 Special Channel Assignments.....................145 Emergency Channel......................... 145 Non-Commercial Call Channel......... 145 Operating Frequency Requirements............145 Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies............148 Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources............................148 s t n e t n o C 6 English Draft Glossary........................................149 Limited Warranty..........................155 MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS........................................... 155 I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:......................... 155 II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:....................... 156 III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:............................157 IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:.157 V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:..................................................157 VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:........................................ 158 VII. GOVERNING LAW:.............................. 159 VIII. For Australia Only................................ 159 SERVICE.....................................................160 C o n t e n t s 7 English Draft Declaration of Conformity This declaration is applicable to your radio only if your radio is labeled with the FCC logo shown below. Declaration of Conformity Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a) Responsible Party Name: Motorola Solutions, Inc. Address: 1303 East Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A. Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744 Hereby declares that the product:

Model Name: APX Mobile conforms to the following regulations:

FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d) and section 15.109(a) y t i f m r o n o C f o n o i t a r a c e D l 8 English Draft Class B Digital Device As a personal computer peripheral, this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1 This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2 This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules and Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or TV technician for help. D e c a r a l t i o n o f C o n f o r m i t y 9 English Draft Important Safety Information RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-Way Radios ATTENTION!

This radio is restricted to Occupational use only. Before using the radio, read the RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-Way Radios which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for Compliance with applicable standards and Regulations. For a list of Motorola Solutions-approved antennas and other accessories, visit the following website:

http://www.motorolasolutions.com/APX Any modification to this device, not expressly authorized by Motorola Solutions, may void the users authority to operate this device. Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. This radio transmitter has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with Motorola Solutions-approved antenna with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. Note:

Setting up the radio as an RF Modem takes complete control of the radio. In this mode, the radio no longer responds to button and PTT presses nor will it unmute to voice activity. This mode is designed to receive and pass specifically formatted over the air data to a tethered computer with RF modem enabled applications. This mode can only be exit by reprogramming the radio with Customer Programming Software (CPS) to not operate in RF modem mode and cycling power. n o i t a m r o n f I y t e f a S t n a t r o p m I 10 English Draft Notice to Users (FCC and Industry Canada) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Industry Canada's license-exempt RSS's per the following conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications made to this device, not expressly approved by Motorola, could void the authority of the user to operate this equipment. Software Version All the features described in the following sections are supported by the software version R15.00.00 or later. See Accessing the Radio Information on page 137 to determine the software version of your radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details of all the features supported. N o t i c e t o U s e r s

(

F C C a n d I n d u s t r y C a n a d a

) 11 English Draft les autres utilisateurs, le type et le gain de l'antenne doivent tre choisis de faon ce que la puissance isotrope rayonne quivalente (P.I.R.E.) ne soit pas plus forte qu'il ne le faut pour tablir la communication. Cet metteur radio a t approuv par Industrie Canada pour utilisation avec une antenne approuve par Motorola offrant le gain maximal autoris et l'impdance requise pour le type d'antenne indiqu. Il est strictement interdit d'utiliser avec cet appareil tout type d'antenne ne figurant pas dans cette liste et prsentant un gain suprieur au maximum indiqu pour le type. Consignes de scurit importantes Radios bidirectionnelles mobiles : exposition aux radiofrquences et scurit du produit ATTENTION!

Cette radio ne doit tre utilise qu' des fins professionnelles. Avant d'utiliser la radio, lisez le guide Radios bidirectionnelles mobiles : exposition aux radiofrquences et scurit du produit, qui contient d'importantes instructions de fonctionnement pour une utilisation scuritaire et des informations sur l'exposition aux frquences radiolectriques, dans le but dassurer votre conformit aux normes et rglements en vigueur. Visitez le site Web suivant pour obtenir la liste des antennes et des autres accessoires approuvs par Motorola :

http://www.motorolasolutions.com/APX Selon la rglementation d'Industrie Canada, cet metteur radio ne peut tre utilis qu'avec une antenne dont le type et le gain maximal (ou minimal) sont approuvs par Industrie Canada pour cet metteur. Afin de limiter les interfrences radio pour s e t n a t r o p m i t i r u c s e d s e n g s n o C i 12 Franais

(Canada) Draft Avis aux utilisateurs (FCC et Industrie Canada) Cet appareil est conforme la partie 15 des rgles de la FCC et d'Industrie Canada permis exempts RSS de par la conditions suivantes:

Ce dispositif ne doit pas causer d'interfrences nuisibles. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris les interfrences qui peuvent perturber le fonctionnement. Les changements ou les modifications apportes ce dispositif, non expressment approuves par Motorola, peuvent annuler le droit de l'utilisateur utiliser cet quipement. Version logicielle Toutes les fonctions dcrites dans les sections suivantes sont prises en charge par la version R15.00.00 ou les versions ultrieures du logiciel de la radio. Pour obtenir davantage de renseignements propos des fonctions prises en charge, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. A v s i a u x u t i l i s a t e u r s

(

F C C e t I n d u s t r i e C a n a d a

) 13 Franais

(Canada) Draft Computer Software Copyrights The Motorola products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs including, but not limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this manual may not be copied, reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or distributed in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the normal non-

exclusive license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. s t h g i r y p o C e r a w t f o S r e t u p m o C 14 English Draft Documentation Copyrights No duplication or distribution of this document or any portion thereof shall take place without the express written permission of Motorola. No part of this manual may be reproduced, distributed, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose without the express written permission of Motorola. D o c u m e n t a t i o n C o p y r i g h t s 15 English Draft Disclaimer The information in this document is carefully examined, and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies. Furthermore, Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products herein to improve readability, function, or design. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the applications or use of any product or circuit described herein; nor does it cover any license under its patent rights, nor the rights of others. i r e m a c s D i l 16 English Draft Getting Started How to Use This Guide This User Guide covers the basic operation of the APX Mobiles. However, your dealer or system administrator may have customized your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Notations Used in This Manual Throughout the text in this publication, you will notice the use of Warning, Caution, and Note. These notations are used to emphasize that safety hazards exist, and the care that must be taken or observed. Warning:

An operational procedure, practice, or condition and so on, which may result in injury or death if not carefully observed. Caution:

An operational procedure, practice, or condition and so on, which may result in G e t t i n g S a r t t e d damage to the equipment if not carefully observed. Note:

An operational procedure, practice, or condition and so on, which is essential to emphasize. The following special notations identify certain items. Example Description Home button or PHONE Buttons and keys are shown in bold print or as an icon. Menu entries are shown similar to the way they appear on the display of the radio. This means Press the right side of the 4-Way Navigation Button. Additional Performance Enhancement The following performance enhancements are some of the latest creations designed to enhance the security, quality and efficiency of the radios. 17 English Draft ASTRO 25 Enhanced Data Encrypted Integrated Data (EID) ASTRO 25 Enhanced Data is optimized to handle different message sizes and variable update rates from different applications of the radio. Add Enhanced Data to the Integrated Data system with a software installation to improve data channel efficiency and enable denser network traffic. Dynamic System Resilience (DSR) DSR ensures the radio system is seamlessly switched to a backup master site dynamically in case of system failure. DSR also provides additional indication e.g. failure detection, fault recovery, and redundancy within the system to address to the user in need. Mechanisms related to the Integrated Voice and Data (IV&D) or data centric are all supported by DSR. CrossTalk Prevention This feature prevents crosstalk scenarios from happening, especially when a wideband antenna is used. This feature allows the adjustment of the internal SSI clock rate of the radio. This subsequently reduces the possibility of radio frequency interfering spurs and prevents the issues of crosstalk. EID provides security encryption and authentication of IV&D data bearer service communication between the radio and the Customer Enterprise Network. SecureNet SecureNet allows user to perform secured communications on an Analog or Motorola Data Communication (MDC) channel. The MDC Over-the-

Air Rekeying (OTAR) feature will allow users to perform OTAR activities on an MDC channel. P25 Digital Vehicular Repeater System (DVRS) Motorola Solutions offers an MSI Certified APX compatible, 3rd Party, P25 Digital Vehicular Repeater System (DVRS) that provides low cost portable radio coverage in areas where only mobile radio coverage is available and portable radio coverage is either intermittent or non-existent. Conventional Talkgroup and Radio Scan Enhancements A few enhancements have been made to the Conventional Talkgroup at the system. These enhancements improve the Scan feature operation significantly when multiple agencies are using a d e t r a t S g n i t t e G 18 English Draft G e t t i n g S a r t t e d single conventional radio frequency channel. These enhancements allow users to use Selective Squelch to operate on only the subset of talkgroups that are relevant to the users rather than all talkgroups on the channel. These Scan improvements have been made to eliminate the audio holes that were present and to turn on the busy LED when activity is present on the channel. Mixed Vote Scan and Standard Conventional Scan configurations are supported. Priority Operation is also supported. Up to 30 different talkgroups can be supported using conventional channels. A maximum of four talkgroups can be supported when Vote Scan channels are being used. Smart PTT is supported with this enhancement as Smart PTT prevents users from transmitting while other users are on the channel. Note:

User Selectable Talkgroups are not compatible with this Conventional Talkgroup Enhancement. What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You Check with your dealer or system administrator, if the radio is to be operated in extremely cold temperatures

(less than -30 C or more than +60 C), for the correct radio settings to ensure proper operation. You can consult your dealer or system administrator about the following:

Is your radio programmed with any preset conventional channels?

Which buttons have been programmed to access other features?

What optional accessories may suit your needs?

Note:

Specifications may vary for different radio models. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 19 English Draft Preparing Your Radio for Use This section provides simple instructions to prepare your radio for use. Turning On the Radio 1 Press the Power On/Off Button briefly to power on the radio. e s U r o f i o d a R After a short time, the red, yellow and green LEDs light up. The display then shows Zone and channel text, and menu items display on the screen. The backlight turns on to the last selected dim level. r u o Y g n i r a p e r P 20 English Note:

Pressing the Power On/Off Button before the LED lights up will be ignored. If FAIL ##/## appears in the display, the radio will not function until the condition has been corrected. If ERROR ##/## appears, some non-critical data has been changed. If either of these displays appear, if the display goes blank, or if the unit appears to be locked up, see Helpful Tips on page 142 for more information. If CH MISMATCH appears, means that either the Control Head has been connected to an incompatible transceiver, or vice versa. If your radio does not power up, contact your dealer. 2 To turn off the radio, press the Power On/Off Button after the LEDs light up. Note:

The duration that user must press and hold the Power On/Off Button to turn off the ADraft radio is programmable by a qualified radio technician. Adjusting the Volume 1 To increase the volume, rotate the Volume Knob clockwise. 2 To decrease the volume, rotate this knob counterclockwise. Validating Compatibility During Power Up The radio validates and updates the software and hardware of your control head(s) during power up. During validation, the display shows MAINTENANCE MODE REMOTE DEVICE; promptly followed by other maintenance statuses. Press the Power On/Off Button to reset when the display shows UPDATE DONE PLEASE RESET upon completion, or when the display shows UPDATE FAILED PLEASE RESET when it fails to update. If the software updates are complete, the radio runs the usual power up operation. If the updates are incomplete, the radio runs the Maintenance Mode and the display shows MAINTENANCE MODE REMOTE DEVICE; promptly followed by other maintenance statuses again. Note:

If SW INCOMPLETE appears, use Flashport Recovery Tool to update the control heads before you power on the radio again. P r e p a r i n g Y o u r R a d o i f o r U s e 21 English ADraft Identifying Radio Controls Radio Parts and Controls Control Head and Microphone l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i 22 English Note:

The microphone is not part of a radio. It is an optional accessory. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Accessory Port (Microphone) Menu Select Button[1]

Menu Entries LED Indicators Navigation Button Accy 2-Dot Button[1]

Accy 1-Dot Button[1]

16810121314151611972345171820212219Draft 8 Accy No-Dot Button (Purple)[1]

Push-to-Talk (PTT) Button 9 10 Orange Button[1]

11 Mode Knob 12 13 Indicators Power On/Off Button 14 Home Button 15 Dim Button Volume Knob 16 17 Data Feature Button[1]

18 Home Button (Microphone) 19 Keypad Buttons 20 Okay/Select Button (

) 21 Cancel Button (X) 22 Navigation Button (Microphone) Programmable Features Any reference in this manual to controls that are preprogrammed means that a qualified radio technician must use the radio programming software to assign a feature to a control. Your dealer can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to radio functions or preset channels/

groups depending on the duration of a button press:

Press Pressing and releasing rapidly. Long press Pressing and holding for the preprogrammed duration (between 0.25 seconds and 3.75 seconds). Hold down Keeping the button pressed. Assignable Radio Functions Call Alert Allows the radio to function like a pager, or to verify if a radio is active on the system. I d e n i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 1 These radio controls/buttons are programmable. 23 English Draft Call Response Allows you to answer a private call or phone call. Internet Protocol Address Channel Contacts Dynamic ID

(Conventional Only) Dynamic Priority

(Conventional Only) Emergency Information Intercom Selects a channel. Selects the Contacts menu. Allows you to edit the ASTRO Individual ID and/or MDC Primary ID of the radio. Allows any channel in a Scan List (except for the Priority-One channel) to temporarily replace the Priority-Two channel. Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency alarm or call. Displays the information of the radio. Enables users of multiple control heads to talk to each other via the control heads in a multi-control head setup. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i 24 English Location Display the Internet Protocol

(IP) address, device name and status of the radio. Determines the current location

(latitude, longitude, time and date), and also the distance and bearing to another location. Or, turns the GPS functionality on or off for all locations. Message Enters the current message list. Monitor

(Conventional Only) Multiple Private Line

(Conventional Only) Nuisance Delete Monitors a selected channel for all radio traffic until function is disabled. Selects the Multiple Private Line lists. Temporarily removes an unwanted channel, except for priority channels or the designated transmit channel from the scan list. Draft Launches a specific feature with one single button-press. You can setup as many as four separately programmed buttons for four different features. Allows you to make and receive calls similar to standard phone calls. Allows a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. Allows easy access to a set of preprogrammed visual and audio settings of the radio. Allows easy access to the list of calls recently received or made. Notifies the dispatcher you want a new encryption key. Allows user to manually send a repeater access codeword. Phone Private Call

(Trunking Only) Radio Profiles Recent Calls Rekey Request Repeater Access Button (RAB)

(Conventional Only) Reprogram Request

(Trunking Only) Request-To-Talk

(Conventional Only) Notifies the dispatcher you want a new dynamic regrouping assignment. Notifies the dispatcher you want to send a voice call. Scan Toggles scan on or off. Scan List Programming Secure/Clear Selective Call

(Conventional Only) Siren Site Display/

Search (Trunking Only) Selects the scan list for editing

(by long press on the Scan button). Toggles secure transmission on or off. Calls an assigned radio. Turns different Siren Tones on or off. Displays the current site ID and RSSI value; performs site search for Automatic Multiple Site Select (AMSS) or SmartZone operation. I d e n i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 25 English Draft Locks onto a specific site. Assignable Settings or Utility Functions Site Lock/Unlock

(Trunking Only) Status (Astro 25 Trunking Only) Sends data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. Talkaround/Direct

(Conventional Only) Toggles between using a repeater and communicating directly with another radio. Talkgroup

(Conventional Only) Allows a call from an individual radio to a group of radios. Text Messaging Service (TMS) Selects the text messaging menu. TMS Quick Text Selects a predefined message. User Zone Down Zone Select Zone Up Automatically registers with the server. Toggles downward through the zones in the radio. Allows selection from a list of zones. Toggles upward through the zones in the radio. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i 26 English Dim Front/Rear Horns/Lights Keypad Lock Low Power Voice Announcement Changes the display brightness. Switches one of two control heads to be active at one time. Toggles horns and lights feature on or off. Toggles the keypad lock on or off. Toggles transmit power level between high and low. Audibly indicates the current feature mode, Zone or Channel the user has just assigned. Voice Mute Toggles voice mute on or off. Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions You can access various radio functions through one of the following methods. Draft Advance Programmable Buttons This feature is to help you to shorten the process of applying certain common features. A short or long press of the relevant programmable buttons. Use the Menu Select Button (

). Menu Select Buttons Note:

Check with your dealer or system administrator for the list of features activated in your radio. to access the menu Use the Menu Select button entry of your radio feature. Your radio may be preprogrammed differently from the following example, but the steps for selecting a channel may appear as shown below:

Press the Menu Select button (

CHAN.

) directly below I d e n i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l A Orange Button[2]

B Menu Select Buttons[2]

27 English ACBADEDraft C Accy No-Dot Button (Purple)[2]

D Accy 1-Dot Button[2]

Accy 2-Dot Button[2]

E

(Quick Access) One Touch Button Enters a menu with a short press on the preprogrammed One Touch button. Features assigned to these buttons are Call, Call Alert, Phone, Repeater Access, MDC RTT Button Access, Status and Message. Home Button button returns you to the Home Pressing the

(default) screen. In most cases, this is the current mode. For selected radio features, the also used to save user-edited radio settings or information before returning you to the Home screen. button is Note:

Some features do not require you to press to go to the Home screen. Refer to the individual feature sections in this manual for further details on saving user-edited radio settings or information. button also can revert to home channel from The any other zone and mode in the radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 4-Way Navigation Button Use the 4-Way Navigation Button to scroll up, down, left or right with one of the following methods. Press and release one of the button to scroll from one entry to the next one. Press and hold one of the button to have the radio toggles through the list automatically (release the button to stop). Data Feature Button Use Data Feature button to access data-related features, such as the Text Messaging Service (TMS) feature screen. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i 28 2 These programmable buttons support the One Touch Button feature. English Draft The keypad functions in a manner similar to a standard telephone keypad when entering numeric digits. When the keypad is used to edit a list, each key can generate different characters of the alphabet. The following tables show the number of times a key needs to be pressed to generate the required character. Volume Knob Use this Volume Knob to adjust the volume of the speakers by turning it clockwise or counterclockwise. Using the Mode Knob Use this Mode Knob to scroll through the channels by turning it clockwise or counterclockwise. Keypad You can use the 3 x 4 alphanumeric keypad on the keypad microphone to access your radios features. Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode Key Number of Times Key is Pressed I d e n i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 4

?

5

!

6 7 8

; @ _ 9

-

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

*

#

&

$

/

+

=

\

(

) 1 1 A D 2

. B E G H 3

, C F I 29 English Draft Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 1 J 2 K M N 3 L O P T U W X Q R S V Y Z l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i Toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode and lowercase mode. Space Toggle between numeric and letter mode. Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 1 2

. 3

, 4

?

5

!

6 7 8

; @ _ 9

-

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

*

#

&

$

/

+

=

\

(

) 30 English Draft Key Number of Times Key is Pressed I d e n 1 a d g j 2 b e h k m n p t w q u x 3 c f i l o r v y 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 s z i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l Toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode and lowercase mode. Space Toggle between numeric and letter mode. 31 English Draft Keypad Characters Numeric Mode Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 2

. 3

, 4

?

5

!

6

;

7 8

@ _ 9

-

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

*

#

&

$

/

+

=

\

(

) 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Space Toggle between numeric and letter mode. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i 32 English Draft Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 A D B E C F 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 I d e n i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l Not applicable Not applicable 33 English Draft Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call. See Methods to Make a Radio Call on page 51 for more information. The PTT button serves two basic purposes:

on the side of the microphone While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. Press and hold down PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i 34 English ADraft Identifying Status Indicators Status Icons The liquid crystal display (LCD) of your radio shows the radio status, text entries, and menu entries. The following are the icons that appear on the display of the radio. Receiving Radio is receiving a call or data. Transmitting Radio is transmitting a call or data. Received Signal Strength Indicator

(RSSI) The number of bars displayed repre-

sents the received signal strength for the current site, for trunking only. The more stripes in the icon, the stronger the sig-

nal. Direct I d e n i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s On Radio is currently configured for di-

rect radio-to-radio communication (dur-

ing conventional operation only). Off Radio is connected with other ra-

dios through a repeater. Monitor (Carrier Squelch) Selected channel is being monitored

(during conventional operation only). In-Call User Alert On The feature is enabled. Voice mut-

ing of the affiliated trunking talkgroup or selected conventional channel is activa-

ted. Off The feature is disabled. Voice mut-

ing of the affiliated trunking talkgroup or selected conventional channel is deacti-

vated. or Power Level L Radio is set at Low power. 35 English Draft H Radio is set at High power. Scan Radio is scanning a scan list. Priority Channel Scan Blinking dot Radio detects activity on channel designated as Priority-One. Steady dot Radio detects activity on channel designated as Priority-Two. Vote Scan Enabled The vote scan feature is enabled. Secure Operation On Secure operation. Off Clear operation. Blinking Receiving an encrypted voice call. AES Secure Operation On AES secure operation. Off Clear operation. Blinking Receiving an encrypted voice call. GPS Signal On Feature is enabled and signal is available. Off Feature is disabled. Blinking Feature is enabled, but no signal is available. User Login Indicator (IP Packet Data) On User is currently associated with the radio. Off User is currently not associated with the radio. Blinking Device registration or user registration with the server failed due to an invalid username or pin. s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i 36 English Draft Inverted User successfully login to the secured IP Packet Data. Indicates that the text entry is currently in uppercase mode. Data Activity Data activity is present. Hexadecimal Indicates that the text entry is currently in hexadecimal mode. Numeric Indicates that the text entry is currently in numeric mode. Start Case Indicates that the first character of the text entry is capitalized. Mixed Case Indicates that the text entry is currently in normal text mode. Uppercase Lowercase Indicates that the text entry is currently in lowercase mode. Lowercase Predictive Indicates that the text entry is currently in lowercase and with predicted words shown at the bottom of the screen. Mixedcase Predictive Indicates that the text entry is currently in mixed case and with predicted words shown at the bottom of the screen. Uppercase Predictive Indicates that the text entry is currently in uppercase and with predicted words shown at the bottom of the screen. I d e n i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s 37 English Draft The radio Wi-Fi network is connected. The number of bars displayed repre-

sents the signal strength of the Wi-Fi signal. Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators This feature allows you to send and receive text messages. Status icons and menu options shown here help you to work more efficiently with TMS feature. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) on page 85 for more information. TMS Status Icons The following icons appear on the radios display when you send and receive text messages. Inbox Full The Inbox is full. Message Sent The text message is sent successfully. Message Unsent The text message cannot be sent. Unread Message User receives a new message. The selected text message in the Inbox has not been read. Read Message The selected text message in the Inbox has been read. Normal Message User is composing a message with normal priority and without a request for a reply. Message Index Indicates the index of the current message the user is viewing. Example: If the user is looking at the third message out of a total of 6 messages in s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i 38 English Draft I d e n i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s the Inbox folder, the icon is displayed as the icon on the left column. Priority Status The Priority feature is toggled on be-

fore the message is sent. Messages in the Inbox folder are flag-

ged with Priority. Request Reply The Request Reply feature is toggled on before the message is sent. Messages in the Inbox folder are flag-

ged with Request Reply. Priority Status and Request Reply User is composing a message with a priority status and a request for a reply. Messages in the Inbox folder are flag-

ged with Priority and Request Reply. TMS Menu Options Menu Option INBX COMP DRFT BACK SAVE SENT NEW LIST IMPT RQRP Description/Function Brings you to your incoming messages screen. Brings you to the compose screen. Brings you to the saved message screen. Brings you back to the previous screen. Saves the messages you have edited to the Draft folder. Brings you to the sent messages screen. Creates a new message. Brings you to the predefined messages screen. Toggles the Priority Status icon on or off for an outgoing message. Toggles Request Reply icon on or off for an outgoing message. 39 English Draft Menu Option Description/Function CURR ALL DEL EDIT EXIT NO OPTN RPLY SEL SEND YES Deletes the current selected message. Selects to delete all the messages in the current folder. Deletes a message or text. Edits a draft message or key in a target address. Exits to the Home screen. Cancel the delete all messages options. Brings you to the Options main screen. Replies to a message. Selects a predefined message or ad-

dress. Sends the message. Deletes all the messages in the current folder. LED Indicator The LED indicator shows the operational status of your radio. A Red LED B Yellow LED C Green LED Solid red Radio is transmitting. Rapidly blinking red Solid yellow

(Conventional Only) Radio has failed the self test upon powering up or encountered a fatal error. Channel is busy. s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i 40 English ABCDraft Rapidly blinking green Radio is on a Priority-One channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Blinking yellow Solid green Blinking green Radio is receiving a secured transmission. Radio is powering up, or is on a non-priority channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Radio is receiving an individual or telephone call, or is on a Priority-Two channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Intelligent Lighting Indicators I d e n i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s This feature temporarily changes the display backlight color and the alert text background color of the radio to help signal that a radio event has occurred. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Backlight and Bar Color Notification When Orange Emergency Alerts The radio initiates an emergency alarm or call. The radio receives an emergency alarm or call. 41 English Draft Backlight and Bar Color Notification When Red Critical Alerts The radio battery is low. The radio is out of range. The radio enters Failsoft mode. The radio is unable to establish a full connection with the system. The radio is unable to authenticate or register with the system. The radio lost GPS signal or GPS function fails. Green Call Alerts The radio receives a private call. The radio receives a phone call. The radio receives a call alert. The radio receives a selective call. The radio enters Geofence. s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i 42 English Draft Alert Tones I d e n Your radio uses alert tones to inform you of the condition of your radio. The following table lists these tones and when they occur. You Hear Tone Name Heard Short, Low-

Pitched Tone Radio Self Test Fail When radio fails its power-up self test. Reject When an unauthorized request is made. Long, Low-

Pitched Tone Time-Out Timer Warning Four seconds before time out. No ACK Received When radio fails to receive an acknowledgment. Individual Call Warning Tone When radio is in an individual call for greater than 6 seconds without any activity. Time-Out Timer Timed Out After time out. Talk Prohibit/PTT Inhibit

(When PTT button is pressed) transmissions are not allowed. Lack of Voice PTT Time out When the radio ends your call after it detected there are lack of voice for 5 seconds after the PTT is pressed and hold. Your ra-

dio ends the call to enable your radio to receive calls from other radio users. Out of Range

(When PTT button is pressed) the radio is out of range of the system. i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s Invalid Mode When radio is on an unpreprogrammed channel. 43 English Draft You Hear Tone Name Heard A Group of Low-Pitched Tones Short, Medium-

Pitched Tone Busy When system is busy. Valid Key-Press When a correct key is pressed. Radio Self Test Pass When radio passes its power-up self test. Clear Voice At beginning of a non-coded communication. Priority Channel Received When activity on a priority channel is received. Emergency Alarm /Call En-

try When entering the emergency state. Long, Medium-

Pitched Tone A Group of Me-

dium-Pitched Tones Central Echo Volume Set When central controller has received a request from a radio. When volume is changed on a quiet channel. Emergency Exit When exiting the emergency state. Failsoft When the trunking system fails. Automatic Call Back When voice channel is available from previous request. Keyfail When encryption key has been lost. Console Acknowledge When status, emergency alarm, or reprogram request ACK is re-

ceived. s r o t i a c d n t t I s u a S g n y f i t n e d I i 44 English Draft You Hear Tone Name Heard I d e n Received Individual Call When Call Alert or Private Call is received. Call Alert Sent Site Trunking When Call Alert is received by the target radio. When a SmartZone trunking system fails. Low-Battery Chirp When battery is below preset threshold value. GPS Fails When the GPS signal is lost or when GPS fails. Short, High-

Pitched Tone

(Chirp) Two High-

Pitched Tones Ringing Fast Ringing When system is searching for target of Private Call. Enhanced Call Sent When waiting for target of Private Call to answer the call. Phone Call Received When a land-to-mobile phone call is received. Gurgle Dynamic Regrouping

(When PTT button is pressed) a dynamic ID has been received. i t i f y n g S a t t u s I n d c a i t o r s Unique, Low-

Pitched Chirp Unique, High-

Pitched Chirp Talk Permit

(When PTT button is pressed) is verifying with the system for ac-

cepting its transmissions. New Message When a new message is received. Priority Status When a priority message is received. 45 English Draft General Radio Operation Selecting a Zone d) Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. Selecting a Radio Channel Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. A zone is a group of channels. The following methods are options on how to select a radio zone. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Select a zone via the Mode Knob:

a) Rotate the Mode Knob until the display shows the desired zone. Select a zone via the radio menu ZONE:

a) b) or to ZONE and press the Menu Select button directly below ZONE. or to the required zone, or use the keypad to enter the zone number. c) Press or the PTT button to confirm the selected zone number. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 46 English A channel is a group of radio characteristics, such as transmit/ receive frequency pairs. The following methods are options on how to select a radio channel. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Select a channel via the Mode knob:

a) Rotate the Mode knob until the display shows the desired channel. b) Press the PTT button to begin transmitting on the displayed channel. Select a channel via the radio menu CHAN:

or to CHAN. a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below CHAN. or to the required channel. c) d) Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to confirm the selected channel. Draft e) Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. To exit this procedure, press the Menu Select button directly below CNCL. Selecting a Channel via Channel Search Button This feature allows you to do a quick search for a specific channel in your radio by keying in the alias of the channel. If the name matches, your radio prompts the first found matched channel name. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Channel Search button. or to CHSR and press the Menu Select button directly below CHSR. A blinking cursor appears on the Channel Search screen. 2 Use the keypad to type or edit your channel name. 3 To initiate searching, press the Menu Select button directly below CHSR once the entry is done. The display shows SEARCHING. Once found, the display shows the matched channel name and the radio changed its transmission to the selected channel. If the radio is triggered to search for an empty entry, the display shows INVALID ENTRY. Repeat step 2 to search again. If the entry does not match, the display shows CHANNEL NAME NOT FOUND. Repeat step 2 to search or the Menu Select button directly again; or press below EXIT to exit. Mode Select Feature Mode Select allows a long press to save the current zone and channel of your radio to a programmable button, keypad button, or a softkey; then once programmed, the short-press of that button or softkey changes the transmission to the saved zone and channel. There are two methods to save the selected zone and channel:

G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 47 English Draft Softkeys Programmable buttons and keypad buttons (digit 0 to 9) Short press of the programmed softkey changes your current transmission to the zone and channel programmed in this softkey. Note:

Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Softkey Five softkeys are available for you to save the frequently used zone and channel. 1 Toggle your zone and channel to the required zone and channel. n o i t 2 or to MS1, MS2 ... or MS5. a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 3 Press and hold the Menu Select button directly below one of the softkey (MS1 MS5). You hear a short, medium-pitched tone when the zone and channel is saved. Note:

To change the programmed zone and channel, repeat this procedure. Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Button You can save the frequent used zone and channel to the programmable buttons and keypad digit 0 to 9 buttons. 1 Toggle your zone and channel to the required zone and channel. 2 Press and hold the button you desire to program. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone when the zone and channel is saved. Note:

Repeat this procedure to change the zone and channel of the programmed button. Short press of the programmed button changes your current transmission to the zone and channel programmed in this button. 48 English Draft Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call Once you have selected the required channel and/or zone, you can proceed to receive and respond to calls. A Red LED B Yellow LED C Green LED The LED lights up solid red while the radio is transmitting. In conventional mode, the LED lights up solid yellow when the radio is receiving a transmission. In trunking mode, there is no LED indication when the radio receives a transmission. If the radio is receiving a secure transmission, the LED blinks yellow. Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that talkgroup. When you receive a talkgroup call (while on the Home screen) the radio triggers for your attention with one of the following scenarios depending on the system your radio is configured:

For ASTRO Conventional system, the LED lights up solid yellow. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID, and the caller alias or ID. For Trunking system, the display shows the caller alias or ID. 1 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The LED lights up solid red. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. See also Making a Talkgroup Call on page 51 for details on making a Talkgroup Call. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 49 English ABCDraft Receiving and Responding to a Private Call (Trunking Only) 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. The one-to-one call between the two radios are not heard by the others in the current talkgroup. The calling radio automatically verifies that the receiving radio is active on the system and can display the caller ID. Note:

With the inactivity timer enabled (optional), when there is no response from the receiving radio, the calling radio exits the call with Menu Inactive Exit tone after the timer expires. When you receive a Private Call, you hear two alert tones and the LED blinks green. The display shows CALL RECEIVED and the caller alias or ID. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below RESP within 20 seconds after the call indicators begin. If the caller alias is in the call list, the display shows the caller alias during the call. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G If the caller name is not in the call list, the display shows the caller ID. 50 English 3 Press screen. to hang up and return to the Home Note:

If you press PTT button before pressing the Menu Select button directly below RESP, your conversation will be heard by all members of the talk group. If 20 seconds pass before you press the Menu Select button directly below the RESP, you will not respond privately to the call just received. Instead, you initiate a Private Call. See also Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) on page 52 for details on making a Private Call. Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call

(Trunking Only) This feature allows you to receive calls similar to standard phone calls from a landline phone. Note:

With the inactivity timer enabled (optional), if there is no response to the call after the timer Draft expires, your radio exits the call with Menu Inactive Exit tone. When you receive a Telephone Call, you hear a telephone-type ringing and the LED blinks green. The backlight of the screen turns green.The display shows PHONE CALL and the call received icon blinks. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below RESP. 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 3 Press or the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to hang up and return to the Home screen. See also Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) on page 53 for details on making a Telephone Call. Methods to Make a Radio Call You can select a zone, channel, subscriber ID, or talkgroup by using:

The preprogrammed Zone menu. The Mode Knob. A preprogrammed One Touch button. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n The Contacts list (see Contacts on page 65). Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Making a Talkgroup Call To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that talkgroup. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

or to TGRP and press the Menu Select button directly below TGRP. The display shows the last-selected talkgroup. Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. Use the Mode Knob to select the channel with the desired talkgroup. 2 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The radio shows different indicators based on the system the radio is configured. 51 English Draft For ASTRO Conventional system, the LED lights up solid red. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID. For Trunking system, the LED lights up solid red. 4 Speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. This feature allows you to send an individual Call Alert or page if there is no answer from the target radio. See Sending a Call Alert Page on page 76 for more information. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature via a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Private Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID (number) and initiate the Private Call. Proceed to step 5. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 52 English To access this feature via the menu, proceed to the next step. 2 or to CALL, and press the Menu Select button directly below CALL. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 3 To select the required ID, perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS to scroll through and select the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below LIST to go to the first number of the call list. or to the required ID. Use the keypad to enter the required ID. 4 Press the PTT button to initiate the Private Call. A telephone-type ringing sounds if the receiving unit is in service. The display shows CALLING...

<NUMBER> or CALLING... <ALIAS>. 5 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. Draft When you are connected, the display shows the ID of the target radio. If no acknowledgment is received, the display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. If the target radio does not respond before the time out, the display shows NO ANSWER. 6 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 7 Press to return to the Home screen. Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) This feature allows you to make calls similar to standard phone calls to a mobile or landline phone. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature via a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Phone Call button to dial the preprogrammed phone number. Proceed to step 5. To access this feature via the menu, proceed to the next step. 2 or to PHON, and press the Menu Select button directly below PHON. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 3 To select the required ID, perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS to scroll through and select the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below LIST to go to the first number of the call list. or to the required phone number. Use the keypad to enter the required phone number. 4 Press the PTT button to dial the phone number. 5 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 6 When your call is answered, press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 53 English Draft 7 Press to return to the Home screen. See Alert Tones on page 43 for more information if your call is NOT answered. Switching Between Repeater or Direct Operation Button The Repeater Operation increases the radio coverage area by connecting with other radios through a repeater. The transmit and receive frequencies are different. The Direct or talkaround operation allows you to bypass the repeater and connect directly to another radio. The transmit and receive frequencies are the same. Perform one of the following actions:

The display shows REPEATER MODE if the radio is currently in Repeater mode. The display shows DIRECT MODE and the Talkaround icon if the radio is currently in Direct mode (during conventional operation only). Monitor Feature Radio users who switch from analog to digital radios often assume that the lack of static on a digital channel is an indication that the radio is not working properly. This is not the case. Digital technology quiets the transmission by removing the noise from the signal and allows only the clear voice or data information to be heard. Use the Monitor feature to make sure a channel is clear before transmitting. Press the preprogrammed Repeater/Direct Monitoring a Channel switch to toggle between talkaround and repeater modes. or to DIR and press the Menu Select button directly below DIR. Monitoring a Channel in Conventional Modes:

a) Lift the microphone off hook. b) Listen for activity on that channel. c) Adjust the Volume Knob if necessary. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 54 English Draft d) If you hear no activity, press and hold the PTT button to start your conversation. 1 To activate monitoring, perform one of the following actions:

Monitoring a Channel in Trunked Modes:

a) Lift the microphone off hook. b) Press the PTT button. c) If you hear two, short, high-pitched tones, or if indicator lights you hear no tone and the steadily, then proceed with your message. d) Release the PTT button to receive (listen). If you are not in the range of the system, you may hear a continuous low-pitched tone and the display shows OUT OF RANGE. Monitoring Conventional Mode This feature must first be enabled by a qualified radio technician or system administrator. This feature allows you to monitor channel traffic on conventional channels by defeating the coded squelch. Thus, you can to listen to another user active on the channel. This way, you may be prevented from talking over someone elses conversation. At Home mode where the default zone and channel are being displayed, or to MON and press the Menu Select button directly below MON momentarily. Take the control head off hook. The display shows MONITOR ON. You hear all channel traffic. 2 Press the Menu Select button again to deactivate the monitoring. The display shows MONITOR OFF. MONITOR ON shown on the display indicates that the radio is monitoring. Pressing the Menu Select button again turns monitor off and you dont hear all channel traffic. If you try to transmit on a receive-only channel, you hear an invalid tone until you release the PTT button. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 55 English Draft Advanced Features Advanced Call Features Calling a Phone Not in the List 1 or to PHON. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below PHON. 3 Enter the desired phone number on the keypad. The display updates as the numbers are entered. 4 Press the button or the PTT button on the keypad microphone to make the call. 5 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 6 Press or Menu Select button directly below PHON to exit. Selective Call (ASTRO Conventional Only) This feature allows you to receive a call from or to call a specific individual. It is intended to provide privacy t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 56 English and to eliminate the annoyance of having to listen to conversations that are of no interest to you. Receiving a Selective Call When you receive a Selective Call, you hear two alert tones and the LED lights up solid yellow. The call received icons blink and the display alternates between CALL RECEIVED and the home display. The speaker unmutes. 1 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. Note:

If you press PTT button before pressing the Menu Select button directly below CALL, your conversation is heard by all members of the talk group. If 20 seconds pass before you press the Menu Select button directly below the CALL, you are not responding privately to the call just received. Instead, you initiate a Draft Selective Call. See Making a Selective Call on page 57. or to the required ID. Use the keypad to enter the required ID. Making a Selective Call 1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature via a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Selective Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID. Proceed to step 4. To access this feature via the menu, proceed to the next step. 2 or to CALL, and press the Menu Select button directly below CALL. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 4 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press and hold the PTT button to start the Selective Call. The display shows the ID of the target radio. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. 7 Press to return to the Home screen. If you do not press button to hang up, your radio will remain in Selective Call state with the other unit. You will miss all subfleet traffic and incoming phone calls. 3 To select the required ID, perform one of the Talkgroup Call Feature (Conventional Operation Only) A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS to scroll through and select the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below LIST to go to the last number dialed. This feature allows you to define a group of conventional system users so that they can share the use of a conventional channel. 57 English Draft Note:

Encryption keys are associated to talkgroups. When talkgroups are associated, encryption keys are changed by changing the active talkgroup. See Secure Operations on page 95 for more information. Selecting a Talkgroup 1 or to TGRP and press the Menu Select button directly below TGRP. The display shows the last Talkgroup that was selected and stored. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

or to PSET for the preset preprogrammed Talkgroup. or to the required Talkgroup. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to save the currently selected Talkgroup and return to the Home screen. If the encryption key associated to the new Talkgroup is erased, you hear a momentary key fail tone and the display shows KEY FAIL. If the encryption key that is associated to the new Talkgroup is not allowed, you hear a momentary key fail tone and the display shows ILLEGAL KEY. 4 Press to return to the Home screen. Sending a Status Call This feature allows you to send data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. Each status can have up to a 14-character name. A maximum of eight status conditions is possible. Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Status button. or to STS and press the Menu Select button directly below STS. The display shows the last acknowledged status call, or the first status in the list. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 58 English Draft 2 Perform one of the following actions:

or to the required status. Use the keypad to enter a number corresponding to the location in the status list. 3 Press the PTT button to send the status. When the dispatcher acknowledges, you hear four tones and the display shows ACK RECEIVED . The radio returns to normal dispatch operation. If no acknowledgment is received, you hear a low-

pitched tone and the display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. 4 Press to return to the Home screen. No traffic is heard on trunked channels while Status Calls is selected. If the radio detects no Status Call activity for six seconds, an alert tone sounds until you press or the PTT button. Responding to the Dynamic Regrouping Feature

(Trunking Only) This feature allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios to a particular channel where they can communicate with each other. This feature is typically used during special operations and is enabled by a qualified radio technician. You will not notice whether your radio has this feature enabled until a dynamic regrouping command is sent by the dispatcher. Note:

If you try to access a zone or channel that has been reserved by the dispatcher as a dynamically regrouped mode for other users, you hear an invalid tone. When your radio is dynamically regrouped, it automatically switches to the dynamically regrouped channel. You hear a Gurgle tone and the display shows the dynamically regrouped channels name. Press the PTT button to talk. Release PTT button to listen. When the dispatcher cancels dynamic regrouping, the radio automatically returns to the zone and channel that you were using before the radio was dynamically regrouped. Requesting a Reprogram (Trunking Only) This feature allows you to notify the dispatcher when you want a new dynamic regrouping assignment. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 59 English Draft Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Reprogram Request button to send reprogram request to the dispatcher. or to RPGM then press the Menu Select button directly below RPGM to send reprogram request to the dispatcher. The display shows REPROGRAM RQST and PLEASE WAIT. If you hear five beeps, the dispatcher has acknowledged the reprogram request. The display shows ACK RECEIVED and the radio returns to the Home screen. If the dispatcher does not acknowledge the reprogram request within six seconds, you hear a low-pitched alert tone and the display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. Try again or press return to the Home screen. to cancel and Classification of Regrouped Radios The dispatcher can classify regrouped radios into either of two categories:

Select Enabled Select Disabled Select-enabled radios are free to change to any available channel, including the dynamic-regrouping channel, once the user has selected the dynamic-regrouping position. Select-disabled radios cannot change channels while dynamically regrouped. The dispatcher has forced the radio to remain on the dynamic-regrouping channel. The Scan or Private Call feature cannot be selected while your radio is Select Disabled. Dynamic Zone Programming (DZP) Note:

Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. This feature works on the condition at least one zone in the radio must be a non-dynamic zone. This feature provides one or more Dynamic Zones to store frequently used channels be it conventional or trunking. These dynamic channels are saved from pre-existing (non-dynamic) channels in the radio. This saves the time and effort from the regular navigation t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 60 English Draft A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s around the working zones and channels. User can also delete or update the list in the Dynamic Zone. Saving a Channel in the Dynamic Zone from List Selection Entering the Dynamic Zone to Select a Dynamic Channel The radio must be in Dynamic Zone in order to perform this operation. 1 2 or to Zone then press the Menu Select button directly below Zone. The display shows the Zone screen. or to <# Dynamic Zone Channels>

3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button below Sel to select. Press the Menu Select button below Exit to exit. If you have selected one of the Dynamic Zone Channels list, the display returns to Home screen with the selected <# Dynamic Zone Channels>

shown on the screen. If you have selected Exit without selecting any Dynamic Zone Channels list, the display returns to Home screen without any changes. 1 or to ZnPr. Press the Menu Select button directly below ZnPr to enter Program Zone screen. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The display shows Search Options screen. 3 4 5 or to List Selection. Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows Select Zone screen. or to the required zone. Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows Select Chan screen. or to the required channel. Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows Channel updated. 61 English Draft 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to Home screen. Deleting a Channel in the Dynamic Zone The radio must be in Dynamic Zone in order to perform this operation. or to ZnPr then press the Menu Select button directly below ZnPr to enter Program Zone screen. The display shows the dynamic channels list. 1 2 Multiple Control Head Features This feature allows your transceiver to control a combination of up to four O5 control heads on APX Mobile (depending on the model). You can use the CAN cables to connect in any configuration that does not exceed 131 feet (40 meters) in combined length. Refer the Control Head Installation Manual

(6878215A01) for further information. The Multiple Control Head (MCH) feature consists of 2 modes that can be programmed via Customer Programming Software (CPS):

or to the saved dynamic channel then press the Menu Select button directly below Del. The display shows Channel deleted screen. All Active mode One Active mode 3 Press the Menu Select button below Exit to return to Home screen. The Home screen shows <Dynamic Zone Channels>. If the channel deleted is the Home channel, the Home screen shows <Zone Name>+Blank. Note:

If two or more control heads are connected to the system before enabling the MCH feature in the CPS, the radio displays EXTRA CH or CH ID # ERR. Both errors are FATAL. Setting the ID of the Initial Control Head This feature allows you to setup the control head in the Front Panel Programming (FPP) mode. During the setup, the control heads are defined as Control t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 62 English Draft Head Number 1, Control Head Number 2, Control Head Number 3 and Control Head Number 4. 1 Power off the radio by pressing the Power button. 2 Press and hold the left-most Menu Select button and the emergency button simultaneously. 3 While continuing to depress these two buttons, press the Power button to power on the radio and the control head. The radio and the control head powers on into FPP mode. The display shows the ID number of the control head. 4 Turn the Mode knob to change the ID number of the control head. 5 Press the Power button to power off the radio and exit FPP mode. 6 Repeat step1 to step 5 to set the ID number for the rest of the attached control heads. All Active Mode The All Active mode enables all connected control heads attached to the radio to operate concurrently with each other. When you activate a feature on one control head, the rest of the control heads have the same activated features and indicators on their respective display. Note:

The multiple control head feature allows only control heads of the same type to be connected. Upon power up, if a control head of a different type is connected to the radio, the display of all the attached control heads shows the FATAL error CH MISMATCH. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Activating and Deactivating Intercom in All Active Mode This feature only applies to control heads in the All Active mode. The intercom feature allows one control head user to talk to another control head user in a Multiple Control Head configuration. At any given time, when a control head being operated has priority for the intercom call, all other control heads are blocked until the active control head releases PTT button. This can be made on any attached control head. 63 English Draft Note:

In the One Active mode, if more than 2 control heads are present upon power up, the radio shows a FATAL error EXTRA CH on the display of all attached control heads. The active control head commands the system normally while the inactive control head is in remote mode with its display shows REMOTE. The Volume knob, DIM button, Front/Rear (F/R) softkey and Emergency button remain active on the inactive control head, while all other controls are disabled. Emergency footswitch and VIP inputs remain active on the inactive control head. The VIP input control head is configurable in the CPS and VIP should be attached to the control head selected in the CPS. Note:

Only 2 control heads are supported in the one active mode. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below INTC to activate the intercom feature of any of the control heads. 2 Press the PTT button to initiate an intercom transmission. All control heads that are attached will receive the same intercom call. The display of the control heads receiving the intercom call shows the alias/ID number of the transmitting control head. 3 Press or the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to deactivate the intercom feature. The intercom feature also deactivates when user initiates a mode change. If the radio is on an emergency channel, pressing of the EMERGENCY button or the emergency footswitch button on any control head also deactivates the intercom feature. One Active Mode The One Active mode enables only one control head to be visibly active at a time in a 2 control head system. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 64 English Draft A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Contacts This feature provides address-book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias (name) or ID (number) that you use to initiate a call. Contact entries are alphabetically sorted according to entry alias. Each alias can have up to five IDs of different call types associated with it. Additionally, each entry, depending on context

(conventional, trunking, or phone), associates with one or more of the four types of calls: Phone Call, Selective Call, Private Call, or Call Alert. Each entry within Contacts contains the following information:

Call Alias (Name) Call ID (Number) Call Type (Icon) WACN ID (Astro 25 Trunking IDs only) System ID Note:

Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to add, edit, or delete the contact entries. 65 English A B C Transceiver Active Radio Non-Active Radio You can change the command between the 2 control heads by pressing the Menu Select button directly below F/R, or the Menu Select button preprogrammed user button on the keypad microphone. Z1ZONECHANPWRSQLREMOTEF/RABCDraft Your radio also supports a maximum of 50 call lists. Each list can store up to 100 IDs (numbers). Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS and proceed to step 6. Note:

Your radio is preprogrammed with a number of contacts per Call Lists. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Making a Private Call from Contacts Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. 1 2 or to CNTS and press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the required subscriber alias. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN and proceed to the next step. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 66 English 4 5 or to CALL and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. or to select the call type. 6 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 7 Press the PTT button to initiate the call. During the call, the display shows the subscriber alias. 8 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The LED lights up solid red when the PTT button is pressed. If there is no voice activity for a preprogrammed period of time, the call ends. If the call reaches the maximum ring time, the call ends. Draft Adding a New Contact Entry 1 2 or to CNTS and press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to [NEW CONTACT] and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows NAME. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT. 4 Use the keypad to enter the name and press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have entered the name. To cancel this operation, press the Menu Select button directly below CNCL to return to the previous screen. 5 or to [ADD NUMBER] and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows TYPE 1 <DEFAULT TYPE>. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT. 7 8 or to the required channel and press the Menu Select button directly below OK. or to NUMBER 1 and press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT. The display shows NUMBER 1 and a blinking cursor appears. 9 Use the keypad to enter the number and press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have entered the number. To cancel this operation, press the Menu Select button directly below CNCL to return to the previous screen. 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below DONE once you have finished. The display shows <ENTRY> STORED, confirming that the contact entry has been added. The radio returns to the main Contacts screen. Deleting a Contact Entry 1 or to CNTS and press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 67 English Draft The entries are alphabetically sorted. 2 3 or to the entry you want to delete and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. or to DEL and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows <ENTRY> CONFIRM DEL?. 4 Select the Menu Select button directly below YES to delete the entry, or NO to cancel and return to the main screen of Contacts. The display shows <ENTRY> DELETED and the radio returns to the main screen of Contacts. Adding a Contact to a Call List 1 2 or to CNTS and press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to add and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 3 or to ADD TO CALLLST or ADD TO PHONLST and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 4 Perform one of the following actions:

or until the display shows [AVAILABLE] and press the Menu Select button directly below ADD to add as a new entry. or until the display shows <ENTRY> and its associated number and press the Menu Select button directly below RPLC to replace the existing entry. The display shows <ENTRY> ADDED, confirming the addition of the contact to the list. The radio returns to the main display of Contacts. Methods of Contact Editing in a Call List Editing an Entry Alias 1 or to CNTS and press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS. The entries are alphabetically sorted. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 68 English Draft 2 3 4 or to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. or to EDIT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. or to the entry alias you wish to change and press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT. A blinking cursor appears. 2 3 4 or to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. or to EDIT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. or to the entry ID you wish to change and press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT. A blinking cursor appears. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 5 Use the keypad to edit the name and press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have finished. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 5 Use the keypad to edit the number and press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have finished. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below DONE 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below DONE to save your changes and return to the main screen of Contacts. to save your changes and return to the main screen of Contacts. Editing as Entry ID Editing a Call Type 1 or to CNTS and press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 1 or to CNTS and press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 69 English Draft 2 3 4 5 or to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. or to EDIT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. or to TYPE and press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT. or to choose from the list of call types given and press the Menu Select button directly below OK. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below DONE to save your changes and return to the main screen of Contacts. Scan Lists Scan lists are created and assigned to individual channels/ groups. Your radio scans for voice activity by cycling through the channel/group sequence specified in the scan list for the current channel/

group. Your radio supports different types of Scan Lists:

Trunking Priority Monitor Scan List Conventional Scan List Talkgroup Scan List A maximum of 200 Scan Lists can be programmed in your radio. These lists must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Viewing a Scan List 1 2 or to SCNL and press the Menu Select button directly below SCNL. or to view the members on the list. 3 Press to exit the current display and return to the Home screen. Editing the Scan List This feature lets you change scan list members and priorities. 1 or to SCNL and press the Menu Select button directly below SCNL. The display shows the lists that can be changed. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 70 English Draft 2 or to the entry you want to edit. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to add and/or change the priority of the currently displayed channel in the scan list. Press the Menu Select button directly below DEL to delete the currently displayed channel from the scan list. Press the Menu Select button directly below RCL to view the next member of the scan list. 4 Perform one of the following actions to select another channel that needs to be added or deleted then repeat step 3. Otherwise, proceed to the next step. or to the desired channel. Use the keypad to enter the desired channel name. Use the Mode Knob to select the channel. 5 Press to exit scan list programming and return to the Home screen. See Viewing and Changing the Priority Status on page 72 for more information on how to add and/or change the priority of the currently displayed channel in the scan list. Changing the Scan List Status 1 Long press the preprogrammed Scan side button. 2 or to the member you want to edit. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Select button once to add the currently displayed channel to the scan list. Press the Select button one or more times to change the scan list status icon of the currently displayed channel. 4 Perform one of the following actions:

or to select more list members whose scan status you want to change. Use the Mode Knob to select another scan list member. 5 Press to exit scan list programming and return to the Home screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 71 English Draft Viewing and Changing the Priority Status Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL one or more times to change the priority status of the current displayed channel. Press the Select button one or more times to toggle between different status of the Scan List status icon of the current displayed channel. The radio shows one of following priority status icons and scenarios:

A Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as a non-priority channel. The LED lights up solid green. A Priority-Two Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-Two channel. The LED blinks green. A Priority-One Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-One channel. The LED rapidly blinks green. You hear all traffic on the Priority-

One channel, regardless of traffic on non-

priority channels. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 72 English No icon indicates that the current channel is deleted from the scan list. Scan This feature allows you to monitor traffic on different channels by scanning a preprogrammed list of channels. Turning Scan On or Off Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Scan button to initiate or stop scan. or to SCAN and press the Menu Select button directly below SCAN. If the scan is enabled, the display shows SCAN ON and the scan status icon. If the scan is disabled, the display shows SCAN OFF. The radio returns to the Home screen. Draft Turning Scan On While Disregarding the Squelch Code

(Conventional Channels Only) You can still receive fleetwide, system-wide, dynamic regrouping, incoming telephone interconnect and Private Conversation/Call Alert calls while scanning for activity. You may respond to these types of calls as you would normally on the selected channel. However, when scanning different channels while in talkgroup scan, incoming Private Conversation/Call Alert calls may be missed. or to MON and press the Menu Select button directly below MON. The brief MONITOR ON display indicates that the radio is disregarding the squelch code. Transmitting While the Scan is On Transmitting Using Radio Programmed for Talkback Scan PTT button, allowing the other party to respond. If the other party responds within the hang time, scanning does not resume until the full hang time expires after they have finished speaking, allowing the conversation to be completed. To transmit on the selected channel if another channel is active, first turn scan off by pressing the Menu Select button below SCAN momentarily. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Transmitting Using Radio Programmed for Non-

Talkback Scan Press the PTT button at any time to transmit on the selected channel or fixed channel. To make a Call Alert page, or Private Conversation call while scanning, press either the Menu Select button directly below PAGE or CALL. The call is entered on the selected channel and scanning is halted until the call is exited by pressing below either PAGE or CALL. or pressing the Menu Select button Press the PTT button to transmit on the channel indicated by the display. The radio does not begin scanning again for a predetermined hang time after you release the Deleting a Nuisance Channel If a channel continually generates unwanted calls or noise (termed a nuisance channel), you can 73 English Draft temporarily remove the unwanted channel from the scan list. This capability does not apply to priority channels or the designated transmit channel. When the radio is locked onto the channel to be deleted, or to NUIS and press the Menu Select button directly below NUIS. The radio continues scanning the remaining channels in the list. Restoring a Nuisance Channel To restore the deleted nuisance channel, perform one of the following actions:

Stop and restart a scan. Mode change to another channel and back to the original channel. Turn off the radio and then turn it on again. Nuisance mode delete can be disabled by the system administrator. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 74 English Changing Priorities Status While Scan is On While the radio is scanning, the dynamic priority change feature allows you to temporarily change any channel in a scan list (except for the Priority-One channel) to the Priority-Two channel. This change remains in effect until scan is turned off. Scan then reverts to the preprogrammed (original) setting. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below DYNP to change the priority of a non-priority channel in the scan list to Priority-Two. 2 Press momentarily to exit the scan list and resume scanning. Restoring Priorities in a Scan List To restore the original channel priorities in a scan list, perform one of the following actions:

Turn scan off, and then on. Change channels. Turn off the radio, and then turn it back on. Draft Using the Hang Up Box (HUB) To temporarily suspend Scan Mode operation, remove the control head from the Hang Up Box

(HUB). You are allowed to use the control head while scan is suspended. However, Priority Member scanning is not suspended. This feature applies to all Scan Lists and Scan Types. Scan is resumed once the control head is returned to the holding clip and the preprogrammed hang time has elapsed. Note:

Priority Scan List members are continuously scanned only when the Scan List, Designated Tx Member field is set to Talkback in the radio programming. Otherwise, all scan mode operation is suspended. Call Alert Paging This feature allows your radio to work like a pager. Even if other users are away from their radios, or if they are unable to hear their radios, you can send them an individual Call Alert page. You can also verify if a radio is active on the system. Depending on how your radio is programmed, when you make an Enhanced Private Call, the radio either automatically sends a call alert page if there is no answer after the maximum ring time, or when you press the PTT button. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Receiving a Call Alert Page When you receive a Call Alert page, you hear four repeating alert tones and the LED blinks green. If Call Alert Tone Auto Reset is enabled, you hear one alert tone and the LED blinks green. The call received icons blinks and the display shows PAGE RECEIVED. Press the PTT button to answer or press any button to clear the Call Alert page. See Making a Talkgroup Call on page 51 or Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) on page 52 for more information on returning the call. 75 English Draft Sending a Call Alert Page The following methods are options on how to send a call alert page. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Note:

If the feature inactivity timer is enabled, your radio automatically exits the feature when your radio is left idle long enough for the time to expire. You hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Sending a call alert page via the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Call Alert Paging button:

a) Press the preprogrammed Quick Access

(One-Touch) Call Alert Paging button to send a page to the preprogrammed ID. The display shows PAGING...<NUMBER> or

<ALIAS>. If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear four high-pitched tones and the display t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 76 English shows ACK RECEIVED. The radio returns to the Home screen. If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. Press the Menu Select button directly below OK to return to the main screen for Contacts. Sending a call alert page via the radio menu PAGE:

or to PAGE. a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below PAGE. or to select the required ID. c) d) Press the PTT button to send the page. The display shows PAGING...<NUMBER> or

<ALIAS>. If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear four high-pitched tones and the display shows ACK RECEIVED. The radio returns to the Home screen. If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. Press the Menu Select button Draft A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s directly below OK to return to the main screen of Contacts. Sending a call alert page via the radio menu CALL:

ACKNOWLEDGE. Press the Menu Select button directly below OK to return to the main screen of Contacts. or to CALL. a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below c) CALL. or to select the alias or ID, and press the PTT button to initiate the call. If the target radio does not respond after a preprogrammed period of time, the display shows SEND PAGE?. d) To send the call alert page, press the Menu Select button directly below YES. To exit the screen without sending the call alert page, press the Menu Select button directly below NO. The display shows PAGING...<ALIAS>. If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear four high-pitched tones and the display shows ACK RECEIVED. The radio returns to the Home screen. If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows NO Enabling and Disabling In-Call User Alert Make sure you are in Home mode where the default zone and mode are being displayed. You can enable and disable voice transmission, if needed. 1 or to scroll to the VMUT and press the Menu Select button directly below VMUT. Voice mute is activated. 2 To turn the feature off, press the Menu Select button directly below VMUT or the VMut preprogrammed button again. Pressing the Menu Select button directly below VMUT or the VMut programmed button momentarily toggles between Voice mute on and Voice mute off. VOICE MUTE ON shown on the display indicates that the radio is muted to all conventional dispatch calls and affiliated trunking group calls. 77 English Draft Quick Call II (ASTRO P25 Digital Trunking and Conventional) This feature allows the user to broadcast a series of distinct, recognizable tones before a voice transmission from the dispatcher or a radio. The broadcasting dispatcher or radio user can select this alert tone transmission to be sent to an individual Talkgroup or over the entire system. Specific tone or series of tones are pre-programmed into the radios to allow the dispatcher or supervisor to select a list of tones to broadcast before they make their voice transmission. Each tone is distinctive to indicate different situation or different broadcaster. The transmitting radio also plays back the tones for the broadcaster to listen. Note:

The receiving radios must be configured with the Quick Call II tone in order for the radio to sound the selected tone and also to sound a preconfigured alert tone after the selected tone has sound. Initiating a Quick Call II Transmission The broadcasting or transmitting radio must be pre-

programmed to see the tone in the Quick Call II tone list. The receiving radio must also be pre-

programmed to decode the tone to broadcast. 1 2 or to QCII, and press the Menu Select button directly below QCII. or to select the tone to broadcast. 3 Press the PTT to broadcast the selected tone, or press and hold the PTT to broadcast the selected tone and transmit with your vocal transmission. You hear the radio sounds the selected tone. You can begin your call after the tone ends. 4 Release PTT to listen. Emergency Operation The Emergency feature is used to indicate a critical situation. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 78 English Draft A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s If the Orange button is preprogrammed to send an emergency signal, this signal overrides any other communication over the selected channel. Your radio supports the following Emergency modes:

Emergency Alarm Emergency Call (Trunking Only) Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call Silent Emergency Alarm Special Considerations for Emergencies Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on the programming of this feature. Only one of the Emergency modes above can be assigned to the preprogrammed Emergency button or the Emergency footswitch. Note:

To exit emergency at any time, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. This timer is programmable from 0 6250 milliseconds by a qualified technician. Sending an Emergency Alarm This feature allows you to send a data transmission, which identifies the radio sending the emergency, to the dispatcher. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. A tone sounds and the display alternates EMERGENCY and the home display. A dispatcher acknowledgment ACK RECEIVED display follows. For trunking system, the radio also sounds a high-

pitched tone that indicates the alarm has been received by the trunked systems central controller. 2 Press and hold the EMERGENCY button or the PTT button to return to normal operation. Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only) This feature gives your radio priority access to a talkgroup. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. One of the following scenarios occurs:

A tone sounds and the display alternates EMERGENCY and the home display. 79 English Draft You hear the radio sounds a short low-pitched tone to indicate the selected channel does not support emergency and rejects to launch emergency mode. 2 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.0 to 2.5 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT button to end the transmission and wait for a response from the dispatcher. 5 To exit Emergency Call, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call This feature gives your radio priority access on a channel for conventional system, and to a talkgroup for trunking system. If the radio has both emergency call and alarm features enabled, it automatically proceeds to the call mode after the alarm is acknowledged. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 80 English The display alternates EMERGENCY and the home display. A high-pitched tone sounds, indicating that the trunked system central controller has received the alarm. A dispatcher acknowledgment

(four high-pitched tones) follows, accompanied by an ACK RECEIVED display. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT button to end the transmission and wait for a response from the dispatcher. 5 To exit Emergency Call, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. Turning off the radio also cancels the emergency state. Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm to the system without triggering any audio or visual indicators. Draft This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. Note:

If you press the PTT button during hot mic, and continue to press it after the hot mic duration expires, the radio continues to transmit until you release the PTT button. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. The display shows no changes, the LED does not light up, and you hear no tones. The silent emergency state continues until you perform the next step. 2 Press and hold the emergency button until a tone sounds to exit the silent alarm mode. If silent emergency alarm is used with emergency call, pressing the PTT button exits the silent mode and initiates the emergency call. Special Considerations for Emergencies If you press the emergency button while in a channel that has no emergency capability, a low-

pitched tone sounds. If the unit is out of the range of the system and/or the emergency alarm is not acknowledged, a tone sounds and the display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. If you press the emergency button, then change to a mode that has no emergency capability, the display shows NO EMERGENCY and a continuous low-pitched tone sounds until a valid emergency mode is selected or until the emergency is cancelled. When an emergency is active, changing to another mode where emergency is enabled

(trunked or conventional) causes an emergency alarm and/or emergency call to be active on the new mode. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Automatic Registration Service (ARS) This feature provides an automated data application registration for the radio. When you turn on the radio, the device automatically registers with the server. Data applications within the fixed network can determine the presence of a device on the system and send data to the device. For example: Text Messaging Service (TMS). 81 English Draft The Automatic Registration Service for the radio consists of two (2) modes:

ARS Server Mode (default mode) ARS Non-Server Mode Note:

The default ARS mode can be changed by a qualified radio technician using the radios programming software. Selecting or Changing the ARS Mode The following methods are options on how to select or change the ARS Mode. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Selecting or Changing the ARS mode via the radio menu:

a) Press and hold or to CHAN. b) Press the Menu Select button directly below CHAN. The display shows the current zone is not blinking, and the channel is blinking. or or press the Mode Knob once and rotate the Mode Knob to the desired channel. c) t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 82 English One of the following scenarios occur:

In ARS Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS server channel. In ARS Non-Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS non-server channel. If the channel or mode selected is unprogrammed, the display shows UNPROGRAMMED. Repeat this step. d) Press channel. to confirm the displayed zone and Selecting the ARS mode via the Mode Knob:

a) After the zone you want is displayed, toggle until the display shows the required channel. The display shows the current zone is not blinking, and the channel is blinking. or or press the Mode Knob once and rotate the Mode Knob to the desired channel. One of the following scenarios occur:

b) In ARS Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS server channel. Draft In ARS Non-Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS non-server channel. If the channel or mode selected is unprogrammed, the display shows UNPROGRAMMED. Repeat this step. to confirm the displayed zone and c) Press channel. User Login Feature This feature allows you as the user to be associated with the radio. With this association, every data application (Example: Text Messaging Service) takes on a friendly username. You can still send text messages without logging in as a user. The user login feature only enables the recipient of your message to identify you as the sender by assigning a username to your message. Note:

Valid characters for a username entry are capital letters (A Z), small letters (a z), numbers (0 9), symbols (*, #, -, /), and the space character. The maximum length for a username is eight

(8) characters. Usernames are not case sensitive in server mode but are case sensitive in non-server mode. A predefined username may sometimes be invalid because the programming software that is used to set predefined usernames allows you to set usernames comprising of eight (8) characters or more. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Logging In as a User 1 or to USER and press the Menu Select button directly below USER. The display shows the User Login screen. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

or to [ID Entry] and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit to enter ID. A blinking cursor appears on the screen. Use the keypad to type or edit a user name. Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to submit. or to scroll through the list of predefined user names. Press the Menu Select button 83 English Draft directly below SEL to select the predefined user name. Press and hold or to scroll through the list of predefined user names at a fast scroll rate. Press the Menu Select button directly below LOGN to select the predefined user name. If the selected predefined username has more than eight (8) characters, or an invalid character in it, the display momentary shows INVALID ID. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below PIN. A blinking cursor appears beside PIN. 4 Enter your Personal Identification Number (PIN) number. The maximum PIN length is 4 digits. The PIN number will appear as asterisks. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below LOGN. One of the following scenarios occurs:

In ARS Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the ID, and IN PROGRESS, with CNCL. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 84 English In ARS Non-Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the ID, and LOGGED IN, with LOGT and EXIT. In non-ARS enabled mode, the display shows OFFLINE, with LOGT and EXIT. One of the following scenarios occurs:

If the user name is invalid, login fails and the user login failure indicator (IP indicator) icon blinks. The display also shows momentary LOGIN FAILED. If the PIN is invalid, login fails and the user login failure indicator (IP indicator) icon blinks. The display also shows momentary LOGIN FAILED. Wait for the logged in confirmation screen. If the login process is successful, the display shows the successful user login indicator (IP indicator) icon and LOGGED IN, with LOGT and EXIT. Note:

To cancel the login process and return to the initial user login screen, press the Menu Select button directly below CNCL. Logging Out Once the data application registration is completed, you can log out. Draft Note:

Private data refers to all messages in the text messaging Inbox, Draft, and Sent folder. The next user is able to access the Inbox, Draft and Sent messages if private data is not deleted. 1 or to LOGT and press the Menu Select button directly below LOGT. The display shows the User Login Indicator icon and CLEAR PRIVATE DATA?. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

Select YES to clear all your private data. The display shows momentary PRIVATE DATA CLEARED. Select NO to keep your private data. Text Messaging Service (TMS) This features allows you to quickly send and receive messages and run database queries directly from your radios. The maximum length of characters for a text message is 200. The types of text messages available:

A new text message (free form message). A predefined message (quick text message). An edited quick text message. The main menu consists of the following options:

Inbox Compose Drafts Sent A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Note:

See Status Icons on page 35 for more information on the TMS icons and TMS Menu Options on page 39 for more information on each menu option. Accessing the Messaging Features 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Data Feature button or the preprogrammed TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen. Press and hold the Data Feature button or the preprogrammed TMS Feature button to access the Inbox. 85 English Draft Follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio menu. 2 or to TMS. During the numeric mode, except for the keypad only enters the numeric digits. Subsequent presses of the same key inserts the same digit to the text message (no multi-tap).

, pressing 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 1 or to TMS. 4 or to scroll through the main menu options. Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. Composing and Sending a New Text Message During the uppercase and lowercase mode, multi-

tapping the keys only scrolls through the letters. For example, A->B->C, a->b->c. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below COMP to see the compose options. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below NEW to compose a new message. A blinking cursor appears on the COMPOSE screen. 5 Use the keypad to type or edit your message. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN once the message is composed. 7 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the address list and select the required address. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 86 English Draft or to [OTHER RECPNT] and press the Menu Select button below EDIT. When a blinking cursor appears in the ENTER ADDRESS screen, use the keypad to type the address entry. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEND or press the PTT button to send the message. Drafts Folder on page 93 for more information. Sending a Quick Text Message Quick Text messages are messages that are predefined and usually consist of messages that are used most frequently. The display shows the SEND MESSAGE screen and SENDING MSG. Each Quick Text message has a maximum length of 50 characters. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s If the message is sent, you hear a tone and the display shows MSG SENT. If the message is not sent, you hear a low tone, the display shows SEND FAILED and returns to the main TMS screen. Note:

You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 88 for more information. You can also select the DRFT option to save your message in the Drafts folder to send it at a later time. See Accessing the 1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature via a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Text button and proceed to Step 4. To access this feature via the menu, proceed to the next step. 2 or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below COMP to see the compose options. 87 English Draft Press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to return to the Home screen. cursor appears on the ENTER ADDRESS screen. Use the keypad to type the address entry. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below LIST 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEND to see the quick text list. 5 or to scroll through the list of messages and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to select the required message. The message appears on the COMPOSE screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. Use the keypad to edit the message, if required. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEND. 8 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the address list and select the required address. or to [OTHER RECPNT] and press the Menu Select button below EDIT. When a blinking or press the PTT button to send the message. The display shows the SEND MESSAGE screen and SENDING MSG. If the message is sent, you hear a tone and the display shows MSG SENT. If the message is not sent, you hear a low tone, the display shows SEND FAILED and returns to the main TMS screen. Note:

You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 88 for more information. Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message Before sending your message, you can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 88 English Draft Appending a Priority Status to a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 86 for more information. Note:

The Priority Status icon on a message does not imply that the message gets higher priority over the other messages when it is being transmitted. It is just an indication that can be embedded into a message to let the receiver know that the message is important. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s and Sending a New Text Message on page 86 for more information. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below IMPT to remove the priority status icon. The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. Appending a Request Reply to a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 86 for more information 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below IMPT to indicate the message as important. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. The priority status icon appears beside the normal message icon on the label bar. Removing a Priority Status from a Text Message Ensure there is an outgoing message composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below RQRP to request for a reply. The request reply icon appears beside the normal message icon on the label bar. 89 English Draft Removing a Request Reply from a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 86 for more information. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below RQRP to remove the reply status icon. The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. Appending a Priority Status and a Reply Request to a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 86 for more information. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below IMPT to indicate the message as important. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 90 English 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below RQRP to request for a reply. The priority status and request reply icons appear beside the normal message icon on the label bar. Removing a Priority Status and a Reply Request from a Text Message Ensure that a outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 86 for more information. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below IMPT to remove the priority status icon. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below RQRP to remove the reply status icon. The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. Draft Receiving a Text Message Note:

When you receive a message that is flagged with the Request Reply icon, you must manually respond to the sender that you have received the message. The system will not automatically send a notification to acknowledge that the message was received. The following methods are options on how to receive a text message. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Receiving a text message via the Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button:

a) When you receive a message, press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox. The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message on top. Receiving a text message via the radio menu:

a) When the new message icon appears and the display shows momentary NEW MSG, press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the Inbox. The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message on top. Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox The Inbox can hold up to thirty (30) messages. Note:

or to read the message if the content fills more than one screen. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen. Press the Menu Select button directly below INBX. Press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox. or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 91 English Draft screen. Press the Menu Select button directly below INBX. The display shows the latest received message. 2 While on the view message screen, press the Menu Select button directly below RPLY, DEL, or BACK to access the option. Select RPLY to reply the message. Select DEL to delete the message. Select BACK to return to the previous screen. Note:

The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators on page 38 for more information. Replying to a Received Text Message Note:

The original date and time stamp, address and message content is automatically appended to the reply message. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below RPLY to reply to a message. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below NEW to compose a new message. Press the Menu Select button directly below LIST to select a predefined message. or to scroll through the list of predefined messages and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to select the required message. One of the following scenarios occurs:

A blinking cursor appears on the Compose screen. The predefined message appears on the Compose screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. 3 Use the keypad to type or edit your message. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN once you have completed the message. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEND to send the message. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 92 English Draft The display shows the Send Message screen and SENDING MSG. Note:

Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK at any time to return to the previous screen. You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 88 for more information. Accessing the Drafts Folder This folder stores the messages that were saved previously. The Drafts folder can hold up to 10 messages. The oldest draft in the folder is deleted when the 11th message comes in. 1 or to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 Press the Menu Select button below DRFT. The display shows the latest drafted text message. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT, DEL, or BACK to access the option. Select EDIT to edit the message before sending it. Select DEL to delete the message. Select BACK to return to the previous screen. Sent Text Messages Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in the Sent folder. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent list. The Sent folder is capable of storing a maximum of ten (10) last sent messages. When the folder is full, the oldest message in the folder is deleted when the 11th message comes in. Viewing a Sent Text Message 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen. 93 English Draft or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 2 Press the Menu Select button below SENT. The display shows the latest sent message. 3 While on the view message screen, press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN, DEL or BACK to access the option. Select OPTN to configure the message settings. Select DEL to delete the message. Select BACK to return to the previous screen. Note:

The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators on page 38 for more information. Sending a Sent Text Message 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN while viewing the message. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEND. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the address list and select the required address. or to [OTHER RECPNT] and press the Menu Select button below EDIT. When a blinking cursor appears in the ENTER ADDRESS screen, use the keypad to type the address entry. 4 Press the Menu Select button below SEND or the PTT button to send the message. The display shows the SEND MESSAGE screen and SENDING MSG. Note:

Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK at any time to return to the previous screen. You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 88 for more information. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 94 English Draft Deleting Text Messages Enabling Secure Transmission 1 From the Inbox, Draft, or Sent screen, or to 1 scroll through the messages. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below DEL to view the delete options. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below CURR to delete the current message. Press the Menu Select button directly below ALL to delete all the messages. Secure Operations Secure radio operation provides the highest commercially available level of voice security on both trunked and conventional channels. Unlike other forms of security, Motorola digital encryption provides signaling that makes it virtually impossible for others to decode any part of an encrypted message. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s or to SEC and press the Menu Select button directly below SEC. The display shows key has been enabled. and the current key if multi-

2 Monitor the mode to be sure it is not in use. 3 Press PTT button to transmit. Note:

If the selected channel is preprogrammed for clear-only operation when you press the PTT button, an invalid mode tone sounds and the display shows CLEAR TX only. The radio does not transmit until you disable the secure mode. The radio can be configured to ignore the clear voice or unsecured transmission when the radio is in secured transmission. Check with your agent for details. 95 English Draft Accessing the Secure Feature Press the Menu Select button below GROUP for 1 or to SEC. 2 Press and hold the Menu Select button directly below SEC to display Secure feature screen. The display shows the Secure screen. Managing Encryption Loading the Encryption Key(s) Note:

Refer to the key-variable loader (KVL) manual for equipment connections and setup. 1 Attach the KVL to your radio. The display shows KEYLOADING, and all other radio functions are locked out, except for power down, and volume. 2 Press the Menu Select button below TARGET. 3 Press the Menu Select button below LOAD. 4 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button below KEY for single-key. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 96 English multikey. 5 or to the required key or group. 6 Press the Menu Select button below LOAD to load the key to your radio. When the key has been loaded successfully, one of the following scenarios occurs:

You hear a short tone for single-key radios. You hear an alternating tone for multikey radios. Multikey Feature This feature allows the radio to be equipped with different encryption keys and supports the DES-OFB algorithm. There are two types:

Conventional Multikey The encryption keys can be tied

(strapped), on a one-per-channel basis, through Customer Programming Software. In addition, you can have operator-selectable keys, operator-selectable keysets, and operator-selectable key Draft Trunked Multikey erasure. If talkgroups are enabled in conventional, then the encryption keys are strapped to the talkgroups. If the radio is used for both conventional and trunked applications, strap the encryption keys for trunking on a per-talkgroup or announcement-group basis. In addition, a different key can be strapped to other features, such as dynamic regrouping, failsoft, or emergency talkgroup. You can have operator-selectable key erasure. Selecting an Encryption Key 1 or to KEY. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below KEY. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. 3 or to scroll through the encryption keys or use the keypad to enter the number of the desired key. 4 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to save the newly selected key and return to the Home screen. Press

, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. Turn the 16-Position Select knob to exit. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Note:

When the selected key is erased, you hear a momentary keyfail tone and the display shows KEY FAIL. When the selected key is not allowed, you hear a momentary illegal key tone and the display shows ILLEGAL KEY. Selecting a Keyset This feature allows you to select one or more groups of several encryption keys from among the available keys stored in the radio. For example, you could have a group of three keys structured to one keyset, and another group of three different keys structured to another keyset; by 97 English Draft changing keysets, you would automatically switch from one set of keys to the other. Every channel to which one of the original keys was tied now has the equivalent new key instead. or to KSET and press the Menu Select button directly below KSET. The display shows the last user-selected and stored keyset, and the available keyset menu selections. 1 2 or to scroll through the keysets or use the keypad to enter the number of the desired keyset. b) Erasing the Selected Encryption Keys This feature allows you to erase all or selected encryption keys. Erasing the selected encryption keys via the radio menu:

a) or to ERAS and press the Menu Select button directly below ERAS. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. or to the desired encryption key or use the keypad to enter the number of the desired key. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to save the newly selected keyset. The radio exits keyset selection and returns to the Home screen. Note:

, the PTT button, or the EXIT Press menu selection to exit this menu at any time without changing the keyset selection. c) Press the Menu Select button directly below ALL to delete all keys, or press the Menu Select button directly below SNGL to delete current shown key. You can abort this screen and return to Home screen by pressing the Menu Select button directly below ABRT. Requesting an Over-the-Air Rekey (ASTRO Conventional Only) Ensure that the Unique Shadow Key (USK) is loaded into the radio with the key-variable loader (KVL) t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 98 English Draft before the rekey request can be sent. Refer to your local key management supervisor for more information. This feature, also known as OTAR, allows the dispatcher to reprogram the encryption keys in the radio remotely. The dispatcher performs the rekey operation upon receiving a rekey request from the user. 1 or to REKY. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below REKY. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the PTT button to send the rekey request. Press the PTT button again, or the or Emergency button, to exit the feature and transmit in normal mode. If the rekey operation fails, you hear a bad-key tone and the display shows REKEY FAIL. Note:

The rekey operation failure indicates that your radio does not contain the Unique Shadow Key (USK). MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) Page This feature allows you to view or define MDC Over-

the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) features. It is applied only when operating in secure encrypted mode and only for conventional communications. In additional to Rekey Requests, OTAR transmissions include Delayed Acknowledgements, and Power-up Acknowledgements. Some of the options selected may also need to be set up at the Key Management Controller (KMC) site to work properly. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Infinite UKEK Retention This feature enables Unique Key Encryption Key

(UKEK) to be permanently stored in the radio even A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 99 English Draft Random FM Noise Canceller

(Flutter Fighter) Expander signal at transmitting radio. Expands the speech while the noise flow remains the same at receiving radio. Reduces the unwanted effects of random FM noise pulses caused by channel fading under high Signal-to-

Noise (S/N) conditions such as in a moving transportation. The fading effects, heard as audio pops and clicks, are cancelled without affecting the desired audio signal. The Random FM Noise Canceller operates only in receive mode. when all of the encryption keys is erased. Without this UKEK key, the radio cannot be rekeyed over the air. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Hear Clear Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. There are two components of Hear Clear. Companding Reduces the channel noise, e.g. OTA transmission, that is predominantly present in UHF2 and 900 MHz channel with the following features. Compressor Reduces the background noise flow and the speech t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 100 English Draft Global Positioning System / Global Navigation Satellite System Note:

This feature is addressed as GPS across the manual as the naming convention of the buttons and strings remain the same as the legacy feature of GPS. The availability and accuracy of this location information (and the amount of time that it takes to calculate it) varies depending on the environment in which you are using the GPS feature. For example, GPS location fixes are difficult to obtain indoors, in covered locations, between high buildings, or in situations where you have not established a clear broad view of the sky. GPS Operation The GPS technology uses radio signals from earth orbiting satellites to establish location coordinates. Therefore, maximizing your view of unobstructed sky is essential for optimum performance. Where adequate signals from multiple satellites are not available (usually because you cannot establish a view of a wide area of the sky), the GPS feature of your radio will not work. Such situations include but are not limited to:

Inside buildings, trains, or covered vehicles Underground locations Under any metal, or concrete roof, or structure Between tall buildings or under dense tree-cover In temperature extremes outside the operating limits of your radio Even where location information can be calculated in such situations, it may take longer to do so, and your location estimate may not be as accurate. Therefore, in any emergency situation, always report your location to your dispatcher. Keep in mind that the accuracy of the location information and the time it takes to obtain it varies depending upon circumstances, particularly the ability to receive signals from an adequate number of satellites. Note:

Even where adequate signals from multiple satellites are available, your GPS feature only provides an approximate location, usually within 10 meters from your actual location, but sometimes farther away. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 101 English Draft The satellites used by the GPS feature are controlled by the U.S. government and are subject to changes implemented in accordance with the Department of Defense GPS user policy and the Federal Radio Navigation Plan. These changes may affect the performance of the GPS feature on your radio. GPS Performance Enhancement Sometimes, the GPS feature may be unable to complete a location calculation successfully. You then see a message indicating that your radio cannot connect to enough visible satellites. To maximize the ability of your radio to determine a fix, take note of the following guidelines:

For your initial fix, hold the radio in the face position. Stay in the open. The GPS feature works best where there is nothing between your radio and the open sky. The Outdoor Location Feature (Using GPS) This feature allows you to determine your current location using a location menu, as well as your current distance and bearing in relation to another t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 102 English location. Radio location may be requested and reported over-the-air. Your radio stores up to a maximum of sixty (60) programmable location coordinates, also known as waypoints. When the memory is full, the next waypoints automatically replaces the oldest waypoints in the radio. The radio also stores four (4) preprogrammed waypoints. These coordinates cannot be deleted. The following table shows the differences between programmable waypoints and preprogrammed waypoints. Programmable Way-

points Preprogrammed Way-

points User-configurable loca-

tion coordinates. Fixed location coordi-

nates:

Home Emergency Last Known Location Destination Draft Programmable Way-

points Preprogrammed Way-

points Only the alias is editable, not the coordinates. Coordinates can be de-

leted one at a time, or all at once. The Home and Destina-

tion coordinates are edit-

able. Coordinates cannot be deleted. Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Accessing the Outdoor Location Feature Note:

An ON radio menu may be present on the Location menu screen if it is preprogrammed by the dealer or system administrator. 1 or to LOC. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s The display shows LOCATION OFF <LATITUDE>. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below On to turn on the GPS. The display shows PREVIOUS LOC <LATITUDE>. 4 or to check the longitude, time and date of the last successful location fix. 5 To obtain a new location fix, press the Menu Select button directly below RFSH. The top line temporarily displays PLEASE WAIT while the new location is being determined. While the new location is being determined, the location signal can be a solid or blinking icon. The location coordinates are updated automatically every 5 seconds while the location signal is present. 6 To return to the Home screen, press

, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. Turning Off GPS 1 or to LOC. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below LOC. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below LOC. 103 English Draft The display shows PREVIOUS LOC <LATITUDE>. 3 or to check the time and date of the last successful location fix. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 5 or to TURN OFF GPS (if preprogrammed). 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to turn off the GPS. The display shows LOCATION OFF. 7 To return to the Home screen, press

, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. Saving a Waypoint Ensure that your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 104 English or to SAVE AS WAYPT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. or to SAVE AS HOME and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL and proceed to step 5. or to SAVE AS DEST. and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL and proceed to step 5. A blinking cursor appears in the screen. 3 Use the keypad to edit the auto-generated waypoint, if required, or press the Menu Select button directly below CNCL to return to the Location main screen. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done. One of the following scenarios occur:

The display shows SAVED AS <WAYPOINT NAME>. The display shows SAVED AS HOME. The display shows SAVED AS DEST.. Draft 5 To return to the Home screen, press

, the PTT button, the preprogrammed GPS button or the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. 5 To view the longitude, time and date of the selected waypoint, or to VIEW and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. Viewing a Saved Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 6 To return to the previous screen, press the Menu Select button directly below BACK, or to return to the Home screen, press or the PTT button. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Editing the Alias of a Waypoint A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s OPTN. 2 or to WAYPOINTS and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows a list of waypoints. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the list. or to select a waypoint to view the location information in full. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 3 4 or to WAYPOINTS and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows a list of waypoints. or to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. or to EDIT NAME and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 105 English Draft A blinking cursor appears in the EDIT NAME screen. Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 5 Use the keypad to edit the alias. 6 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done. Press the Menu Select button directly below CNCL to return to the Waypoints main screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 or to WAYPOINTS and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows a list of waypoints. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

7 The display shows <WAYPOINT NAME> UPDATED or to [HOME] and press the Menu Select and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. 8 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK to return to the previous screen. Press or the PTT button to return to the Home screen. Editing the Coordinates of a Waypoint Note:

Only the preprogrammed coordinates of Home and Destination can be edited by the user. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 106 English button directly below OPTN. or to [DESTINATION] and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 4 or to EDIT LOCATION and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The first number blinks. 5 Utilize the following control buttons to select the number/coordinates if required, then press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT to change the number/coordinates. Draft Press to move to the previous number/

coordinates. Press to move to the next number/

coordinates. or Press to change the North (N), South

(S), East (E) or West (W) direction. A blinking cursor appears in the EDIT LOCATION screen. 6 Utilize the following control buttons or menu to change the number/coordinates if required then press the Menu Select button directly below OK once. Press to move one space to the left. Press to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below DEL to delete any unwanted characters. Press the Menu Select button directly below CNCL to return to the previous screen 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once complete setting up the new Home or Destination. One of the following scenarios occurs:

A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s The display shows [HOME] UPDATED and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. The display shows [DESTINATION] UPDATED and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. Deleting a Single Saved Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 or to WAYPOINTS and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows a list of waypoints. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select OPTN. or to Edit name and press the Menu Select button directly below Del. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del. 107 English Draft 4 The display shows <WAYPOINT NAME> CONFIRM 4 DEL?. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below YES to delete the waypoint or press the Menu Select button directly below NO to return to the Waypoints main screen. The display shows <WAYPOINT NAME> DELETED . Deleting All Saved Waypoints Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. Note:

You cannot delete any of the preprogrammed waypoints. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 3 or to WAYPOINTS and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows a list of waypoints. or to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 108 English or to DELETE ALL and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows ALL SAVED WAYP CONFIRM DEL?. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below YES to delete all waypoints or press the Menu Select button directly below NO to return to the Waypoints main screen. The display shows ALL SAVED WAYP DELETED. Measuring the Distance and Bearing from a Saved Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 3 or to DIST FRM HERE and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows a list of waypoints. or to the required waypoint and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. Draft The display shows the distance and bearing from the current to the selected coordinates. Location Feature in Emergency Mode When the Emergency feature is activated by pressing the emergency button, the radio exits the Location menu and returns to the Home (default) screen so that you can see which channel the emergency signal is going out on. However, you may re-enter the Location menu while still in emergency mode, provided that Silent Emergency has not been activated. If you have turned Location off using the ON/OFF menu key, it automatically turns back on when Emergency is activated. If there is a solid location signal during Emergency, the current location and the location information received is saved as Emergency and Last Known Location waypoints, respectively. Peer-Location on the Display (ASTRO Conventional only) This feature is only available for radio-to-radio voice transmissions, dispatch call and selective call in conventional ASTRO system. For radio-to-radio transmission, in order to allow the radio to show peer-

location, the voice should be directly sent from one radio to another radio without passing through any infrastructure facility such as repeaters, phone or DVRS system. Both the transmitting radio and receiving radio must be configured to enable them to send and/or receive the GPS coordinates. You can check with your nearest qualified technician for more details. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Note:

If the receiving radio is operating in a Mixed Mode channel, and the voice transmission is via conventional ASTRO system then the radio can receive the location coordinates of its peers. This feature is also operable in a Scan Active channel or Scan Talkback channel. Upon receiving a voice transmission with GPS coordinates enabled on the receiving radio, the display shows the coordinates available in full or in short coordinates. There are two different formats available. Refer to the following list for the details shown in the Peer-Location quick text. Consult your agent to pick the best format to configure to your radio. 109 English Draft Full location coordinates PTT ID (This is optional.) Longitude and latitude Relative distance or direction. Short location coordinates PTT ID (This is optional.) Longitude and latitude Note:

If the transmitting radio is stale at its location after a period of time, the receiving radio display shows LAST KNWN LOC:

<Coordinates> <distance> on top of ID:<PTT ID>. The PTT ID seen here is optional to be shown on the display per requirement of usage. If the transmitting radio does not have GPS or the receiving radio could not decode the GPS signal of the received signal, the receiving radio display shows UNKNOWN LOC on top of ID:<PTT ID>. If the radio is not configured to show PTT ID, you see only UNKNOWN LOC. Geofence (ASTRO 25 Trunking System) Geofence is a virtual perimeter based on the GPS to define a geographical area on earth. Check with your dealer or qualified technician to programme the geofence coordinates and actions. When the radio enters the predefined Geofence area, your radio receives the Dynamic Regroup command from the system and immediately connects to a Dynamic Regroup talkgroup. The radio display shows the new selected Dynamic Regrouped talkgroup with green intelligent light for your attention. On top of that, additional features are Voice Announcement of the new channel, and also direct content display of a text message to indicate that you are currently at Geofence area. Check with your nearest qualified technician on the requirements for these enhancements to work in Geofence. Any new text messages received at Geofence shall have its content displayed immediately on the radio display. Note:

If the radio is set up in DVRS, only mobile radio is supported for this feature. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 110 English Draft Entering the Geofence Area The Voice Announcement and TMS display in this feature are optional. They must be configured to enable you to hear and see these indicators. When the radio enters a Geofence area, the radio immediately sends a message ACK back to the system. The radio searches the current zone for the channel with same talkgroup assigned as the Dynamic Talkgroup and also with same system ID of current trunk system. Once matched, the radio display shows the first matched and connected channel alias. If there is no channel with matching Talkgroup ID and trunk system ID, the radio display shows the channel alias of <DYNAMIC talkgroup>. Once the radio is connected, you hear a dynamic regroup tone, the radio display shows <DYNAMIC channel> with temporary green color intelligent backlight and you hear a Voice Announcement. Note:

When the radio loses the GPS signal, the GPS icon blinks and the radio sounds two high-

pitched tones repetitively to indicate that the A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s GPS has failed to operate. The radio display shows the red intelligent light. Note:

If the first matched channel is not configured with Voice Announcement, no Voice Announcement is played. The system sends a message to your radio. The radio display shows a direct text message content without any user operation. This message indicates you are currently present in a Geofence area. This TMS remains open on the display until user presses exit/

home to exit this screen. Note:

If there is another incoming text message before you exit the previous message, the message screen shall be refreshed to show the latest message. The following procedure guides you to exit the text message received. Press the Menu Select button below EXIT or to return to Home screen. The other operations are the same as normal dynamic regroup command. 111 English Draft When the radio exits the Geofence area, your radio reverts to original channel or newly assigned talkgroup. The radio display shows the new channel together with Voice Announcement to indicate the changes. Voice Announcement of the new channel only works if that channel is configured with Voice Announcement. Mission Critical Geofence This feature allows the radio to use the GPS receiver to determine radio location at frequent intervals. This feature also allows the radio to evaluate if the radio is within the Geofence area in real time. Check with your dealer or qualified technician to programme the geofence coordinates and actions. Entering Mission Critical Geofence When the radio enters the predefined Geofence area, the radio displays <Geofence Alias> with intelligent backlight and the user hears a Voice Announcement. Zone and channel alias of the Geofence area is displayed. If the radio is set to manual, the user can choose either to proceed with zone and channel change or cancel the change. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 112 English The radio then connects to the designated talkgroup. The radio displays the talkgroup alias and dynamic regroup tone sounds. The transmit power level changes and the radio shows a direct text message content without any user operation. Note:

Depending on how your radio is programmed, you may or may not be alerted by Voice Announcement (VA), TMS display, Intelligent Backlight, and the Transmit Power Level. The user will be alerted only if these indicators are configured in the radio. The VA can be programmed to alert continuously or momentarily. Note:

If Site Selectable Alert (SSA) is enabled, the radio mutes any alert that is received when entering the Geofence area and unmutes when exiting. Exiting Mission Critical Geofence When the radio exits the Geofence area, the radio reverts to the original transmit power level, intelligent lighting, channel or newly assigned talkgroup. Voice announcement is cancelled or the user hears a pre-

programmed VA tone. The radio displays the new Draft channel and a message is received to indicate the changes. Trunking System Controls Operating in Failsoft System The failsoft system ensures continuous radio communication during a trunked system failure. If a trunking system fails completely, the radio goes into failsoft operation and automatically switches to its failsoft channel. During failsoft operation, your radio transmits and receives in conventional operation on a predetermined frequency. You hear a medium-

pitched tone and the display shows FAILSOFT. When the trunking system returns to normal operation, your radio automatically leaves failsoft operation and returns to trunked operation. To continue in Failsoft and to communicate with other talkgroups, refer to the following procedure. 1 Rotate the Mode Knob to change to a different repeater frequency. 2 Press the PTT button to talk, and release the button to listen. Out-of-Range Radio When your radio goes out of the range of the system, it can no longer lock onto a control channel. You hear a low-pitched tone and/or the display shows the currently selected zone/channel combination and OUT OF RANGE. Your radio remains in this out-of-

range condition until it locks onto a control channel, it locks onto a failsoft channel, or it is turned off. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s SmartZone The SmartZone feature extends communications beyond the reach of a single-trunked site (antenna location) when operating in a SmartZone system. SmartZone units provide expanded wide-area coverage. SmartZone automatically switches the radio to a different site when the current site signal becomes unacceptable. This usually happens when the vehicle in which the radio is located is driven out of the range of one site, and into the range of another. 113 English Draft Under normal conditions, a SmartZone-enabled radio functions invisibly to the operator. However, the operator does have some manual controls on the Control Head the RSSI menu entry. This button can be used to check, or change, the SmartZone operation. Site Trunking Feature If the zone controller loses communication with any site, that site reverts to site trunking. The display shows the currently selected zone/

channel combination and SITE TRUNKING. Note:

When this occurs, you can communicate only with other radios within your trunking site. Locking and Unlocking a Site This feature allows your radio to lock onto a specific site and not roam among wide-area talkgroup sites. This feature should be used with caution, since it inhibits roaming to another site in a wide-area system. You can toggle the lock state between locked and unlocked by pressing the preprogrammed Site Lock/

Unlock button. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 114 English Follow the procedure to lock and unlock a site via the radio menu. 1 or to SITE. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SITE. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

To lock the site, press the Menu Select button directly below LOCK. The display shows SITE LOCKED. To unlock the site, press the Menu Select button directly below UNLK. The display shows SITE UNLOCKED. The radio saves the new site lock state and returns to the Home screen. Site Display and Search Button The Site Display and Site Search button allows you to view the name of the current site or force your radio to change to a new one. Viewing the Current Site Perform one of the following actions:

Draft A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Press the preprogrammed Site Search button. or to RSSI and press the Menu Select button directly below RSSI. Announcement calls are handled in two different ways, depending on the trunked central controller configuration. The two types are called ruthless and non-ruthless preemption. The display shows momentarily the name of the current site and its corresponding received signal strength indicator (RSSI). Changing the Current Site Perform one of the following actions:

Press and hold down the preprogrammed Site Search button. Press and hold down the Menu Select button directly below RSSI. You hear a tone and the display shows momentary SCANNING SITE. When the radio finds a new site, it returns to the Home screen. Trunked Announcement The announcement capability allows you to make announcements to the entire user group, as well as monitor talkgroup calls and other announcements. Ruthless Preemption When a ruthless preemption announcement call is initiated, the requesting radio begins transmitting immediately. All associated talkgroup calls taking place on other channels are immediately halted, and the radios are steered to the announcement call. Transmitting radios continue to transmit until the PTT button is released, at which time they also unmute for the announcement call. Individual calls (Private Conversation and telephone interconnect) are not affected. Non-

Ruthless Preemption When a non-ruthless preemption announcement is initiated, the initiating unit receives a telephone-

type busy tone, followed by a call 115 English Draft back when all associated talkgroup conversations end. Once an announcement call is pending, any attempts by other users to initiate a talkgroup call will result in a telephone-type busy tone. These users will not receive a call back until the announcement call is complete. Initiating an Announcement Ensure your radio has been programmed to allow announcement calls. Blank This option allows the user to power on and power off the radio through the Power button regardless of the current state of the Ignition. Tx Inhibit This option allows the user to power on and power off the radio through the Power button regardless of the current state of the Ignition. In addition, if the Ignition is not present, then all transmissions are inhibited. This includes receiving any Trunking dispatch communications since the radio will not affiliate with the Trunking systems. 1 Turn the Mode Knob to locate the announcement-

PTT Tx Inhibit t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A group mode. 2 Press the PTT button to initiate the announcement. Ignition Switch Options This feature allows the user to select the functionality of the radio based on the Ignition State of the radio users vehicle. The following options are available. 116 English This option allows the user to power on and power off the radio through the Power button regardless of the current state of the Ignition. In addition, if the Ignition is not present, then all PTT button transmissions are inhibited. However, the radio is able to affiliate with the Trunking systems. Required This option allows the user to power on the radio only if the Ignition is present. The radio can be powered off either through Power button press or when Ignition is Draft lost. In addition, the radio automatically powers on when the Ignition is present only if the radio was turned off due to the ignition being removed. This option allows the radio to power off when Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer expires, or, when Ignition Auto Power Off Timer expires. Soft Power Off This option allows the user to power on the radio either through Power button presses or when the Ignition is detected. Meanwhile, if the Power button was pressed or the Ignition was removed, the radio will be turned off. This option allows the radio to power off when Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer expires, or, when Ignition Auto Power Off Timer expires. Ignition Only Power Up This option allows the user to power on the radio only when Ignition is detected and will power off when it is removed. The radio does not power on or off with the Power button press. This option allows the radio to power off when Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer expires, or, when Ignition Auto Power Off Timer expires. Note:

While Ignition is not present, the radio powers-off with a radio-user Power Off button / knob selection if the radio was powered-up with an Emergency Power Up footswitch-press or Ignition Auto Power Off timer is running. While Ignition is present, the radio powers-on with a radio-user Power On button / knob selection only if the radio was powered-down with Inactivity Auto Power Off timer. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Using Emergency Power Up This feature allows the user to power on the radio and automatically transmits an emergency mode transmission on personalities with emergency enabled, with the use of a footswitch. In addition, when the Ignition Switch option is set to either Tx Inhibit or PTT Tx Inhibit, this feature will not be available to the users. Press the footswitch to turn on the radio and launch Emergency. A tone sounds and the display shows Emergency. 117 English Draft Auto Power Off Timer Auto Power Off feature powers off the radio when no user actions occur during a preprogrammed length of time. There are two different versions of Auto Power Off:

the timer expires or the timer is reset. The radio automatically powers off after the timer expires. The duration of the timer is preprogrammed. Voice Announcement Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer Ignition Auto Power Off Timer This timer begins once the radio is power-on. While the timer is active any user interaction with the radio resets the timer. This timer begins once the vehicle key is removed, when the voltage at the ignition sense is removed. While the timer is active any user interaction with the radio resets the timer. When the vehicle key is reapplied, the voltage at the ignition is reconnected, this timer is stopped. Although both Inactivity Auto Power Off and Ignition Auto Power Off can be enabled together, Ignition Auto Power Off timer is mutually exclusive with Inactivity Auto Power Off timer when both are enabled. During the last two minutes of the timer countdown, the radio generates continuous low tone and blinks Powering Off warning on the display until t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 118 English This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current feature mode, zone or channel the user has just assigned. This audio indicator can be customized per customer requirements. This is typically useful when the user is having difficulty reading the content shown on the display. Each voice announcement is within a limit of three seconds maximum. The sum duration of all different voice announcements in a radio shall be no more than 1000 seconds. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your agent if Voice Announcement is available for the feature you need. The two options of priority for the Voice Announcement available are:

Draft High Enables the voice of the feature to announce even when the radio is receiving calls. Low Disables the voice of the feature from announcing when the radio is receiving calls. You hear a voice announcement when the features below are preprogrammed in the radio. The radio powers up. The radio announces the current zone and channel it is transmitting. Press the preprogrammed voice announcement button (which specifically programmed to playback the current zone and channel). The radio announces the current zone and channel it is transmitting. Note:

Pressing this preprogrammed playback button enables the voice feature to announce in High priority. All the three programmable buttons at the side of the radio support this feature. Change to a new zone. The radio announces the current zone and channel it is transmitting. Change to a new channel remaining within the current zone. The radio announces the current channel. Press either the Menu Select button or preprogrammed button or switch of the radio to launch or terminate Scan, PL Disabled, Talkaround/Direct or Transmit Inhibit. The radio announces the corresponding feature activation or deactivation. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Site Selectable Alerts (ASTRO 25) A Site Selectable Alert (SSA) is an Intelligent Lighting indicator together with audio alert sent to radios at a site or a few sites to notify the users when there is a special situation that they need to be aware of. Only authorized radios are enabled to send SSA. Upon the activation of a SSA, the receiving radios display the alert alias and generate the periodic alert tone. Note:

Alert alias, alert tone, and alert period can be preprogrammed. Alert period is the duration for the radio to repeat the alert tone. An interval of 5 seconds might impact the battery 119 English Draft life of the radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details. When mixing SSA with received voice audio, the SSA alert is reduced in volume to ensure that the voice message is still heard clearly. Therefore, it is important that the SSA audio files are created with clear loud audio to ensure they can still be heard clearly when played at reduced levels. Sending SSA Notification to Single Site 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 or to START ALERT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to the desired Site Alias. Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Select Alert screen. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 120 English 5 or to select the desired Alert Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below SEND. The display shows SENDING REQ. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows REQ FAILED. If the request is successful, the display shows REQ SUCCESSFUL. If the site is not available, the display shows <SITE ALIAS> NOT AVAILABLE. If the site does not exist, the display shows <SITE ALIAS> DOES NOT EXIST. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <ALERT ALIAS> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. Draft Sending SSA Notification to Single Site Via Manual Entry 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 or to START ALERT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [SITEID ENTRY] to send alert via manual entry. Press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT. The display shows the Enter SiteID screen. 5 Key in the desired Site ID and press the Menu Select button directly below OK. If a correct Site ID is entered, the display shows the Select Alert screen. If a wrong Site ID is entered, the display shows INVALID ID and prompts to enter the Site ID again. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 6 or to select the desired Alert Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below SEND. The display shows SENDING REQ. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows REQ FAILED. If the request is successful, the display shows REQ SUCCESSFUL. If the site is not available, the display shows <SITE ID> NOT AVAILABLE. If the site does not exist, the display shows <SITE ID> DOES NOT EXIST. 7 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <ALERT ALIAS> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. Sending SSA Notification to All Sites 1 or to SSA. 121 English Draft 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 5 or to START ALERT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [All SITES] and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Select Alert screen. or to select the desired <Alert Alias> and press the Menu Select button directly below SEND. The display shows SENDING REQ. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows REQ FAILED. If the request is successful, the display shows REQ SUCCESSFUL. If one or more sites are unavailable, the display shows NOT ALL SITES AVAILABLE. Repeat 3. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <ALERT ALIAS> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. Sending SSA Notification to All Available Sites 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 5 or to START ALERT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [All AVAIL] and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Select Alert screen. or to select the desired <Alert Alias> and press the Menu Select button directly below SEND. The display shows SENDING REQ. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows REQ FAILED. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 122 English Draft If the request is successful, the display shows REQ SUCCESSFUL. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <ALERT ALIAS> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 or to STOP ALERT and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to select the desired Site Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below SEND. The display shows SENDING REQ. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows REQ FAILED. If the request is successful, the display shows REQ SUCCESSFUL. If the site is not available, the display shows <SITE ALIAS> NOT AVAILABLE. If the site does not exist, the display shows <SITE ALIAS> DOES NOT EXIST. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 5 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. The SSA Alert for the designated site stops. Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site Via Manual Entry 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 or to STOP ALERT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 123 English Draft The display shows the Select Site screen. Stopping SSA Notification of All Sites 4 or to [SITEID ENTRY] and press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT. The display shows the Enter SiteID screen. 5 Key in the required Site ID and press the Menu Select button directly below SEND. One of the following scenarios occur:

If a wrong Site ID is entered, the display shows INVALID ID and prompts to enter the Site ID again. If a correct Site ID is entered, the display shows SENDING REQ. If the request is successful, the display shows REQ SUCCESSFUL. If the single site is not available, the display shows <SITE ID> NOT AVAILABLE. If the single site does not exist, the display shows <SITE ID> DOES NOT EXIST. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. The SSA Alert for the designated site stops. 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 or to STOP ALERT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [ALL SITES] and press the Menu Select button directly below SEND. The display shows SENDING REQ. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows REQ FAILED. If the request is successful, the display shows REQ SUCCESSFUL. If one or more sites are not available, the display shows NOT ALL SITES AVAILABLE. Repeat step 3. 5 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 124 English Draft The SSA Alert for all sites stop. Stopping SSA Notification of All Available Sites 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 or to STOP ALERT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [All AVAIL] and press the Menu Select button directly below SEND. The display shows SENDING REQ. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows REQ FAILED. If the request is successful, the display shows REQ SUCCESSFUL. 5 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. The SSA Alert for all available sites stop. Channel Change on Off Hook on All Channels This feature enables the mode of the radio to be changed based on the HUB on/off-hook state on all control heads. Whenever the radio goes off-hook, the radio changes to a preprogrammed zone channel specifically for off-

hook state. When the user returns the radio to on-

hook state, it reverts to its previous channel zone before the radio goes off-hook. When the radio is in off-hook state, manual mode change (including mode change triggered by third party devices) is allowed. Radio reverts back to the last mode before off-hook once the radio goes on-

hook. Note:

During PL Defeats and Suspend Scan during on-hook state, the radio is converted to work in new channel and Channel Change on Off Hook feature is suspended until these conditions end. We do not recommend that Hub Suspend Scan" and "Channel Change on Off Hook" to be enabled simultaneously. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 125 English Draft During Dynamic Regroup channel selector lock state, Emergency, Transmit Inhibit, radio lock, or when external key loaded is attached to the radio, the Channel Change on Off Hook feature is suspended until these conditions end. The Off Hook State for APX Dual Radio Setup For Dual Radio, the state of the HUB on the unselected radio is always considered as on-hook. The state of the HUB of the selected radio is always reflected as the actual states of the HUB. When the HUB is placed off-

hook, the selected radio makes channel change per CPS configuration, and the unselected radio does not trigger channel change. With Channel Change on Off Hook enabled, when the HUB is placed off-

hook, and there is radio switch, the new selected radio moves to the target channel zone on off hook, and the new unselected radio reverts to the last user selected channel before off-hook. The Off Hook State for Multiple Radios Setup When there are multi-control heads connected, the states of these HUBs reflect the active control head(s) state. Any HUB placed off-hook by active control head(s) makes the radio goes off-hook state. Only when all HUBs are placed on-hook, the radio can be in on-

hook state. Note:

This feature needs to be carefully enabled. Users must also be familiar with the functionality of this feature as they have to be aware that removing the microphone triggers mode change most of the time. Low Voltage Threshold Warning This feature is created for APX mobile radio to provide warning for low voltage threshold. A specific external device is attached to the radio to monitor the automobile voltage. When the car battery went lower than a pre-defined threshold, the external device asserts the Vehicular Interface Port (VIP) input to the radio. When the voltage of the battery becomes t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 126 English Draft A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s normal, the external device de-asserts the VIP input to the radio. Wi-Fi The voltage threshold is customized in the external device settings. When the VIP switch turns on, the VIP asserts input to the radio. The radio immediately initiates a 15 seconds of low Voltage Pre-alert Timer. If the status of the VIP changed before this time-out timer ends, the radio returns to normal operation. If the status from the VIP unchanged when the time-

out timer ends, the radio shows LOW BATTERY on the display and also sounds low battery/voltage alert tone. The radio sounds a short, high-pitched tone immediately after the PTT button is released. Note:

If the mobile radio does not have a control head connected, the bricks can only alert the user with battery alert tone and the transmit chirp. This feature allows you to turn Wi-Fi on or off. Wi-Fi can be used for wireless programming of the radio with the Radio Management tool. [3]

Note:

Wi-Fi Network Name (SSID) for the radio to connect to must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information Turning Wi-Fi On or Off The following methods are options on how to turn Wi-

Fi on or off. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Turning Wi-Fi on or off via the preprogrammed button:

3 This feature is available to capable and ordered option. 127 English Draft a) To toggle the Wi-Fi on or off, press the preprogrammed Wi-Fi button. This button must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Turning Wi-Fi on or off via the radio menu button:

a) or to WiFi and press the Menu Select button directly below WiFi. If the display shows WiFi Status being Off, press the Menu Select button directly below On. If the display shows WiFi Status as Searching, Connecting, Connected or No Service, press the Menu Select button directly below Off to turn Wi-Fi off. Checking the Wi-Fi Configuration and Status of the Radio 1 Perform one of the following actions:

The display shows the current status of the Wi-Fi as described next. Searching Looking for available Wi-Fi networks that have been preprogrammed into the radio. Connecting In the process of connecting to a found Wi-Fi network. Connected Connected to one of the preprogrammed Wi-Fi networks. No Service No available networks or connection with one of the networks failed. If the radio is Wi-Fi connected, you see a Wi-Fi on the display.In signal strength indicator, addition, the WiFi menu shows Connected under the connection Status heading, what network you are connected to under the Network heading, and the signal strength to that network under the Sig Strength heading. Long press the preprogrammed Wi-Fi button. or to WiFi and press the Menu Select button directly below WiFi. 2 Press to exit. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 128 English Draft Utilities Viewing Recent Calls This feature allows you to view the recent incoming and outgoing call information of the following call types:

Call Alert Selective Call Private Call Phone Call (Outgoing Only) Note:

The radio can also be preprogrammed to log only the radio IDs associated with incoming Dispatch Calls. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Viewing recent calls via the radio menu:

a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below or to RCNT. RCNT to access the RECENT CALLS feature screen. or to scroll through the list. c) d) To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below BACK, PTT button. or the The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Selecting the Power Level Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. This feature enables you to reduce the transmit power level for specific case that requires a lower power level. You can select the power level at which your radio transmits. The radio always turns on to the default setting. Power level LOW enables a shorter transmitting distance and to conserve power. Power level HIGH enables a longer transmitting distance. The following methods are options on how to select the power level. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably 129 English Draft depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Selecting the Power Level via the Transmit Power Level switch:

a) Use the preprogrammed Transmit Power Level switch to toggle the power level between low and high power. Selecting the Power Level via the radio menu:

or to PWR. a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below PWR. The display shows LOW POWER and the low power icon or the display shows HIGH POWER and the high power icon. Selecting a Radio Profile This feature allows you to manually switch the visual and audio settings of the radio. The display, backlight, alert tones, and audio settings are defined according to the preprogrammed radio settings of each radio profile. Please refer to a qualified technician for more information. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 130 English Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. The following methods are options on how to select a radio profile. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Selecting a radio profile via the preprogrammed Profile button:

a) Press the preprogrammed Profile button. b) c) Press the Menu Select button directly below or to scroll through the menu selections. SEL to select the required radio profile, or press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to exit the screen without making any changes. The radio returns to the Home screen. The profile name on the Home screen indicates the current selected radio profile. Selecting a radio profile via the radio menu:

Draft a) or to PRFL and press the Menu Select button directly below PRFL to access the Profiles feature screen. or to scroll through the menu selections. b) c) Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to select the required radio profile, or press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to exit the screen without making any changes. The radio returns to the Home screen. The profile name on the Home screen indicates the current selected radio profile. Controlling the Display Backlight You can enable or disable the radios display backlight as needed, if poor light conditions make the display or keypad difficult to read. Depending on how your radio is preprogrammed, you can also maintain a minimum backlight level on the radio's front display. Perform one of the following actions:

To toggle the backlight on or off, press the DIM button. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s To turn the backlight on, press any key of the keypad, the Menu Select or Menu Navigation buttons, or any programmable radio controls or buttons Turning the Keypad Tones On or Off You can enable and disable keypad tones as needed. Turning the tones on or off via the preprogrammed Keypad Mute button:

a) To turn the tones off or on, press the preprogrammed Keypad Mute button. Turning the tones on or off via the radio menu:

or to MUTE. a) b) Press the Menu Select button directly below MUTE. The display shows momentary TONES OFF, indicating that the tones are disabled or the display shows momentary TONES ON, and you hear a short tone indicating that the tones are enabled. 131 English Draft Turning Voice Mute On or Off You can enable and disable voice transmission, if needed. Turning Voice Mute off or on via the preprogrammed Voice Mute button:

a) To turn the feature off or on, press the preprogrammed Voice Mute button. Turning Voice Mute on or off via the radio menu:

a) or to VMUT and press the Menu Select button directly below VMUT. The display shows momentary VOICE MUTE OFF, and you hear a short tone, indicating that the feature is disabled or the display shows momentary VOICE MUTE ON, and you hear a short tone, indicating that the feature is enabled. Using the Time-Out Timer This feature turns off the transmitter of your radio. You cannot transmit longer than the preset timer setting. If you attempt to do so, the radio automatically stops your transmission, and you hear a talk-prohibit tone. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 132 English The timer is defaulted at 60 seconds, but it can be preprogrammed from 3 to 120 seconds, in 15-second intervals, or it can be disabled entirely for each radio mode, by a qualified radio technician. Note:

You hear a brief, low-pitched, warning tone four seconds before the transmission times out. 1 Hold down the PTT button longer than the preprogrammed time. You hear a short, low-pitched warning tone, the transmission is cut-off, and the LED goes out until you release the PTT button. 2 Release the PTT button. The timer resets. 3 To re-transmit, press the PTT button. The time-out timer restarts and the LED lights up solid red. Using Conventional Squelch Operation Features This feature filters out unwanted calls with low signal strength or channels that have a higher than normal background noise. Draft 4 Press to return to the selected channel. Selective Switch 1 or to SQL. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SQL. The display shows SQUELCH XX, where XX is the value for the current squelch. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below

+ to increase the squelch volume. Press the Menu Select button directly below -

to decrease the squelch volume. Analog Options Tone Private Line (PL), Digital Private-Line (DPL), and carrier squelch can be available

(preprogrammed) per channel. Mode Result Carrier squelch (C) PL or DPL You hear all traffic on a channel. The radio responds only to your messages. Digital Options One or more of the following options may be preprogrammed in your radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Option Result Digital Carrier-Operated Squelch (COS) You hear any digital traf-

fic. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Normal Squelch You hear any digital traf-

fic having the correct net-

work access code. You hear any digital traf-

fic having the correct net-

work access code and correct talkgroup. Using the PL Defeat Feature This feature allows you to override any coded squelch

(DPL or PL) that might be preprogrammed to a channel. The radio also unmutes to any digital activity on a digital channel. Place the preprogrammed PL Defeat switch in the PL Defeat position. 133 English Draft One of the following scenarios occurs:

You hear any activity on the channel. The radio is muted if no activity is present. Note:

When this feature is active, the Carrier Squelch status indicator is displayed. Digital PTT ID Support This feature allows you to see the radio ID (number) of the radio from whom you are currently receiving a transmission. This ID, consisting up to a maximum of eight characters, can be viewed by both the receiving radio and the dispatcher. The ID number of your radio is also automatically sent every time the PTT button is pressed. This is a per-

channel feature. For digital voice transmissions, the ID of your radio is sent continuously during the voice message. Smart PTT Feature (Conventional Only) Smart PTT is a per-personality, programmable feature used in conventional radio systems to keep radio users from talking over other radio conversations. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 134 English When smart PTT is enabled in your radio, you cannot transmit on an active channel. If you try to transmit on an active smart-PTT channel, you hear an alert tone, and the transmission is inhibited. The LED lights up solid yellow to indicate that the channel is busy. The following table shows the variations of smart PTT:

Mode Description Transmit Inhibit on Busy Chan-

nel with Carrier Transmit Inhibit on Busy Chan-

nel with Wrong Squelch Code Quick-Key Over-

ride You cannot transmit if any traffic is detected on the channel. You cannot transmit on an active channel with a squelch code or (if secure-equipped) encryption key other than your own. If the PL code is the same as yours, the transmission is not prevented. Your radio must be preprogram-

med to allow you to use Quick-

Key Override. This feature can work in conjunction with either of the two above variations. You Draft Mode Description can override the transmit-inhibit state by quick-keying the radio. In other words, two PTT button presses within the preprogram-

med time limit. Transmit Inhibit This feature is available for APCO 25 trunking, Type II trunking and Conventional operations for all APX radios. When Transmit Inhibit feature is enabled, the radio stops all transmission including voice and data. The radio can receive messages but is not able to reply the acknowledgment request of the received message. User can physically control the transmission of the radio especially during operation in hazardous environments with this feature. An environment is considered hazardous when the power emitted by the radio power amplifier could initiate an explosion or other dangerous reactions. When the Transmit Inhibit feature is disabled, the radio functions according to its normal operations. The radio sounds alert tone when user enters or exits this feature and also when PTT is pressed. Note:

Acknowledgement of any messages required from the radio is not transmitted if the Transmit Inhibition is enabled. Enabling Transmit Inhibition A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Perform one of the following actions:

or to TXIN. Press the Menu Select button below TXIN. Turn off the ignition through Ignition Sense Line. Note:

If the user has disabled TX Inhibit via the menu and then moves the switch to the position where TX Inhibit is enabled, the new value overwrites the menu value. The display shows TX INHIBIT ON. You hear a sequence of short, low-high tones to indicate transmission is inhibited. Pressing PTT triggers the radio sounds a constant short, low-pitched tone (reject tone). 135 English Draft Note:

The status of the Transmit Inhibit does not change after the radio powers up. The softkey TXIN is created to ease the user of inhibition transmission besides relying solely on Ignition Sense Line. Only if the Ignition Sense Line is on, the softkey TXIN works. If the Ignition Sense Line is on, user can always turn on or off the Transmit Inhibition using the softkey TXIN; but when the Ignition Sense Line is off, function of softkey TXIN is suspended, and the Transmit Inhibition function is always off. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A If PTT TX Inhibit is enabled, when using multi control head with one active configuration, with the PTT pressed on the active control head, any press on the programmable button of the other control head which meant for that control head to be active control head will cause an unstoppable long low-pitched tone (Talk Prohibit Tone). The display shows TX INHIBIT This behavior can be stopped by pressing PTT button again on the active control head Disabling Transmit Inhibition Perform one of the following actions:

136 English or to TXIN. Press the Menu Select button below TXIN. Turn on the ignition through Ignition Sense Line. Note:

If the user has disabled TX Inhibit via the softkey and then moves the switch to the position where TX Inhibit is enabled, the new value overwrites the menu value. The display shows TX INHIBIT OFF. You hear a sequence of short, high-low tone (Transmit Inhibit Off tone) to indicate transmission is back to normal operation. General Radio Information Your radio contains information on the following:

Radio Information Control Assignments IP Display Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You Draft hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Accessing the Radio Information This feature displays the following radio information:

Host Version Secure Version CH 1 4 Version (depending on the number of channels connected.) Siren Version Model Number ESN Flash Code Tuning Version DSP Version KG (Secure Algorithm) Serial Number Flash Size & Type RF Band(s) Processor Version MCHIB Version CHIB Version TIB Version TRC Version A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s VRS Version URC Version DVRS App Version (only when DVRS is available) DVRS DSP Version (only when DVRS is available) DVRS CP Version (only when DVRS is available) AUX CH Version Note:

To return to the Home screen, press time. at any 1 2 or to INFO and press the Menu Select button directly below INFO. or to RADIO INFO and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Information screen. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the various information. Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK to return to the previous screenp. to return to the Home screen . Press 137 English Draft Viewing the IP Information Viewing the Control Assignments This feature displays the device name, IP address, and status of your radio. Note:

The device name of your radio is preprogrammed. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. This feature displays the programmable radio functions assigned to the controls of your radio for the currently selected channel. See Programmable Features on page 23 for more information on the various programmable features of your radio. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Info button. or to INFO and press the Menu Select button directly below INFO. 2 or to IP INFO and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the various information. Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK to return to the previous screen. Press to return to the Home screen. t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A Press the preprogrammed Info button. or to INFO and press the Menu Select button directly below INFO. 2 or to CONTROL MAP and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Control Map screen. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the various information. Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK to return to the previous screen. Press to return to the Home screen. 138 English Draft A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s External Alarms (Horn and Lights) Using Permanent Horn and Lights All control heads can be equipped for external alarms

(horn and lights) that are activated when a Call Alert page, Private Conversation call, or phone call is received. The radio always powers up with the horn and lights feature enabled. Note:

The horn and lights feature must be enabled by a qualified radio technician. Using Non-Permanent Horn and Lights 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily. The last selected alarm(s) are enabled, and the display shows the enabled alarm(s) alternating with the selected mode, until it is turned off. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to turn off the alarm(s). The display shows HORN/LITES OFF. If Permanent Horn and Lights is enabled, horn and lights will automatically turn on when the radio powers up. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L once to turn off the alarm(s). 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to enable the last selected alarm(s). The display briefly shows the enabled alarms, and then reverts back to the selected mode. Changing the Selected Alarms 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L until the display shows the required alarm. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below H

+L to turn on both horn and lights. Press the Menu Select button directly below Lgts to turn on the lights. Press the Menu Select button directly below Horn to turn on the horn. 139 English Draft One of the following scenarios occurs:

If you choose H+L, the display shows HORN/

LITES ON. If you choose LGTS, the display shows LIGHTS ON. If you choose HORN, the display shows HORN ON. An OFF entry is shown at the softkey when one of the alarms is active. Selecting OFF deactivates the current active alarm. Receiving a Call While Alarms are Turned On When you receive a call with the Alarms turned on, you hear the vehicles horn sounds for four seconds, and/or the car lights turn on for 60 seconds. The display shows the type of call received (CALL, PAGE, or PHONE) and the selected mode name. The time interval can be modified by a qualified radio technician. Turning Off Non-Rearmable External Alarms 1 Perform one of the following actions:

t s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 140 English Press the Menu Select button directly below CALL, PAGE or PHON to turn off the external alarm(s) and access that feature. Press the PTT button or any control-head button to turn off the external alarm(s). The Volume Knob and the DIM button have no effect on the state of the external alarm(s). 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to rearm the horn and lights feature. Turning Off Rearmable External Alarms Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below CALL, PAGE or PHON to turn off the external alarm(s) and access that feature. The external alarm(s) is turned off and automatically rearmed so that when you exit the entry, the external alarm(s) will automatically turn on. Press the PTT button or any control head button other than the Menu Select button directly below H/L to turn off the external alarm(s). The external alarm(s) is turned off and automatically rearmed so that when you Draft exit the entry, the external alarm(s) will automatically turn on. Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L to turn off the external alarm(s) and exit the Horn and Lights feature. Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to rearm the horn and lights feature. The Volume Knob and the DIM button have no effect on the state of the external alarm(s). A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 141 English Draft Helpful Tips Radio Care The following are suggestions to assist you in troubleshooting possible operating problems. Caution:

The cables that connect to the rear of the radio could have live voltage on some of their pins. Do not remove or reconnect these cables. Only a qualified radio technician should perform this task. Service performed by unauthorized personnel may cause the radio to transmit an emergency alarm even if the unit is turned off. If your radio is locked up or the display shows FAIL 01/09, turn the radio off and then back on. If this does not correct the condition, take the radio to a qualified radio technician for service. If radio operation is intermittent, check with other persons using the system for similar problems before taking the radio in for service. Similar problems indicate a system malfunction rather than a radio failure. If symptoms persist or, if your unit exhibits other problems, contact a qualified radio technician. Cleaning the External Surface of the Radio Caution:

Do not use solvents to clean your radio. Spirits may permanently damage the radio housing. Do not submerge the radio in detergent solution. 1 Combine one teaspoon of mild diswashing detergent to one gallon of water (0.5% solution). 2 Apply the solution sparingly with a stiff, non-

metallic, short-bristled brush, making sure excess detergent does not get entrapped near the connectors, controls or crevices. 3 Dry the radio thoroughly with a soft, lint-free cloth. Cleaning the External Plastic Surface The detergent-water solution should be applied sparingly with a stiff, non-metallic, short-bristled brush to work all loose dirt away from the radio. s p T i l u f p e H l 142 English Draft A soft, absorbent, lint-free cloth or tissue should be used to remove the solution and dry the radio. Make sure that no water remains entrapped near the connectors, cracks, or crevices. H e p l f u l i T p s 143 English Draft Accessories The accessory link below is for APX radios. Not all accessories are FCC certified to operate with all APX models and/or bandsplits. Please refer to the specific APX radio price pages for a list of FCC certified accessories or contact your sales representative for accessory compatibility. http://www.motorolasolutions.com/APX Note:

GPS only antenna is only used in either a single band UHF or 700/800 application where the Public Safety Microphone (PSM) is used with the corresponding PSM antenna. This antenna is only for GPS reception and cannot be used for receive/transmit operation at UHF, VHF or 700/800. This antenna is never to be used on the PSM. s e i r o s s e c c A 144 English Draft Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range Special Channel Assignments Emergency Channel If you are in imminent and grave danger at sea and require emergency assistance, use VHF Channel 16 to send a distress call to nearby vessels and the United States Coast Guard. Transmit the following information, in this order:

1 MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY. 2 THIS IS _____________________, CALL SIGN __________. State the name of the vessel in distress 3 times, followed by the call sign or other identification of the vessel, stated 3 times. 3 Repeat MAYDAY and the name of the vessel. 4 WE ARE LOCATED AT _______________________. State the position of the vessel in distress, using any information that will help responders to locate you, e.g.:

latitude and longitude bearing (state whether you are using true or magnetic north) distance to a well-known landmark vessel course, speed or destination 5 State the nature of the distress. 6 Specify what kind of assistance you need. 7 State the number of persons on board and the number needing medical attention, if any. 8 Mention any other information that would be helpful to responders, such as type of vessel, vessel length and/or tonnage, hull color, etc. 9 OVER. 10 Wait for a response. 11 If you do not receive an immediate response, remain by the radio and repeat the transmission at intervals until you receive a response. Be prepared to follow any instructions given to you. Non-Commercial Call Channel For non-commercial transmissions, such as fishing reports, rendezvous arrangements, repair scheduling, or berthing information, use VHF Channel 9. Operating Frequency Requirements M a r i t i m e R a d o U s e i i n t h e V H F F r e q u e n c y R a n g e A radio designated for shipboard use must comply with Federal Communications Commission Rule Part 80 as follows:

145 English Draft on ships subject to Part II of Title III of the Communications Act, the radio must be capable of operating on the 156.800 MHz frequency. on ships subject to the Safety Convention, the radio must be capable of operating:

in the simplex mode on the ship station transmitting frequencies specified in the 156.025 157.425 MHz frequency band, and in the semiduplex mode on the two frequency channels specified in the table below. Note:

Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters. Additional information about operating requirements in the Maritime Services can be obtained from the full text of FCC Rule Part 80 and from the US Coast Guard. Table 1: VHF Marine Channel List Channel Num-

Frequency (MHz) ber Transmit Receive e g n a R y c n e u q e r F F H V e h t n i i e s U o d a R e m i t i r a M 146 English 1 2

*

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13**

14 15**

16 17**

156.050 156.100 156.150 156.200 156.250 156.300 156.350 156.400 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 156.800 156.850 160.650 160.700 160.750 160.800 160.850 160.950 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 156.800 156.850 Draft 18 19 20

*

22

*

24 25 26 27 28 60

*

62 63

*

65 156.900 156.950 157.000 157.050 157.100 157.150 157.200 157.250 157.300 157.350 157.400 156.025 156.075 156.125 156.175 156.225 156.275 161.500 161.550 161.600 161.650 161.700 161.750 161.800 161.850 161.900 161.950 162.000 160.625 160.675 160.725 160.775 160.825 160.875 66 67**

68 69 71 72 73 74 75 76 77**

78 79 80

*

*

*

156.325 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.625 156.675 156.725

***

***

156.875 156.925 156.975 157.025 157.075 157.125 157.175 160.925 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.675 156.725

***

***

161.525 161.575 161.625 161.675 161.725 161.775 M a r i t i m e R a d o U s e i i n t h e V H F F r e q u e n c y R a n g e 147 English Draft maritime use when it operates on the distress and safety frequencies specified in RSS-182 Section 7.3. Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources RS232 18V USB 3.6V SB9600 5V Input Volt-

age (Volts Peak-to-

peak) Max Data 115 Kbps 12 Mbps 9.6 Kbps Rate Impedance 5000 Ohm 90 Ohm 120 Ohm 157.225 157.275 157.325 157.375 157.425 161.825 161.875 161.925 161.975 162.025 84 85 86 87 88 Note:

* Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters.

** Low power (1 W) only.

*** Guard band. Note:

A in the Receive column indicates that the channel is transmit only. Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies The radio equipment does not employ a modulation other than the internationally adopted modulation for e g n a R y c n e u q e r F F H V e h t n i i e s U o d a R e m i t i r a M 148 English Draft Glossary This glossary is a list of specialized terms used in this manual. ACK Acknowledgment of communication. Active Channel A channel that has traffic on it. Analog Signal ARS ASTRO 25 ASTRO Conventional Autoscan An RF signal that has a continuous nature rather than a pulsed or discrete nature. Automatic Registration Service Motorola standard for wireless digital trunked communications. Motorola standard for wireless digital conventional communications. A feature that allows the radio to automatically scan the members of a scan list. Call Alert Carrier Squelch l G o s s a r y Privately page an individual by sending an audible tone. Feature that responds to the presence of an RF carrier by opening or unmuting (turning on) a receivers audio circuit. A squelch circuit silences the radio when no signal is being received so that the user does not have to listen to noise. Central Controller A software-controlled, computer-driven device that receives and generates data for the trunked radios assigned to it. It monitors and directs the operations of the trunked repeaters. A group of characteristics such as transmit/ receive frequency pairs, radio parameters, and encryption encoding. Channel AUX CH Auxiliary Control Head CHIB Control Head Interface Board 149 English Draft Control Channel Conventional In a trunking system, one of the channels that is used to provide a continuous, two-way/

data communications path between the central controller and all radios on the system. Typically refers to radio-to-

radio communications, sometimes through a repeater

(see Trunking). Conventional Scan List A scan list that includes only conventional channels. CP Cursor Deadlock Codeplug A visual tracking marker (a blinking line) that indicates a location on the display. Displayed by the radio after three failed attempts to unlock the radio. The radio must be powered off and on prior to another attempt. Digital Private Line (DPL) A type of coded squelch using data bursts. Similar to PL Digital Signal Dispatcher DSP Dynamic Regrouping DVRS ESN Failsoft except a digital code is used instead of a tone. An RF signal that has a pulsed, or discrete, nature, rather than a continuous nature. An individual who has radio system management duties. Digital Signal Processing A feature that allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios to a single special channel so they can communicate with each other. Digital Vehicular Repeater System Electrical Serial Number A feature that allows communications to take place even though the central controller has failed. Each trunked repeater in the system transmits a data word informing y r a s s o G l 150 English Draft every radio that the system has gone into failsoft. Monitor FCC FM Federal Communications Commission. Frequency Modulation Hang Up Disconnect. Home screen KVL LCD LED MCHB Menu Entry The first display information after the radio completes its self test. Key-variable loader: A device for loading encryption keys into the radio. Liquid crystal display. Light-emitting diode. Millennium Control Head Board A software-activated feature shown at the bottom of the display selection of these features is controlled by the button. Multi-System Talkgroup Scan List Network Access Code Non-Tactical/

Revert l G o s s a r y Check channel activity by pressing the Monitor button. If the channel is clear, you hear static. If the channel is in use, you hear conversation. It also serves as a way to check the volume level of the radio, since the radio opens the squelch when the monitor button is pressed. A scan list that can include both talkgroups (trunked) and channels (conventional). Network Access Code (NAC) operates on digital channels to reduce voice channel interference between adjacent systems and sites. The user talks on a preprogrammed emergency channel. The emergency alarm is sent out on this same channel. OTAR Over-the-air rekeying. 151 English Draft Page Personality A one-way alert, with audio and/or display messages. A set of unique features specific to a radio. PIN Personal Identification Number Preprogrammed Private

(Conversation) Call Private Line (PL) Programmable PTT Refers to a software feature that has been activated by a qualified radio technician. A feature that lets you have a private conversation with another radio user in the talkgroup. A sub-audible tone that is transmitted such that only receivers decoding the tone receives it. Refers to a radio control that can have a radio feature assigned to it. Push-To-Talk. The PTT button engages the transmitter and puts the radio in transmit Radio Frequency

(RF) Repeater Selective Call Selective Switch

(send) operation when pressed. The part of the general frequency spectrum between the audio and infrared light regions (about 10 kHz to 10,000,000 MHz). A conventional radio feature, where you talk through a receive/transmit facility that re-

transmits received signals, in order to improve communications range and coverage. A feature that allows you to call a selected individual, intended to provide privacy and to eliminate the annoyance of having to listen to conversations of no interest to you. Any digital P25 traffic having the correct Network Access Code and the correct talkgroup. y r a s s o G l 152 English Draft Squelch Standby Status Calls Tactical/ Non-

Revert Talkaround Talkgroup Special electronic circuitry, added to the receiver of a radio, that reduces, or cuts off, unwanted signals before they are heard in the speaker. An operating condition whereby the radios speaker is muted but still continues to receive data. Pre-defined text messages that allow the user to send a conditional message without talking. The user talks on the channel that was selected before the radio entered the emergency state. Bypass a repeater and talk directly to another unit for easy local unit-to-unit communications. An organization or group of radio users who communicate TMS Trunking Trunking Priority Monitor Scan List USK UTC with each other using the same communication path. Text Messaging Service The automatic sharing of communications paths between a large number of users (see Conventional). A scan list that includes talkgroups that are all from the same trunking system. Unique Shadow Key. Coordinated Universal Time. The international time standard

(formerly Greenwich Mean Time, or GMT). Zero hours UTC is midnight in Greenwich, England, which is located at 0 degrees longitude. Everything east of Greenwich (up to 180 degrees) is later in time;

everything west is earlier. There are 42 time authorities around the world that are constantly synchronizing with l G o s s a r y 153 English Draft each other. Abbreviated as UTC (English backronym =

Universal Time, Coordinated), it is also known as Zulu (Z) Time. Vehicular Repeater System A grouping of channels. VRS Zone y r a s s o G l 154 English Draft Limited Warranty MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:

MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, INC. (MOTOROLA) warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

ASTRO APX Mobile Ra-

dios One (1) Year Product Accessories One (1) Year MOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original i L m i t e d W a r r a n t y applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. 155 English Draft MOTOROLA offers the following optional extended service contracts. SERVICE FROM THE START (SfS) COMPREHENSIVE Provides for extended hardware repair coverage INCLUDING CHEMICAL, LIQUID, FIRE, AND OTHER PHYSICAL DAMAGE. Comprehensive coverage is available in conjunction with MOTOROLAS standard Commercial Warranty and starts from the FIRST DAY the radio is put into use. Service performed under this plan consists of repair or replacement of the covered equipment as set forth in the terms and conditions. Repairs will be made only at the designated MOTOROLA repair depot. Local services are not included. MOTOROLA will pay the inbound shipping charges only with use of the MOTOROLA designated delivery service. MOTOROLA will pay for outbound shipping via MOTOROLA'S normal shipping methods. SERVICE FROM THE START (SfS) LITE Provides extended hardware normal wear and tear repair coverage beginning AFTER MOTOROLAS standard Commercial Warranty period expires. Service performed under this plan consists of repair of the covered equipment as set forth in the terms and conditions. Repairs will be made only at the designated MOTOROLA repair depot. Local services are not included. MOTOROLA will pay for outbound shipping via MOTOROLA'S normal shipping methods. II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:

This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLA'S responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLAs option, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE y t n a r r a W d e t i m L i 156 English Draft i L m i t e d W a r r a n t y FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. warranty service. You can also call MOTOROLA at 1-800-927-2744 US/Canada. III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:

SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:

You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLA through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (e.g., dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:

1 Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. 2 Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. 3 Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. 4 Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. 5 A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassembles or repairs (including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-MOTOROLA supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with MOTOROLA's normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. 6 Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. 157 English Draft 7 Rechargeable batteries if:

any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering. the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. 8 Freight costs to the repair depot. 9 A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLAs published specifications or the FCC certification labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA. 10 Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. 11 Normal and customary wear and tear. VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:

MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA will y t n a r r a W d e t i m L i 158 English pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

1 that MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim, 2 that MOTOROLA will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise, and 3 should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLAs opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the Draft combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of MOTOROLA with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such MOTOROLA software. MOTOROLA software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA software or exercise of rights in such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights. VII. GOVERNING LAW:

This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, U.S.A. VIII. For Australia Only This warranty is given by Motorola Solutions Australia Pty Limited (ABN 16 004 742 312) of Tally Ho Business Park, 10 Wesley Court. Burwood East, Victoria. Our goods come with guarantees that cannot be excluded under the Australia Consumer Law. You are entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure and compensation for any other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You are also entitled to have the goods repaired or replaced if the goods fail to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to a major failure. Motorola Solutions Australias limited warranty above is in addition to any rights and remedies you may have under the Australian Consumer Law. If you have any queries, please call Motorola Solutions Australia at 1800 457 439. You may also visit our website:

http://www.motorolasolutions.com/XA-EN/Pages/

Contact_Us for the most updated warranty terms. i L m i t e d W a r r a n t y 159 English Draft SERVICE Proper repair and maintenance procedures will assure efficient operation and long life for this product. A Motorola maintenance agreement will provide expert service to keep this and all other communication equipment in perfect operating condition. A nationwide service organization is provided by Motorola to support maintenance services. Through its maintenance and installation program, Motorola makes available the finest service to those desiring reliable, continuous communications on a contract basis. For a contract service agreement, please contact your nearest Motorola service or sales representative, or an authorized Motorola dealer. Express Service Plus (ESP) is an optional extended service coverage plan, which provides for the repair of this product for a period of three years from the date of shipment from the factory, or the date of delivery if purchased from an authorized Motorola two-way radio dealer. For more information about ESP, contact the Motorola Radio Support Center, 2204 Galvin Drive, Elgin, IL 60123, 1-800-227-6772. y t n a r r a W d e t i m L i 160 English Draft Draft Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 East Algonquin Road Schaumburg, Illinois 60196 U.S.A. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 20122016 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved.

*6875947M01*

6875947M01-HC Draft

 

 

m ASTRO APX O5 Control Head Mobile Radio Quick Reference Card RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-Way Radios ATTENTION!

This radio is restricted to Occupational use only. Before using the radio, read the RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-Way Radios which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for Compliance with applicable standards and Regulations. Radio Controls Volume Knob Dim Button Home Button Power On/Off Button Indicators Mode Knob Orange Button LED Indicators Menu Entries Menu Select Button Navigation Button Accessory Port (Microphone) Radio On/Off Press the Power On/Off button to toggle the power on or off.*

* The duration that user must press and hold the Power On/Off button to turn off the radio is programmable by a qualified radio technician. Adjusting Volume Turn the Volume Knob clockwise to increase volume or counterclockwise to decrease the volume. Selecting a Zone 1 > or < to ZONE. 2 > or < button until the desired zone is displayed. 3 Press H or the PTT button to confirm the selected zone number. 4 Press the PTT button to begin transmitting on the displayed zone channel. Selecting a Channel 1 Press and hold > to scroll to CHAN and press the Menu Select button directly below CHAN. The display shows the current zone and channel. 2 Rotate the Mode knob to the desired channel. 3 Press H or the PTT button to confirm the channel. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 20092011, 2013, 2015 by Motorola Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved. 06/15 1303 East Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, Illinois 60196, U.S.A. 4 Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. Receiving and Transmitting 1 Take the microphone off hook. 2 Select zone/channel. 3 Listen for a transmission. OR Turn the Volume Knob. OR

> or < to MON then press the Menu Select button directly below MON and listen for activity. 4 Adjust volume, if necessary. 5 Press the PTT button to transmit; release to receive. Sending an Emergency Alarm 1 Press the Emergency button. A tone sounds and the display alternates EMERGENCY and the home display. 2 A dispatcher acknowledgment ACK RECEIVED display follows. AND, Trunking Only:

A high-pitched tone indicates that the alarm has been received by the trunked systems central controller. 3 Press and hold the emergency button or the PTT button to return to normal operation. To exit emergency at any time, press and hold the Emergency button.

*PMLN5592G*

PMLN5592G English Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only) 1 Press Emergency button. 2 A tone sounds and the display alternates EMERGENCY and the home display. OR A talk prohibited tone sounds when the selected channel does not support emergency. 3 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT to end the transmission. To exit emergency at any time, press and hold the Emergency button. Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button to activate the silent alarm feature. 2 The display does not change; the LED does not light up, and there is no tone. If silent emergency alarm is used with emergency call, pressing the PTT button exits the silent mode and initiates the emergency call. O Direct radio-to-radio communication or communication through a repeater. On = Direct Off = Repeater M K HOR. i j k This channel is being monitored. Voice muting the affiliated trunking talkgroup or selected conventional channel. On = Enabled Off = Disabled L = Radio is set at Low power. H = Radio is set at High power. Scanning a scan list. Blinking dot = Detects activity on the Priority-One Channel during scan. Steady dot = Detects activity on the Priority-

Two Channel during scan. The vote scan feature is enabled. m l G n o

{

On = Secure operation. Off = Clear operation. Blinking = Receiving an encrypted voice call. On = AES Secure operation. Off = Clear operation. Blinking = Receiving an encrypted voice call. On = Location feature enabled, and location signal available. Off = Location feature disabled. Blinking = Location feature enabled, but location signal unavailable. On = User is currently associated with the Off = User is currently not associated with radio. the radio. Blinking = Device registration or user registration with the server failed due to an invalid username or pin. Data activity is present. Indicates that the text entry is currently in hexadecimal mode. Receiving a call or data. Display Status Icons u t V Transmitting a call or data. The more stripes, the stronger the signal strength for the current site (trunking only). English Menu Navigation

< or > to Menu Entry. g directly below Menu Entry to select. H to exit.

< or > to scroll through sub-list. g directly below Menu Entry to select.

 

 

en-US fr-CA es-LA pt-BR RF Energy ExposureTraining and Product Safety Information for Mobile Two-Way Radios installed in Vehicles or as Fixed Site Control Stations Formation sur lexposition aux RF et information sur la scurit du produit pour radios bidirectionnelles mobiles installes dans des vhicules ou comme stations de contrle emplacements fixes Capacitacin sobre la exposicin a energa de radiofrecuencia e informacin de proteccin del producto para radios de dos vas mviles instalados en vehculos o como estaciones de control fijas Treinamento sobre a Exposio Energia de RF e Informaes de Segurana do Produto para Rdios Portteis Bidirecionais Instalados em Veculos ou como Estaes de Controle de Site Fixo English Caution Before using this radio, read this booklet which contains important operating instructions. For information on product details, brochures, user manuals and approved accessories. Please refer to www.motorolasolutions.com. Compliance with RF Exposure Standards National and international regulations require manufacturers to comply with the RF energy exposure limits for mobile two-way radios before they can be marketed. Your Motorola Solutions two-way radio is designed, manufactured, and tested to comply with all applicable national and international regulations for human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy. When two-way radios are used as a consequence of employment, applicable regulations may require users to be fully aware of and able to control their exposure to meet occupational requirements. RF Energy Exposure Awareness and Control Information and Operational Instructions for Occupational Use Notice: This radio is intended for use in occupational/controlled conditions where users are aware of their exposure and can exercise control over their exposure to meet the requirements in national and international regulations. This radio device is not authorized for general population, consumer use. For more information on what RF energy exposure is, and how to control your exposure to ensure compliance with established RF exposure limits, consult the following websites:

https://www.fcc.gov/

https://www.osha.gov/

https://osha.europa.eu/en http://www.who.int/peh-emf/project/en/

For additional user training information on exposure requirements, consult the following websites:

https://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/about/company-overview/corporate-

responsibility/governance-and-policies/wireless-communication-and-health-

faqs.html http://learning.motorolasolutions.com/

RF Exposure Compliance and Control Guidelines To control exposure to yourself and others, and to ensure compliance with the relevant RF exposure limits, always adhere to the following guidelines:

1 English Do not remove any of the RF Exposure Labels if present from this device or its related accessories. Attach these instructions to the device when you transfer it to other users. Do not use this device if the operational requirements described herein are not met. Operating Instructions Transmit no more than 50% of the time. To transmit (talk), press the Push-To-

Talk (PTT) button. To receive calls, release the PTT button. Transmitting more than 50% of the time may cause RF exposure compliance requirements to be exceeded. Transmit only when people (bystanders) outside the vehicle are at least at the recommended minimum lateral distance (as shown in Tables 1 and 2) away from the vehicle body. This separation will ensure that there is sufficient distance from a properly installed (according to the installation instructions) externally-mounted antenna to satisfy the relevant RF exposure limits. To ensure continued compliance with applicable RF exposure limits, use only Motorola Solutions approved, supplied or replacement antennas, batteries, and accessories. For a list of Motorola Solutions approved accessories please refer to your user manual or visit www.motorolasolutions.com Table 1 lists the recommended lateral distance for bystanders from the body of a vehicle (For example, truck, van, car, motorcycle) equipped with an approved, properly installed single-band mobile radio and associated antenna(s). These lateral distances, for single-band radios, depend on the radio rated power. Table 1: Rated Power of Vehicle-Installed Single-Band Mobile Radio and Recommended Minimum Lateral Distance from Vehicle Body Single-Band Mobile Radio Rated Power (see Notice) Minimum Lateral Distance of By-

standers from Vehicle Body Less than 7 W 7 to 14 W 15 to 39 W 40 to 110 W 8 in. (20 cm) 1 ft (30 cm) 2 ft (60 cm) 3 ft (90 cm) Notice: If you are not sure of the rated power of your single-band radio, contact your Motorola Solutions representative or dealer and supply the radio model number found on the radio model label. If you cannot 2 English determine the rated power, then assure 3 ft (90 cm) separation for bystanders from the body of the vehicle. Table 2 lists the recommended lateral distance for bystanders from the body of a vehicle (For example, truck, van, car, motorcycle) equipped with an approved, properly installed multi-band mobile radio and associated antenna(s). These lateral distances, for multi-band radios, depend on whether the radio is installed on a motorcycle, or on other kinds of vehicles. Table 2: Rated Power of Vehicle-Installed Multi-Band Mobile Radio and Recommended Minimum Lateral Distance from Vehicle Body Type of Vehicle Motorcycle Other vehicles Minimum Lateral Distance of By-

standers from Vehicle Body 2 ft (60 cm) 3 ft (90 cm) Mobile Antenna Installation Guidelines Make sure to follow the antenna installation guidelines that are provided in this mobile radio installation manual. Use only Motorola Solutions approved supplied antenna, or a Motorola Solutions approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the radio and may result in non-compliance with RF Safety Standards. Guidelines and Operating Instructions for Mobile Two-Way Radios Installed as Fixed Site Control Stations If mobile radio equipment is installed and operated at a fixed location, the antenna installation must comply with the following requirements in order to ensure optimal performance and compliance with applicable RF exposure limits. The antenna should be mounted outside the building on the roof or a tower if at all possible. As with all fixed site antenna installations, it is the responsibility of the licensee to manage the site in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements. Actions such as site survey measurements, signage, and site access restrictions may be required in order to ensure compliance with RF exposure limits. 3 English Electromagnetic Interference/Compatibility Notice: Nearly every electronic device is susceptible to electromagnetic interference (EMI) if inadequately shielded, designed, or otherwise configured for electromagnetic compatibility. It may be necessary to conduct compatibility testing to determine if any electronic equipment used in or around vehicles or near fixed sites equipped with mobile radio equipment is susceptible to the RF energy emitted by the mobile radio antenna, and if any measures need to be implemented to eliminate or mitigate the potential for EMI between the radio transmitter and the electronic equipment. Vehicles To avoid possible interference between the radio transmitter and any vehicle electronic control modules, such as ABS, engine, or transmission control modules, your mobile radio should be installed only by an experienced installer, using the following precautions when installing the radio:

1 Refer to the manufacturers instructions or other technical bulletins for recommendations on radio installation. 2 Before installing the radio, determine the location of the vehicle electronic control modules and their harnesses within the vehicle. 3 Route all radio wiring, including the antenna cable, as far away as possible from the electronic control units and associated harnesses. Operational Warnings The following explains the operational warnings:

For Vehicle With Air Bags Warning:

Refer to vehicle manufacturers manual prior to installation of electronic equipment to avoid interference with air bag wiring. DO NOT mount or place a mobile radio in the area over an air bag or in the air bag deployment area. Air bags inflate with great force. If a radio is placed in the air bag deployment area and the air bag inflates, the radio may be propelled with great force and cause serious injury to occupants of the vehicle. Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Warning:

Use of a radio that is not intrinsically safe in a potentially explosive atmosphere could result in a serious injury or death. You should only 4 English use a certified Intrinsically Safe radio in potentially explosive atmospheres. Explosive atmospheres refer to hazard classified locations that may contain hazardous gas, vapors, dusts, such as fueling areas below decks on boats, fuel or chemical transferor storage facilities, and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders. Areas with potentially explosive atmospheres are often, but not always, posted. Turn off your radio prior to entering any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere unless it is a radio type specifically certified for use in hazardous location areas. DO NOT remove, install, or charge batteries in such areas, or remove or install antennas. Sparks in a potentially explosive atmosphere can cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Blasting Caps and Blasting Areas Warning: To avoid possible interference with blasting operations, turn off your radio when you are near electrical blasting caps, in a blasting area, or in areas posted: Turn off two-way radio. Obey all signs and instructions. Batteries If your mobile radio is equipped with a primary or backup battery, you must follow these instructions:

Charge your battery using the approved Motorola Solutions charger. Use the battery in accordance with its water and/or dust Ingress Protection (IP) rating. Do not discard your battery into a fire. Do not replace the battery in any area labeled "Hazardous Atmosphere". Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, shred, or otherwise attempt to change the form of your battery. Do not dry a wet or damp battery with an appliance or heat source, such as a hair dryer or microwave oven. Do not allow conductive material such as jewelry, keys, or beaded chains to touch exposed battery terminals. European Union(EU) Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment

(WEEE) Directive The European Union's WEEE directive requires that products sold into EU countries must have the crossed out trash bin label on the product (or the package 5 English in some cases). As defined by the WEEE directive, this cross-out trash bin label means that customers and end-users in EU countries should not dispose of electronic and electrical equipment or accessories in household waste. Customers or end-users in EU countries should contact their local equipment supplier representative or service centre for information about the waste collection system in their country. 6 Portugus (Brasil) Ateno Antes de usar o rdio, leia este folheto, que contm importantes instrues de operao. Para obter informaes sobre detalhes do produto, folhetos, manuais do usurio e acessrios aprovados. Consulte www.motorolasolutions.com. Conformidade com os Padres de Exposio RF Os regulamentos nacionais e internacionais exigem que os fabricantes estejam em conformidade com os limites de exposio energia de RF para rdios mveis bidirecionais antes de serem comercializados. O rdio bidirecional da Motorola Solutions foi projetado, fabricado e testado para estar em conformidade com todos os regulamentos nacionais e internacionais para exposio de seres humanos energia eletromagntica de radiofrequncia. Ao usar rdios bidirecionais por motivos de trabalho, os regulamentos aplicveis podem exigir que os usurios estejam totalmente conscientes e aptos a controlar sua exposio de modo a atender s exigncias ocupacionais. Informaes sobre Conscientizao e Controle de Exposio Energia de RF e Instrues Operacionais para o Uso Ocupacional Comunicado: Este rdio destina-se ao uso em condies ocupacionais/

controladas, em que os usurios estejam cientes de sua exposio e possam exercer controle sobre ela, para atender aos requisitos nos regulamentos nacionais e internacionais. O uso do dispositivo de rdio pela populao em geral no autorizado. Para obter mais informaes sobre a exposio energia de RF e como controlar a exposio para garantir a conformidade com os limites de exposio RF estabelecidos, acesse os seguintes sites:

https://www.fcc.gov/

https://www.osha.gov/

https://osha.europa.eu/en http://www.who.int/peh-emf/project/en/

Para informaes adicionais de treinamento sobre os requisitos de exposio, acesse os seguintes sites:

https://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/about/company-overview/corporate-

responsibility/governance-and-policies/wireless-communication-and-health-

faqs.html http://learning.motorolasolutions.com/

1 Portugus (Brasil) Diretrizes de Conformidade e Controle de Exposio RF Para controlar a exposio para si e demais pessoas, e garantir conformidade com os limites de exposio RF em questo, sempre siga estas diretrizes:

No remova as Etiquetas de Exposio RF, se houverem, do dispositivo ou acessrios relacionados. Anexe essas instrues ao dispositivo quando o transferir a outros usurios. No use este dispositivo se os requisitos operacionais descritos aqui no forem atendidos. Instrues Operacionais Transmita, no mximo, 50% do tempo. Para transmitir (falar), pressione o boto PTT (Push-To-Talk). Para receber chamadas, solte o boto PTT (Push-To-Talk). Transmitir mais de 50% do tempo pode fazer que os requisitos de conformidade de exposio RF sejam excedidos. Transmita somente quando as pessoas (observadores) fora do veculo estiverem, pelo menos, distncia lateral mnima recomendada (conforme exibido na Tabela 1 e 2) da carroceria de um veculo. Essa separao garantir que haja distncia suficiente de uma antena externa adequadamente instalada

(de acordo com as instrues de instalao) para atender aos limites de exposio RF em questo. Para garantir constantemente a conformidade com os limites aplicveis de exposio RF, use apenas antenas, baterias e acessrios de reposio aprovados ou fornecidos pela Motorola Solutions. Para obter uma lista dos acessrios aprovados pela Motorola Solutions, consulte o manual do usurio ou acesse www.motorolasolutions.com A Tabela 1 lista a distncia lateral recomendada para os observadores, da carroceria de um veculo (por exemplo, caminho, van, carro, motocicleta) equipado com um rdio mvel de banda nica aprovado e instalado adequadamente e suas antenas associadas. Essas distncia laterais, para rdios de banda nica, dependem da potncia nominal do rdio. Tabela 1: Potncia Nominal de Rdios Mveis de Banda nica Instalados em Veculos e Distncia Lateral Mnima Recomendada da Carroceria do Veculo Potncia Nominal do Rdio Mvel de Banda nica (consulte o Aviso) Distncia Lateral Mnima dos Observadores da Carroceria do Veculo Inferior a 7 W 20 cm (8 polegadas) 2 Portugus (Brasil) Potncia Nominal do Rdio Mvel de Banda nica (consulte o Aviso) Distncia Lateral Mnima dos Observadores da Carroceria do Veculo 7 a 14 W 15 a 39 W 40 a 110 W 30 cm (1 p) 60 cm (2 ps) 90 cm (3 ps) Comunicado: Se voc no tiver certeza da potncia nominal do seu rdio de banda nica, entre em contato com o representante ou o fornecedor da Motorola Solutions e fornea o nmero do modelo encontrado na etiqueta de modelo do rdio. Se voc no conseguir determinar a potncia nominal, garanta uma separao de 90 cm (3 ps) da carroceria do veculo. A Tabela 2 lista a distncia lateral recomendada para os observadores, da carroceria de um veculo (por exemplo, caminho, van, carro, motocicleta) equipado com um rdio mvel de vrias bandas aprovado e instalado adequadamente e suas antenas associadas. Essas distncias laterais, para rdios de vrias bandas, dependem se o rdio est instalado em uma motocicleta ou em outros tipos de veculos. Tabela 2: Potncia Nominal de Rdios Mveis de Vrias Bandas Instalados em Veculos e Distncia Lateral Mnima Recomendada do da Carroceria do Veculo Tipo de Veculo Motocicleta Outros veculos Distncia Lateral Mnima dos Observadores da Carroceria do Veculo 60 cm (2 ps) 90 cm (3 ps) Diretrizes de Instalao da Antena Mvel No deixe de seguir as diretrizes de instalao da antena fornecidas neste manual de instalao do rdio mvel. Use somente antenas aprovadas, fornecidas ou de reposio aprovadas pela Motorola Solutions. Antenas, modificaes ou acessrios no autorizados podem danificar o rdio e resultar em no conformidade com os Padres de Segurana de RF. 3 Portugus (Brasil) Diretrizes e Instrues de Operao para Rdios Mveis Bidirecionais Instalados como Estaes de Controle de Site Fixo Se o equipamento de rdio mvel for instalado e operado em um local fixo, a instalao da antena dever seguir estes requisitos para garantir o desempenho ideal e o cumprimento dos limites de exposio energia de RF. A antena deve ser instalada fora do prdio, no teto ou em uma torre, se possvel. Assim como ocorre com todas as instalaes de antena em site fixo, de responsabilidade do licenciado gerenciar o site de acordo com os requisitos regulamentares. Aes adicionais, como medidas de inspeo do site, sinalizao, e restrio de acesso ao site podem ser necessrias a fim de garantir a conformidade com os limites de exposio RF. Interferncia/Compatibilidade Eletromagntica Comunicado: Quase todo dispositivo eletrnico suscetvel interferncia eletromagntica (EMI) quando blindado, projetado ou de alguma forma configurado inadequadamente para compatibilidade eletromagntica. Pode ser necessrio realizar testes de compatibilidade para determinar se qualquer equipamento eletrnico usado em veculos, ao seu redor, ou prximo a sites fixos suscetvel energia de RF emitida pela antena do rdio mvel e se necessrio que medidas sejam implementadas para eliminar ou diminuir o potencial de EMI (Interferncia Eletromagntica) entre o transmissor de rdio e o equipamento eletrnico. Veculos Para evitar uma possvel interferncia entre o transmissor de rdio e quaisquer mdulos de controle eletrnico de veculos, como ABS, motor ou de controle da transmisso, o rdio mvel dever ser instalado apenas por um profissional experiente, observando-se as precaues a seguir durante a instalao do rdio:

1 Consulte as instrues do fabricante ou outros boletins tcnicos para obter recomendaes sobre a instalao do rdio. 2 Antes de instalar o rdio, determine o local dos mdulos de controle eletrnico e sua fiao eltrica no veculo. 3 Direcione a fiao do rdio, incluindo o cabo da antena, o mais distante possvel de unidades de controle eletrnico e dos chicotes associados. Avisos Operacionais A seguir so explicados os avisos operacionais:

4 Portugus (Brasil) Para Veculos Equipados com Air Bags Aviso:

Consulte o manual do fabricante do veculo antes de instalar equipamentos eletrnicos para evitar interferncia com o funcionamento do air bag. NO instale nem coloque um rdio mvel sobre um air bag ou sobre a rea de expanso dos air bags. Os air bags inflam com muita fora. Se um rdio estiver colocado na rea de abertura do air bag e ele inflar, o rdio poder ser impelido com grande fora e causar graves ferimentos aos ocupantes do veculo. Ambientes Potencialmente Explosivos Aviso:

O uso de um rdio que no intrinsecamente seguro em um ambiente potencialmente explosivo poder resultar em danos graves e at em morte. Voc deve usar apenas rdios Intrinsecamente Seguros certificados em ambientes potencialmente explosivos. Ambientes potencialmente explosivos referem-se a locais classificados como de risco que podem conter gases, vapores ou ps nocivos, como reas de abastecimento embaixo do convs principal em barcos, instalaes de armazenamento ou transferncia de produtos qumicos ou combustvel e reas onde o ar contm partculas ou elementos qumicos, como fibras, poeira ou ps metlicos. As reas com ambientes potencialmente explosivos so frequentes, mas nem sempre h avisos sobre isso. Desligue o rdio antes de entrar em qualquer rea com ambientes potencialmente explosivos, a menos que o tipo de rdio seja especificamente certificado para utilizao em reas de risco. NO remova, instale ou carregue baterias nessas reas, nem remova ou instale antenas. Fascas em um ambiente potencialmente explosivo podem causar uma exploso ou incndio que pode resultar em ferimentos e, at mesmo, morte. reas e Equipamentos para Detonao Aviso: Para evitar possveis interferncias em operaes de detonao, desligue o rdio quando estiver prximo a detonadores eltricos, reas de detonao ou reas onde haja avisos tais como: Desligue rdios bidirecionais. Obedea a todas as sinalizaes e instrues. 5 Portugus (Brasil) Baterias Se o seu rdio mvel estiver equipado com uma bateria principal ou de reserva, voc deve seguir estas instrues:

Sempre carregue a bateria usando o carregador aprovado pela Motorola Solutions. Use a bateria de acordo com sua classificao de Proteo contra entrada (IP) de p e gua. No descarte a bateria no fogo. No troque a bateria em lugares identificados como "Atmosferas Potencialmente Perigosas". No desmonte, comprima, perfure, fragmente nem tente alterar de outra maneira a forma da bateria. No seque baterias molhadas nem midas usando aparelhos ou fontes de calor, como secadores de cabelo ou fornos de micro-ondas. No permita que materiais condutores como joias, chaves ou correntes toquem os terminais expostos da bateria. Diretiva de Resduos de Equipamentos Eltricos e Eletrnicos

(WEEE) para a Unio Europeia (UE) A Diretiva de WEEE da Unio Europeia exige que os produtos vendidos nos pases da UE tenham a etiqueta de lixeira riscada no produto (ou no pacote, em alguns casos). Conforme definido pela diretiva WEEE, essa etiqueta de lixeira cruzada indica que os clientes e os usurios nos pases da UE no devem descartar equipamentos ou acessrios eltricos ou eletrnicos em lixo domstico. Os clientes ou os usurios nos pases da UE devem entrar em contato com o representante local do fornecedor do equipamento ou com a central de servios para obter informaes sobre o sistema de coleta de lixo em seu pas. 6 Franais (Canada) Mise en garde Avant d'utiliser cette radio, lisez cette brochure qui contient d'importantes consignes d'utilisation. Pour obtenir plus dinformation sur les dtails du produit, les brochures, les manuels et les accessoires approuvs : Veuillez vous reporter www.motorolasolutions.com. Conformit aux normes sur l'exposition aux radiofrquences Les rglementations nationales et internationales noncent que les fabricants de radios bidirectionnelles mobiles doivent sassurer que celles-ci sont conformes aux limites dexposition l'nergie RF avant de les commercialiser. Cette radio bidirectionnelle Motorola Solutions a t conue, fabrique et teste afin de garantir sa conformit aux normes nationales et internationales lies l'exposition des tres humains l'nergie lectromagntique de radiofrquence. Lorsque les radios bidirectionnelles sont utilises des fins professionnelles, la rglementation en vigueur exige que les utilisateurs soient pleinement conscients des effets de l'exposition et qu'ils soient capables de contrler le niveau d'exposition auquel ils se soumettent afin de rpondre aux exigences de leur profession. Information de sensibilisation et de gestion de l'exposition l'nergie RF, et consignes pour l'usage professionnel Avis: Cette radio a t conue pour un usage professionnel dans un environnement contrl, o les utilisateurs sont pleinement conscients de l'exposition l'nergie RF laquelle ils sont soumis et peuvent exercer un contrle sur cette exposition afin de respecter les limites tablies par les rglements nationaux et internationaux. Ce dispositif radio n'est pas autoris pour l'utilisation grand public par des consommateurs ordinaires. Visitez les sites Web suivants pour obtenir plus de renseignements sur ce qu'est l'nergie RF et sur les moyens de contrle prendre afin de respecter les limites tablies en matire d'exposition aux radiofrquences. https://www.fcc.gov/

https://www.osha.gov/

https://osha.europa.eu/en http://www.who.int/peh-emf/project/en/

Pour plus de renseignements sur la formation des utilisateurs relativement aux limites d'exposition, consultez les sites suivants :

https://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/about/company-overview/corporate-

responsibility/governance-and-policies/wireless-communication-and-health-

faqs.html http://learning.motorolasolutions.com/

1 Franais (Canada) Directives de conformit et de contrle de l'exposition aux RF Pour contrler votre exposition ainsi que celle des autres personnes et garantir le respect des limites d'exposition aux RF applicables, observez toujours les consignes suivantes :

Ne pas retirer les tiquettes relatives l'exposition aux RF qui sont apposes sur cet appareil ou sur ses accessoires. Joignez ces directives l'appareil lorsque vous le transfrez d'autres utilisateurs. N'utilisez pas cet appareil si les conditions de fonctionnement dcrites aux prsentes ne sont pas runies. Consignes dutilisation Ne pas mettre plus de 50 % du temps. Pour transmettre (parler), appuyez sur le bouton Push-to-talk (PTT). Pour recevoir les appels, relchez le bouton PTT. Le fait de transmettre plus de 50 % du temps peut entraner le dpassement de la limite dexposition normalise au rayonnement RF. Transmettez seulement lorsque les personnes (les passants) lextrieur du vhicule se trouvent la distance latrale minimale recommande (comme illustr dans les tableaux 1 et 2) de la carrosserie du vhicule. Cet cart constitue une distance suffisante par rapport une antenne extrieure convenablement installe (conformment aux consignes dinstallation) pour rpondre aux exigences applicables en matire dexposition lnergie RF. Pour assurer la conformit continue avec les limites d'exposition aux RF applicables, utilisez uniquement les antennes, les batteries et les accessoires de remplacement ou fournis et approuvs par Motorola Solutions. Pour obtenir une liste des accessoires approuvs par Motorola Solutions, veuillez consulter votre manuel ou visitez le site www.motorolasolutions.com Le Tableau 1 indique la distance latrale recommande entre les passants et la carrosserie dun vhicule (par exemple, un camion, une fourgonnette, une voiture, une moto) dot dune radio monobande et son(ses) antenne(s) approuves et convenablement installes. Ces distances latrales, dans le cas dune radio monobande, dpendent de la puissance nominale de la radio. 2 Franais (Canada) Tableau 1: Puissance nominale de la radio mobile monobande installe dans un vhicule et distance latrale minimale recommande par rapport la carrosserie du vhicule Puissance nominale de la radio mobile monobande (voir avis) Distance latrale minimale des passants par rapport la carrosserie du vhicule Moins de 7 W 7 - 14 W 15 - 39 W 40 - 110 W 20 cm (8 po) 30 cm (1 pi) 60 cm (2 pi) 90 cm (3 pi) Avis: Si vous ntes pas sr de la puissance nominale de votre radio monobande, contactez le reprsentant ou le concessionnaire Motorola Solutions et indiquez-lui le numro de modle de la radio qui figure sur ltiquette de la radio. Si vous ne pouvez pas dterminer la puissance nominale, conservez une distance de sparation de 90 cm (3 pi) entre les passants et la carrosserie du vhicule. Le Tableau 2 indique la distance latrale recommande entre les passants et la carrosserie dun vhicule (par exemple, un camion, une fourgonnette, une voiture, une moto) dot dune radio multibande et son(ses) antenne(s) approuves et convenablement installes. Ces distances latrales, dans le cas dune radio multibande, varient selon que la radio est installe sur une moto ou sur dautres types de vhicules. Tableau 2: Puissance nominale de la radio mobile multibande installe dans un vhicule et distance latrale minimale recommande par rapport la carrosserie du vhicule Type de vhicule Motocyclette Autres vhicules. Distance latrale minimale des passants par rapport la carrosserie du vhicule 60 cm (2 pi) 90 cm (3 pi) Consignes d'installation pour les antennes de radios mobiles Veillez suivre les directives d'installation de l'antenne qui sont fournies dans le manuel d'installation de cette radio mobile. 3 Franais (Canada) Utilisez uniquement l'antenne agre fournie par Motorola Solutions ou une antenne de rechange agre par Motorola Solutions. L'utilisation d'antennes ou d'accessoires non agrs, ainsi que les modifications non agres peuvent endommager la radio et constituer une violation des normes de scurit en matire d'nergie de RF. Directives et consignes de fonctionnement des radios bidirectionnelles mobiles installes comme stations de contrle emplacements fixes Si de l'quipement de radio mobile est install et utilis dans un emplacement fixe, l'installation de l'antenne doit satisfaire aux exigences suivantes afin d'assurer un rendement optimal et la conformit aux limites d'exposition l'nergie RF. L'antenne devrait tre monte l'extrieur de l'difice sur le toit ou sur une tour, si possible. Comme pour toutes les installations d'antennes emplacements fixes, il incombe au grant de maintenir l'emplacement en conformit avec les rglements en vigueur. Les actions telles que les mesures de propagation, la signalisation et les restrictions d'accs l'emplacement peuvent tre ncessaires afin de garantir le respect des limites d'exposition aux radiofrquences. Interfrence/compatibilit lectromagntique Avis: La grande majorit des dispositifs lectroniques sont sensibles l'effet lectromagntique perturbateur (EMI) s'ils ne sont pas convenablement protgs ou s'ils ne sont pas conus ou configurs afin d'tre compatibles avec ce type de signaux lectromagntiques. Il se peut que des tests de compatibilit soient ncessaires afin de dterminer si l'un des appareils lectroniques utiliss l'intrieur ou proximit des vhicules ou prs demplacements fixes quips l'quipement radio mobile est sensible l'nergie de RF mise lantenne de radio mobile, et s'il faut prendre des mesures quelconques pour liminer ou attnuer le risque d'effet lectromagntique perturbateur (EMI) entre la radio mettrice et l'appareil lectronique. Vhicules Afin d'viter une ventuelle interfrence entre la radio mettrice et l'un des modules de contrle lectronique du vhicule, comme le contrle du systme de freinage antiblocage (ABS), le contrle du moteur ou les modules de contrle de la transmission, il est recommand de faire appel uniquement un installateur qualifi pour raliser l'installation de la radio et de prendre les prcautions suivantes :

1 Consultez la notice du fabricant ou toute autre documentation technique contenant des recommandations pour l'installation de la radio. 4 2 Avant d'installer la radio, dterminez l'emplacement des modules de commande lectronique du vhicule et leurs points d'ancrage lintrieur de celui-ci. 3 Faites passer tout le cblage de la radio, y compris le cble de l'antenne, le plus loin possible des units de commande lectronique et de leurs points dancrage. Franais (Canada) Avertissements de fonctionnement Le tableau suivant explique les avertissements de fonctionnement :

Pour vhicules quips de coussins gonflables Avertissement:

Consultez le manuel du fabricant du vhicule avant d'installer un appareil lectronique, afin d'viter toute interfrence avec le cblage des coussins gonflables. NE MONTEZ PAS ET NE PLACEZ PAS de radio mobile dans la zone situe au-dessus d'un coussin gonflable ou dans la zone de dploiement de ce dernier. Un coussin gonflable de scurit se dploie avec beaucoup de force. Si une radio se trouve dans la zone de dploiement du sac, lorsque celui-ci se gonfle, la radio peut tre propulse avec une force considrable et risque alors d'occasionner de graves lsions corporelles aux passagers du vhicule. Atmosphres potentiellement explosives Avertissement:

L'utilisation d'une radio autre qu'une radio scurit intrinsque dans une atmosphre potentiellement explosive est susceptible d'entraner des blessures graves ou la mort. Vous ne devez pas utiliser de radio de scurit intrinsque agre dans des atmosphres potentiellement explosives. On retrouve des atmosphres explosives dans les lieux classs comme tant dangereux en raison de la prsence de gaz, de vapeurs et de poussires reprsentant un danger, par exemple, les zones d'avitaillement en carburant dans des cales de bateau, les installations de transfert et de stockage de carburant ou de produits chimiques, et les zones dans lesquelles l'air est charg en produits chimiques ou en particules telles que de la poudre de crales, de la poussire ou de la poudre mtallique. Les zones atmosphres potentiellement explosives affichent gnralement des panneaux de mise en garde, mais ce n'est pas toujours le cas. teignez la radio avant d'accder un lieu prsentant une atmosphre potentiellement explosive, moins qu'il s'agisse d'un type de radio certifi spcifiquement pour une utilisation dans des zones dangereuses. 5 Franais (Canada) VITEZ d'enlever, d'installer ou de charger les batteries, ou d'enlever ou d'installer des antennes dans de tels lieux. Les tincelles dans des atmosphres potentiellement explosives peuvent provoquer une explosion ou un incendie et entraner des lsions corporelles, voire la mort. Zone de dynamitage et dtonateurs Avertissement: teignez la radio lorsque vous vous trouvez proximit de dtonateurs lectriques ou dans une zone de dynamitage afin dviter de dclencher une explosion, ou lorsque vous vous trouvez dans un endroit o il est indiqu : teindre les radios bidirectionnelles . Respectez tous les panneaux et toutes les consignes. Batteries Si votre radio mobile est dote dune batterie principale ou de secours, vous devez suivre ces instructions :

Chargez votre batterie l'aide du chargeur approuv par Motorola Solutions. Utilisez la batterie conformment son indice de protection (IP) contre l'eau et la poussire. Ne jetez pas votre batterie au feu. Ne remplacez pas la batterie dans un endroit qui porte la mention atmosphre dangereuse . Veillez ne pas dmonter, craser, percer, dcouper ou autrement modifier la forme de votre batterie. Ne faites pas scher une batterie mouille ou humide avec un appareil lectrique ou une source de chaleur, comme un schoir cheveux ou un four micro-

ondes. Ne permettez pas des matriaux conducteurs, comme des bijoux, des cls ou des mailles de chane dentrer en contact avec les bornes de la batterie. Directive sur la mise au rebut des quipements lectriques et lectroniques de l'Union europenne (UE) (WEEE) La directive WEEE de l'Union europenne exige que les produits vendus dans les pays de l'UE portent l'tiquette de la poubelle barre (ou leur emballage, dans certains cas). Comme le dfinit la directive WEEE, cette tiquette de poubelle barre signifie que les clients et les utilisateurs finaux dans les pays de l'UE ne doivent pas jeter les quipements lectriques et lectroniques ou leurs accessoires dans les ordures domestiques. Les clients ou les utilisateurs finaux dans les pays de l'UE doivent communiquer avec le reprsentant ou le centre de service de leur 6 fournisseur d'quipement pour obtenir des renseignements sur le systme de collecte des dchets de leur pays. Franais (Canada) 7 RED_2.fm Page 5 Friday, June 23, 2017 10:11 AM Notes Espaol (Latinoamrica) Precaucin Antes de usar este radio, lea el folleto que contiene instrucciones de funcionamiento importantes. Para obtener informacin sobre los detalles del producto, folletos, manuales de usuario y accesorios aprobados, consulte www.motorolasolutions.com. Conformidad con las normas sobre exposicin a la radiofrecuencia Las regulaciones nacionales e internacionales obligan a que los fabricantes cumplan con los lmites de exposicin a energa de radiofrecuencia para radios porttiles de dos vas antes de que se puedan comercializar. El radio de dos vas Motorola Solutions est diseado, fabricado y probado para cumplir con todas las regulaciones nacionales e internacionales correspondientes en materia de exposicin humana a la energa electromagntica de radiofrecuencia. Cuando los radios de dos vas se usan para trabajar, las regulaciones correspondientes podran exigir que los usuarios conozcan y controlen su nivel de exposicin para cumplir con los requisitos de uso profesional. Conocimiento de la exposicin a energa de radiofrecuencia, informacin de control e instrucciones de funcionamiento para uso ocupacional Nota: Este radio est diseado para usarse en condiciones controladas o profesionales, donde los usuarios tengan pleno conocimiento de su exposicin y puedan controlarla con el fin de cumplir con los requisitos de las regulaciones nacionales e internacionales. Este dispositivo de radio no est autorizado para el uso particular de la poblacin en general. Para obtener ms informacin sobre el significado de la exposicin a energa de radiofrecuencia y cmo controlar la exposicin con el fin de asegurar el cumplimiento de los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencias establecidos, consulte los siguientes sitios web:

https://www.fcc.gov/

https://www.osha.gov/

https://osha.europa.eu/en http://www.who.int/peh-emf/project/en/

Para obtener informacin adicional de la capacitacin de los usuarios sobre los requisitos de exposicin, consulte los siguientes sitios web:

https://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/about/company-overview/corporate-

responsibility/governance-and-policies/wireless-communication-and-health-

faqs.html 1 Espaol (Latinoamrica) http://learning.motorolasolutions.com/

Cumplimiento de exposicin a radiofrecuencia y pautas de control Para controlar el nivel de exposicin a la que usted y otros estn expuestos y garantizar el cumplimiento de los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencias correspondientes, respete siempre las siguientes pautas:

No retire ninguna de las etiquetas de exposicin a radiofrecuencias, si las hubiere, de este dispositivo o sus accesorios respectivos. Adjunte estas instrucciones al dispositivo cuando se lo transfiera a otros usuarios. No utilice este dispositivo si no se cumple con los requisitos de funcionamiento descritos en este documento. Instrucciones de funcionamiento No transmita ms de un 50 % del tiempo. Para transmitir (hablar), presione el botn Push to Talk (PTT). Para recibir llamadas, suelte el botn PTT. Una transmisin superior al 50 % del tiempo de uso podra provocar que se superen los requisitos de cumplimiento de exposicin a radiofrecuencia. Realice transmisiones solo cuando las personas (transentes) que estn fuera del vehculo se encuentren, por lo menos, a la distancia lateral mnima recomendada (segn se indica en las Tablas 1 y 2) del vehculo. Con esta separacin se garantiza que haya una distancia suficiente entre una antena instalada correctamente en el exterior (segn las instrucciones de instalacin) para cumplir con los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencia correspondientes. Para garantizar el cumplimiento continuo de los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencia correspondientes, utilice solamente las antenas, las bateras y los accesorios de repuesto suministrados o aprobados por Motorola Solutions. Para obtener una lista de los accesorios aprobados por Motorola Solutions, consulte el manual del usuario o visite www.motorolasolutions.com. En la Tabla 1 se indica la distancia lateral recomendada para transentes desde un vehculo (por ejemplo, un camin, un furgn, un automvil, una motocicleta, etc.) equipado con un radio mvil de banda nica y su(s) respectiva(s) antena(s), aprobados e instalados apropiadamente. Estas distancias laterales, para radios de banda nica, dependen de la potencia nominal del radio. 2 Espaol (Latinoamrica) Tabla 1: Potencia nominal del radio mvil de banda nica instalada en el vehculo y distancia lateral mnima recomendada desde el vehculo Potencia nominal de radio mvil de banda nica (consulte Aviso) Distancia lateral mnima para transentes desde el vehculo Menor que 7 W De 7 a 14 W De 15 a 39 W De 40 a 110 W 8 pulg. (20 cm) 1 pie (30 cm) 2 pies (60 cm) 3 pies (90 cm) Nota: Si no est seguro de la potencia nominal del radio de banda nica, contctese con un representante, distribuidor o proveedor de Motorola Solutions e indquele el nmero de modelo del radio que figura en la etiqueta. Si no puede determinar la potencia nominal, asegrese de establecer una separacin de 3 pies (90 cm) entre los transentes y el vehculo. En la Tabla 2 se indica la distancia lateral recomendada para transentes desde un vehculo (por ejemplo, un camin, un furgn, un automvil, una motocicleta, etc.) equipado con un radio mvil multibanda y su(s) respectiva(s) antena(s), aprobados e instalados apropiadamente. Estas distancias laterales, para radios multibanda, dependen de si el radio est instalado en una motocicleta o en otro tipo de vehculos. Tabla 2: Potencia nominal del radio mvil multibanda instalado en el vehculo y distancia lateral mnima recomendada desde el vehculo Tipo de vehculo Motocicleta Otros vehculos Distancia lateral mnima para transentes desde el vehculo 2 pies (60 cm) 3 pies (90 cm) Pautas de instalacin de la antena mvil Asegrese de seguir las pautas de instalacin de la antena incluidas en el manual de instalacin de este radio mvil. Use nicamente antenas suministradas y aprobadas por Motorola Solutions o una antena de repuesto aprobada por Motorola Solutions. Las antenas, las modificaciones o los agregados no autorizados podran daar el radio y causar el incumplimiento con los estndares de seguridad de RF. 3 Espaol (Latinoamrica) Pautas de control e instrucciones de funcionamiento para radios mviles de dos vas instalados en estaciones de control fijas Si el equipo de radio mvil se instala y utiliza en una ubicacin fija, la instalacin de la antena debe cumplir con los siguientes requisitos para garantizar el rendimiento ptimo y el cumplimiento de los lmites de exposicin a energa de radiofrecuencia correspondientes. La antena debe instalarse en el exterior de los edificios, en el techo o en una torre de ser posible. Al igual que en todas las instalaciones de antena en sitios fijos, la administracin del sitio, conforme a los requisitos normativos correspondientes, es responsabilidad del titular de la licencia. Es posible que sea necesario realizar acciones como inspeccionar el sitio, instalar sistemas de sealizacin y restricciones de acceso al sitio para garantizar el cumplimiento con los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencia. Interferencia y compatibilidad electromagntica Nota: Casi todos los dispositivos electrnicos son susceptibles a las interferencias electromagnticas (EMI) si no cuentan con la debida proteccin o si no estn diseados o configurados para ser compatibles con este tipo de seales electromagnticas. Es posible que sea necesario realizar pruebas de compatibilidad para determinar si algn equipo electrnico utilizado en vehculos, cerca de estos o de sitios fijos que cuenten con equipo de radio mvil es sensible a la energa de radiofrecuencia que emite la antena del radio mvil, y si es necesario implementar cualquiera de las medidas para eliminar o mitigar el potencial de EMI entre el transmisor del radio y el equipo electrnico. Vehculos Para evitar posibles interferencias entre el transmisor del radio y cualquier mdulo de control electrnico de un vehculo, como sistemas de frenado antibloqueo, motor o mdulos de control de transmisin, la instalacin del radio mvil debe ser responsabilidad de una sola persona con experiencia y que tome las siguientes precauciones durante la instalacin:

1 Consulte las pautas del fabricante u otros boletines tcnicos para ver las recomendaciones a la hora de instalar el radio. 2 Antes de instalar el radio, determine la ubicacin de los mdulos de control electrnico y el cableado dentro del vehculo. 3 Enrute todo el cableado del radio, incluido el cable de la antena, lo ms alejado posible de las unidades de control electrnicas y el cableado asociado. 4 Espaol (Latinoamrica) Advertencias de funcionamiento A continuacin, se explican las advertencias de funcionamiento:

Para vehculos con airbags Advertencia:

Consulte el manual del fabricante del vehculo antes de instalar equipos electrnicos para evitar la interferencia con el cableado de las bolsas de aire. NO instale ni ubique el radio mvil en el rea que se encuentra encima de la bolsa de aire ni en el rea de despliegue de esta. Las bolsas de aire se inflan con mucha fuerza. Si se pone un radio en la zona de despliegue de la bolsa de aire y esta se infla, es posible que el radio salga disparado con gran fuerza y cause lesiones graves a los ocupantes del vehculo. Atmsferas potencialmente explosivas Advertencia:

El uso de un radio que no sea intrnsecamente seguro en una atmsfera potencialmente explosiva puede provocar lesiones graves o la muerte. En atmsferas potencialmente explosivas, debe utilizar solamente un radio intrnsecamente seguro certificado. El trmino atmsferas explosivas se refiere a lugares clasificados como peligrosos en los que podra haber gases, vapores o polvos peligrosos, como reas con combustibles bajo las cubiertas de los botes o instalaciones de almacenamiento o transferencia de qumicos, y reas en que el aire contenga productos qumicos o partculas, como material granulado, polvo o polvo metlico. En las reas con atmsferas potencialmente explosivas generalmente hay seales de precaucin, aunque no siempre es as. Apague el radio antes de ingresar a cualquier rea que posea una atmsfera potencialmente explosiva, a menos que se trate de un tipo de radio certificado especficamente para ser usado en zonas de ubicaciones peligrosas. NO retire, instale ni cargue bateras, ni tampoco retire o instale antenas en dichas reas. Las chispas en ambientes potencialmente explosivos pueden desencadenar una explosin o un incendio, y ocasionar lesiones o incluso la muerte. 5 Espaol (Latinoamrica) reas de voladuras y explosivos Advertencia: Para evitar posibles interferencias con operaciones de voladuras, apague el radio cuando se encuentre cerca de zonas de voladuras elctricas, en un rea de explosivos o en reas donde se encuentre el siguiente aviso: Apague el radio de dos vas. Obedezca todas las seales e instrucciones. Bateras Si el radio mvil cuenta con una batera principal o de reserva, deber seguir estas instrucciones:

Cargue la batera con cargadores aprobados por Motorola Solutions. Utilice la batera de acuerdo con su clasificacin de proteccin de ingreso (IP) contra polvo y agua. No arroje la batera al fuego. No cambie la batera en un rea designada como Atmsfera peligrosa. No desarme, rompa, perfore, triture ni intente cambiar de ningn otro modo la forma de la batera. No intente secar una batera mojada o hmeda con un electrodomstico o una fuente de calor externa, como un secador de pelo o un horno microondas. No permita que materiales conductores como joyas, llaves o cadenas hagan contacto con los terminales expuestos de la batera. Directiva de Residuos de Aparatos Elctricos y Electrnicos

(RAEE) de la Unin Europea (UE) La Directiva RAEE de la Unin Europea requiere que los productos que se venden en los pases de la UE tengan la etiqueta de un bote de residuos tachado sobre el producto (o en el paquete, en algunos casos). Como define la directiva RAEE, esta etiqueta con un bote de basura tachado indica que los clientes y los usuarios finales en los pases de la UE no deben deshacerse de los equipos o accesorios elctricos y electrnicos con la basura domstica. Los clientes o los usuarios finales en los pases de la UE deben ponerse en contacto con su representante distribuidor de equipos o el centro de servicio locales para obtener informacin sobre el sistema de recoleccin de residuos de su pas. 6 RED_2.fm Page 5 Friday, June 23, 2017 10:11 AM Notes RED_2.fm Page 5 Friday, June 23, 2017 10:11 AM Notes RED_2.fm Page 5 Friday, June 23, 2017 10:11 AM MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2005 and 2017 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in

*NNTN7851E*

NNTN7851E

*6881095C99*

6881095C99-KA

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc. FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 EXHIBIT 1 IDENTIFICATION LABEL

(Pursuant to FCC Part 2.1033(c)(11) and 2.1033(b)(7)) LOCATION See the Attached Photograph or Sketch Front of Radio Back of Radio X Top of Radio Bottom of Radio Back of Radio under Belt Clip X The label is a paper polyester film laminate with a pressure sensitive adhesive backing. The adhesive is a permanent type acrylic with minimum peel strength of 40 oz/inch. TYPE MARKINGS (TEXT) X See the Attached Photograph and Exhibit 3C for the actual location of the FCC label on the device. X Label Attached Below. See Attached Drawing. FCC Label for APX8500 Page 1 of 1

 

 

FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 CONFIDENTIALITY REQUEST February 3, 2021 Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division Equipment Authorization Branch FCC Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject: Confidentiality Request for Transmitter with FCC ID:AZ492FT7118 Dear Sir / Madam, Motorola Solutions Inc is requesting that Exhibit 5 (Schematic Diagrams) and Exhibit 10 (Parts List and Tune Up Procedures) not be made routinely available for public inspection. Motorola Solutions Inc considers the information in these exhibits to be classified as trade secrets, pursuant to 47 CFR Section 0.457(d), 0.459 and Section 552(b)(4) of the Freedom of Information Act. Please mark Exhibits 5 and 10 as Confidential. Please contact me if you require any additional information. Sincerely, Deanna Zakharia Regulatory Compliance Manager E-mail: Deanna.zakharia@motorolasolutions.com ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Inc. 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard, Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33322 EXHIBIT 13B

 

 

FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 Date: February 9, 2021 Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division Equipment Authorization Branch Federal Communications Commission Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject: Application for Class 2 Permissive Change to FCC Authorized Transceiver with FCC ID:

AZ492FT7118 Dear Sir/Madam, A permissive change is requested for the subject transceiver which is marketed in United States and elsewhere. A. DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT CHANGES:

New parts have been implemented and the component changes are made only within the transmitter. The component changes are as follows:

Drop in replacement of the final stage Power Amplifier MOSFETs for all bands, the antenna switch and the capacitors. o Pin-to-pin compatible o Has the same basic function as the previous chip o No changes in radio parameters o Does not impact PCB re-layout (Transmitter) path of all the final stage power amplifiers. o Has the same basic function as the previous chip o No changes in radio parameters B. PERFORMANCE DIFFERENCES:

Replace the High Voltage Pin Diode Driver and introduce Zener diodes on the Gate Bias EMC has been assessed and found no degradation. However, degradation was found in EME for MPE compared to the original filing but still within the FCC limits. C. CONCLUSION:

This radio continues to meet al FCC emissions requirements for which authorization was granted. However, degradation was found in EME compared to the original filing but still meet requirements of a Class-2 Permissive Change. Motorola Solutions Inc. 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard, Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33322 Exhibit 13A FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 A complete Certification application is enclosed. If you require any additional information, please contact me at (954) 723-4707. Sincerely, Deanna Zakharia Regulatory Compliance Manager E-mail: Deanna.zakharia@motorolasolutions.com Motorola Solutions Inc. 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard, Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33322 Exhibit 13A

 

 

FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 February 3, 2021 Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division Equipment Authorization Branch, FCC Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject: Extended Frequencies Justification for Certification of Transmitter with FCC ID: AZ492FT7118. Dear Sir/Madam:

This transmitter was designed to operate in the following frequency ranges:

Band / Mode VHF UHF 700 800 WiFi WiFi BT/BTLE Frequency ranges 136 174 MHz 380 520 MHz 762-776 MHz, 792-806 MHz 806-825 MHz, 851-870 MHz 5170 - 5835 MHz 2400 2483.5 MHz 2402 2480 MHz FCC rule parts 22, 74, 80, 90 22, 74, 80, 90 90 90 15E 15C 15C To aid equipment authorization in other countries which accept the United States FCC Grant for Certification, Motorola Solutions is requesting that the FCC lists the above applicable frequencies range under FCC Rule Parts 22, 74, 80, and 90 on the FCC Grant. For the FCCs Rule Parts 22, 74, 80 and 90 applications, this radio is used in systems by Federal and Public Safety agencies including Police, Fire, and Emergency Medical Services, etc. as indicated in the table below. Equipment programming is the responsibility of Authorized Service Personnel. Also, the radio complies with 47 CFR Part 90.203(e) and 80.203(b), in that the operator cannot directly program the transmit frequencies using the normally accessible external controls. Per the FCCs KDB634817 guidance, as an alternative to listing the exact frequencies, we acknowledge that its a violation of the FCC Rules if this device operates on unauthorized frequencies. Part 22 Part 74 Part 80 Part 90 Federal Other Regions Frequency Range

(MHz) 136-150.8*

150.8-152.855 152.855-154 154-156.2475 156.2475-157.1875 157.1875-157.45 157.45-161.575 161.575-161.625 161.625-161-775 161.775-161.9625 161.9625-162.025 162.025-162.0375*

162.0375-173.4 173.4-174*

380-406 406.1-450 450-454 454-456 456-460 460-462.5375 462.5375-462.7375*

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x _________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Inc. 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard, Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33322 EXHIBIT 13C 462.7375-467.5375 467.5375-467.7375 467.7375-470 470-512 512-520 762-768 768-769*

769-775 775-776*

792-798 798-799*

799-805 805-806*

806-809 809-824 824-825 851-854 854-869 869-870 x FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

* Canada Please contact me if you required any additional information. Sincerely, Deanna Zakharia Regulatory Compliance Manager E-mail: Deanna.zakharia@motorolasolutions.com _________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Inc. 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard, Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33322 EXHIBIT 13C

 

 

 

 

 

 

Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc. FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 EXHIBIT 2 Statement of Certification

(Pursuant to FCC Part 2.907 and 2.908) 2.1 Statement of Certification Transceiver type described herein (AZ492FT7118) is in compliance with all applicable parts of the FCC rules. This device is P25 Compliant as well which meets FCC Part 90.548, as declared in exhibit 12. Each unit manufactured, imported, or marketed will conform to the samples tested herein, within the statistical variations that can be expected due to high volume production and test measurement error. NAME: Brandon Hammel SIGNATURE:

DATE: 11/11/2020 TITLE: Electrical Engineer EXHIBIT 2 SHEET 1 OF 2 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc. FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 2.2 Attestation Statement (Equipment Class DTS and DSS Bluetooth/WiFi) This device contains an embedded Bluetooth device and WiFi device that are compliant with the applicable FCC Part 15C and FCC Part 15E regulations. The hopping sequence must be pseudo random. Each frequency must be used equally on the average by each transmitter The receivers input bandwidth is approximately equal to the transmit bandwidth The receiver hops in sequence with the transmitted signal The system is designed to comply with all of the regulations in this section when the transmitter is presented with a continuous data (or information) The system does not coordinate its channel selection/hopping sequence with other frequency hopping systems for the express purpose of avoiding the simultaneous occupancy of individual hopping frequencies by multiple transmitters. Part 15.247 (a)(1) Part 15.247 (a)(1) Part 15.247(h) NAME: Brandon Hammel SIGNATURE:

DATE: 11/11/2020 TITLE: Electrical Engineer EXHIBIT 2 SHEET 2 OF 2